Module Catalogue - Year 3 - Cardiff Business School - Cardiff ...
Module Catalogue - Year 3 - Cardiff Business School - Cardiff ...
Module Catalogue - Year 3 - Cardiff Business School - Cardiff ...
Create successful ePaper yourself
Turn your PDF publications into a flip-book with our unique Google optimized e-Paper software.
MODULE CATALOGUE<br />
AND<br />
METHODS OF ASSESSMENT<br />
FOR ALL<br />
UNDERGRADUATE DEGREE PROGRAMMES<br />
Final <strong>Year</strong><br />
2011 – 2012
EXCLUSION CLAUSE<br />
All students are notified that the modules advertised or referred to in this catalogue are liable to be<br />
changed or withdrawn both before or after selection, for any reason including those set out below.<br />
<strong>Cardiff</strong> University accepts no responsibility for any such changes or withdrawals of modules and<br />
students select modules at their own risk.<br />
Reasons which may cause the change or withdrawal of modules include the loss of any key member<br />
of staff or insufficient take-up of modules by students; this list is not exhaustive.<br />
TIMETABLING CONSTRAINTS<br />
Whilst every effort is made to ensure that the modules offered within a particular degree programme<br />
are open to all students on that programme, there may be occasions when certain combinations of<br />
option modules cannot be timetabled and such combinations will not therefore be available.<br />
-i-
CONTENTS MODULE CATALOGUE<br />
CONTENTS<br />
REGULATIONS ...................................................................................................................... 1<br />
GENERAL .............................................................................................................................. 36<br />
1. Dates of Semesters ................................................................................................... 36<br />
2. Programme Regulations ............................................................................................ 36<br />
3. Programme Details .................................................................................................... 36<br />
4. Examining Board ....................................................................................................... 36<br />
4.1 Chair .............................................................................................................. 36<br />
4.2 Exam Board Conventions ................................................................................. 36<br />
PROGRAMME STRUCTURE .................................................................................................. 41<br />
BSc Accounting<br />
BSc Econ Accounting & Economics<br />
BSc Accounting & Finance<br />
BSc Econ Accounting & Management<br />
BSc Econ Banking & Finance<br />
BSc <strong>Business</strong> Management (all programmes)<br />
BSc <strong>Business</strong> Management & Finance<br />
BSc Econ <strong>Business</strong> Economics<br />
BSc <strong>Business</strong> Studies & Japanese<br />
BSc Econ Economics<br />
BSc Econ Economics & Finance<br />
BSc Econ Economics and Management Studies<br />
BSc Accounting with a European Language<br />
BSc Econ Banking & Finance with a European Language<br />
BSc Econ <strong>Business</strong> Economics with a European Language<br />
BSc <strong>Business</strong> Management with a European Language<br />
BSc Economics with a European Language<br />
BSc Econ Economics and Sociology<br />
BSc Econ Economics and Politics<br />
BA in Economics with a Humanities Subject<br />
BA Japanese with a Language<br />
MODULE DESCRIPTIONS .................................................................................................... 67<br />
-ii-<br />
PAGE
REGULATIONS MODULE CATALOGUE<br />
REGULATIONS FOR THE MODULAR PROGRAMME LEADING TO<br />
THE DEGREE OF<br />
BSc IN BUSINESS MANAGEMENT (ALL PROGRAMMES)*<br />
BSc ECON IN BANKING AND FINANCE<br />
BSc ECON IN BUSINESS ECONOMICS<br />
BSc ECON IN ECONOMICS<br />
BSc ECON IN ECONOMICS & FINANCE<br />
BSc ECON IN ECONOMICS AND MANAGEMENT STUDIES<br />
*Regulations relating to the degree of BSc <strong>Business</strong> Management (International<br />
Management – Route 2 – Semester Abroad) can be found on pages 7-11.<br />
1 GENERAL<br />
These regulations shall conform with the General Regulations of <strong>Cardiff</strong> University for<br />
Undergraduate Modular Programmes.<br />
2 ENTRY REQUIREMENTS<br />
In addition to satisfying the University General Requirement for entry to an undergraduate<br />
programme, candidates for admission shall normally be required:<br />
(1) to have reached a minimum age of 17 years on 1 October of the year of entry to the<br />
programme and<br />
(2) to have obtained a GCSE/GCE “O” Level pass in the following subjects at the<br />
following grades or above:<br />
English Language (C)<br />
Mathematics (B)<br />
or equivalent qualifications which are acceptable to the Selector.<br />
3 STRUCTURE OF THE PROGRAMME<br />
The programme is a full-time programme which shall extend for three years, and shall<br />
comprise six semesters.<br />
4 TIME LIMIT<br />
The time limit for completion of the programme shall be in accordance with the <strong>Cardiff</strong><br />
University Regulations for Modular Initial Degrees.<br />
5 PROGRAMME<br />
The Programme shall comprise the modules detailed in the attached <strong>Module</strong> Timetable which<br />
forms part of these regulations.<br />
6 ASSESSMENT<br />
6.1 Examinations and Assessments shall be conducted in accordance with <strong>Cardiff</strong><br />
University Regulations and Standing Orders.<br />
-1-
MODULE CATALOGUE REGULATIONS<br />
6.2 The method of assessment for each module shall be determined by the <strong>School</strong> Board<br />
upon the recommendation of the Boards of Studies and shall be specified in the<br />
approved module proforma and schedule of assessment.<br />
7 PROGRESSION<br />
7.1 General<br />
7.1.1 At the end of the Spring Semester, a meeting of the Examining Board shall<br />
consider the performance of each candidate in each module completed<br />
during the course of the Autumn and Spring semesters. The meeting of the<br />
Examining Board shall consider the performance of candidates in each of the<br />
elements of assessment specified in the appropriate module proforma.<br />
7.1.2 In accordance with the Senate Regulations for Modular Undergraduate<br />
Programmes, a candidate shall only be permitted to continue to pursue a<br />
programme provided that he/she is able to complete the programme, and do<br />
so within the approved time limit.<br />
7.1.3 Where a student is permitted by the Examining Board to retrieve a failed<br />
module, they shall attempt that module on each available occasion, or as<br />
prescribed by the Examining Board, up to a maximum of three failures in<br />
total. Absence from a resit examination shall only be condoned by the<br />
Examination Board on the production of evidence of reasonable extenuating<br />
circumstances.<br />
7.2 Full-time Programme<br />
YEAR ONE<br />
7.2.1 At the end of <strong>Year</strong> One, the Examining Board shall consider the progress of<br />
each candidate in each module pursued during the Autumn and Spring<br />
Semesters in accordance with Senate Regulations and shall determine<br />
whether he/she:<br />
(i) has obtained a minimum of 120 credits at Level One or higher and<br />
shall be permitted to proceed to the next academic stage of the<br />
programme;<br />
(ii) has not obtained sufficient credits to proceed to the next academic<br />
stage of the programme but has obtained a minimum of 60 credits<br />
and may be permitted to attempt one or more referred assessments<br />
prior to the commencement of the next academic session;<br />
(iii) is not eligible to proceed to the next academic stage of the<br />
programme but may be granted the opportunity to retrieve the failed<br />
modules in accordance with the provisions of Senate Regulations for<br />
Modular Undergraduate Programmes.<br />
7.2.2 Where a candidate is permitted to attempt one or more referred assessments<br />
prior to the commencement of the second academic year, the Examining<br />
Board shall meet again to consider the performance of each candidate in<br />
these referred assessments in accordance with Senate Regulations and shall<br />
determine whether he/she:<br />
-2-
REGULATIONS MODULE CATALOGUE<br />
YEAR TWO<br />
(i) has obtained a minimum of 120 credits at Level One or higher and<br />
shall be permitted to proceed to the next academic stage of the<br />
programme;<br />
(ii) is not eligible to proceed to the next academic stage of the<br />
programme but may be granted the opportunity to retrieve the failed<br />
module(s) in accordance with the provisions of Senate Regulations<br />
for Modular Undergraduate Programmes.<br />
7.2.3 At the end of <strong>Year</strong> Two, the Examining Board shall consider the progress of<br />
each candidate in each module pursued during the Autumn and Spring<br />
Semesters in accordance with Senate Regulations and shall determine<br />
whether he/she:<br />
(i) has obtained at least 240 credits, including the following:<br />
- a minimum of 120 credits at Level One or higher;<br />
and<br />
- a minimum of 120 credits at Level Two or higher<br />
and shall be permitted to proceed to the next academic stage of the<br />
programme;<br />
(ii) has not obtained sufficient credits to proceed to the next academic<br />
stage of the programme but has obtained a minimum of 180 credits,<br />
including the following:<br />
- a minimum of 120 credits at Level One or higher;<br />
and<br />
- a minimum of 60 credits at Level Two or higher<br />
and may be permitted to attempt one or more referred assessments<br />
prior to the commencement of the next academic session;<br />
(iii) is not eligible to proceed to the next academic stage of the<br />
programme but may be granted the opportunity to retrieve the failed<br />
module(s) in accordance with the provisions of Senate Regulations<br />
for Modular Undergraduate Programmes.<br />
7.2.4 Where a candidate is permitted to attempt to retrieve one or more failed<br />
module assessments prior to the commencement of the third academic year,<br />
the Examining Board shall meet again to consider the performance of each<br />
candidate in these assessments in accordance with Senate Regulations and<br />
shall determine whether he/she:<br />
(i) has obtained at least 240 credits, including the following:<br />
- a minimum of 120 credits at Level One or higher;<br />
and<br />
- a minimum of 120 credits at Level Two or higher<br />
and shall be permitted to proceed to the next academic stage of the<br />
programme;<br />
(ii) has obtained at least 220 credits, including the following:<br />
-3-
MODULE CATALOGUE REGULATIONS<br />
- a minimum of 120 credits at Level One or higher;<br />
and<br />
- a minimum of 100 credits at Level Two or higher<br />
and may be permitted to proceed to the next academic stage of the<br />
programme carrying one or more failed modules at Level Two, the<br />
total value of which shall not exceed 20 credits;<br />
(iii) is not eligible to proceed to the next academic stage but may be<br />
granted the opportunity to retrieve the failed module(s) in<br />
accordance with the provisions of Senate Regulations for Modular<br />
Undergraduate Programmes.<br />
7.2.5 where a student is permitted to proceed to the next academic stage of the<br />
programme carrying one or more failed modules at Level Two, he/she may<br />
be permitted to retrieve those modules during any examination period when<br />
those modules would normally be assessed, including the resit period,<br />
provided that no more than three attempts are made at any individual<br />
module. Where a student fails a core module on three occasions he/she shall<br />
be required to withdraw from the programme.<br />
7.2.6 <strong>Module</strong>s may not be retrieved once the student is eligible for the award of a<br />
degree, i.e., once a meeting of the Examining Board has considered his/her<br />
performance and he/she is deemed to have satisfied the requirements of<br />
Section 7.2.7 (i) below.<br />
YEAR THREE<br />
7.2.7 At the end of <strong>Year</strong> Three, the Examining Board shall further consider the<br />
progress of each candidate in each module pursued during the Autumn and<br />
Spring Semesters in accordance with paragraph 11 of Senate Regulations<br />
and shall determine whether he/she:<br />
(i) has obtained at least 340 credits including the following:<br />
- a minimum of 120 credits at Level One or higher<br />
- a minimum of 120 credits at Level Two or higher<br />
- a minimum of 100 credits at Level Three or higher<br />
and may be eligible for the award of an honours degree.<br />
(ii) has obtained fewer than 340 credits and may be permitted to<br />
attempt to retrieve one or more failed modules.<br />
(iii) has obtained at least 320 credits including the following:<br />
- a minimum of 120 credits at Level One or higher<br />
- a minimum of 120 credits at Level Two or higher<br />
- a minimum of 80 credits at Level Three or higher<br />
and may be eligible for the award of a pass degree.<br />
7.2.8 Where a candidate is permitted to attempt one or more referred assessments<br />
following completion of their final year of study, the Examining Board shall<br />
meet again to consider the performance of each candidate in these referred<br />
-4-
REGULATIONS MODULE CATALOGUE<br />
8 AWARD OF DEGREE<br />
assessments in accordance with Senate Regulations and shall determine<br />
whether he/she:<br />
(i) has obtained at least 340 credits including the following:<br />
- a minimum of 120 credits at Level One or higher<br />
- a minimum of 120 credits at Level Two or higher<br />
- a minimum of 100 credits at Level Three or higher<br />
and may be eligible for the award of an honours degree.<br />
(ii) has obtained fewer than 340 credits and may be permitted to<br />
attempt to retrieve one or more failed modules, provided this can be<br />
done within the time limits for the degree programme.<br />
(iii) has obtained at least 320 credits including the following:<br />
- a minimum of 120 credits at Level One or higher<br />
- a minimum of 120 credits at Level Two or higher<br />
- a minimum of 80 credits at Level Three or higher<br />
and may be eligible for the award of a pass degree.<br />
8.1 In order to qualify for the award of an honours degree, a candidate shall be required<br />
to have satisfied the criteria detailed in Senate Regulations.<br />
8.2 The classification of degree shall be determined by the Examining Board following<br />
completion of the degree.<br />
8.3 The classification shall be determined in accordance with the procedures described in<br />
Senate Regulations and shall be based upon the performance of each candidate in<br />
the Level Two and Level Three modules pursued by the candidate as part of his/her<br />
degree programme.<br />
8.4 In assessing a candidate’s final degree classification a weight of 1/30 shall be<br />
attached to the single modules at Level Two, a weight of 1/15 shall be attached to<br />
the double modules at Level Two, a weight of 1/20 shall be attached to the single<br />
modules at Level Three and a weight of 1/10 shall to the double modules at Level<br />
Three listed in the module timetable.*<br />
8.5 The final degree classification shall be determined by the Examining Board by<br />
applying the candidate’s overall result, which is calculated in accordance with the<br />
procedures described above, to the University-wide scale detailed in Senate<br />
Regulations.<br />
8.6 A candidate who fails to qualify for the award of an honours degree or a pass degree<br />
shall be dealt with in accordance with Senate regulations.<br />
NB Regulations may be subject to change. The regulations detailed here are those which apply<br />
at the time of printing.<br />
* These weightings have been agreed by Boards of Studies in accordance with Regulations.<br />
The weight given to second and final years (40/60 respectively) reflects the importance of<br />
-5-
MODULE CATALOGUE REGULATIONS<br />
advanced material studied in the final year and places greater emphasis on a student’s<br />
performance in the final year.<br />
-6-
REGULATIONS MODULE CATALOGUE<br />
REGULATIONS FOR THE MODULAR PROGRAMME LEADING TO THE DEGREE OF BSC<br />
BUSINESS MANAGEMENT (INTERNATIONAL MANAGEMENT – ROUTE 2 – SEMESTER<br />
ABROAD)<br />
NB To be eligible to apply to study abroad in an international partner institution students will:<br />
• Have completed the first year of the recognised degree courses at <strong>Cardiff</strong> <strong>Business</strong> <strong>School</strong><br />
under the Undergraduate <strong>Business</strong> Management Programme, that is, BSc <strong>Business</strong><br />
Management (General), BSc <strong>Business</strong> Management (International Management), BSc<br />
<strong>Business</strong> Management (Marketing), BSc <strong>Business</strong> Management (Logistics and Operations),<br />
<strong>Business</strong> Management (Human Resource Management).<br />
• Have met or exceeded each of the following academic performance criteria during the first<br />
year of the recognised degree:<br />
1. GENERAL<br />
• A minimum overall average mark of 60% for the first year; and<br />
• A minimum of 40% across all modules at first sitting;<br />
• In addition students eligible to apply for this route will be asked to take part in an<br />
informal interview with the Semester Abroad Co-ordinator. This interview will be a<br />
two-way communication between the student and the SAC to discuss:<br />
o Preferences of country, institution;<br />
o Advice and recommendations for module choices at preferred institutions;<br />
o Suitability for study abroad.<br />
These regulations shall conform with the General Regulations of <strong>Cardiff</strong> University for<br />
Undergraduate Modular Programmes.<br />
2 ENTRY REQUIREMENTS<br />
AAB in the three best A Levels with a minimum of grade B in Maths and C in English GCSE.<br />
Subjects Acceptable<br />
All subjects, except General Studies, are accepted by the <strong>School</strong>.<br />
3 STRUCTURE OF THE PROGRAMME<br />
The programme is a full-time programme which shall extend for three years, and shall<br />
comprise:<br />
(a) three semesters of academic study at <strong>Cardiff</strong> University,<br />
(b) one semester studying abroad at a partner institution,<br />
(c) two semesters of academic study at <strong>Cardiff</strong> University.<br />
4 TIME LIMIT<br />
The time limit for completion of the programme shall be in accordance with <strong>Cardiff</strong> University<br />
Regulations for Modular initial degrees.<br />
-7-
MODULE CATALOGUE REGULATIONS<br />
5 PROGRAMME<br />
The Programme shall comprise the modules detailed in the attached <strong>Module</strong> Timetable which<br />
forms part of these regulations.<br />
6 ASSESSMENT<br />
6.1 Examinations and Assessments shall be conducted in accordance with <strong>Cardiff</strong><br />
University Regulations and Standing Orders.<br />
6.2 The method of assessment for each module shall be determined by the <strong>School</strong> Board<br />
upon the recommendation of the Boards of Study and shall be specified in the<br />
approved module proforma and schedule of assessment.<br />
7 PROGRESSION<br />
7.1 General<br />
7.1.1 At the end of the Spring Semester, a meeting of the Examining Board shall<br />
consider the performance of each candidate in each module completed<br />
during the course of the Autumn and Spring semesters. The meeting of the<br />
Examining Board shall consider the performance of candidates in each of the<br />
elements of assessment specified in the appropriate module proforma.<br />
7.1.2 In accordance with the Senate Regulations for Modular Undergraduate<br />
Programmes, a candidate shall only be permitted to continue to pursue a<br />
programme provided that he/she is able to complete the programme, and do<br />
so within the approved time limit.<br />
7.1.3 Where a student is permitted by the Examining Board to retrieve a failed<br />
module, they shall attempt that module on each available occasion, or as<br />
prescribed by the Examining Board, up to a maximum of three failures in<br />
total. Absence from a resit examination shall only be condoned by the<br />
Examination Board on the production of evidence of reasonable extenuating<br />
circumstances.<br />
7.2 Full-time Programme<br />
YEAR ONE<br />
7.2.1 At the end of <strong>Year</strong> One, the Examining Board shall consider the progress of<br />
each candidate in each module pursued during the Autumn and Spring<br />
Semesters in accordance with Senate Regulations and shall determine<br />
whether he/she:<br />
YEAR TWO<br />
(i) has obtained a minimum of 120 credits at Level One or higher and<br />
shall be permitted to proceed to the next academic stage of the<br />
programme;<br />
7.2.2 At the end of <strong>Year</strong> Two, the Examining Board shall consider the progress of<br />
each candidate in each module pursued during the Autumn and Spring<br />
Semesters in accordance with Senate Regulations and shall determine<br />
whether he/she:<br />
-8-
REGULATIONS MODULE CATALOGUE<br />
(i) has obtained at least 240 credits, including the following:<br />
- a minimum of 120 credits at Level One or higher; and<br />
- a minimum of 120 credits at Level Two (or equivalent for<br />
international partners) or higher<br />
and shall be permitted to proceed to the next academic stage of the<br />
programme;<br />
(ii) has not obtained sufficient credits to proceed to the next academic<br />
stage but has obtained a minimum of 180 credits, including the<br />
following:<br />
- a minimum of 120 credits at Level One or higher;<br />
and<br />
- a minimum of 60 credits at Level Two or higher<br />
and may be permitted to attempt one of more referred assessments<br />
prior to the commencement of the next academic session;<br />
(iii) is not eligible to proceed to the next academic stage but may be<br />
granted the opportunity to retrieve the failed module(s) in<br />
accordance with the provisions of Senate Regulations for Modular<br />
Undergraduate Programmes.<br />
7.2.3 Where a candidate is permitted to attempt to retrieve one or more failed<br />
module assessments prior to the commencement of the third academic year,<br />
the Examining Board shall meet again to consider the performance of each<br />
candidate in these assessments in accordance with Senate Regulations and<br />
shall determine whether he/she:<br />
(i) has obtained at least 240 credits, including the following:<br />
- a minimum of 120 credits at Level One or higher;<br />
and<br />
- a minimum of 120 credits at Level Two or higher<br />
and shall be permitted to proceed to the next academic stage of the<br />
programme.<br />
(ii) has obtained at least 220 credits, including the following:<br />
- a minimum of 120 credits at Level One or higher;<br />
and<br />
- a minimum of 100 credits at Level Two or higher<br />
and may be permitted to proceed to the next academic stage<br />
of the programme carrying one or more failed modules at<br />
Level Two, the total value of which shall not exceed 20<br />
credits;<br />
(iii) is not eligible to proceed to the next academic stage but may be<br />
granted the opportunity to retrieve the failed module(s) in<br />
accordance with the provisions of Senate Regulations for Modular<br />
Undergraduate Programmes.<br />
-9-
MODULE CATALOGUE REGULATIONS<br />
7.2.4 where a student is permitted to proceed to the next academic stage of the<br />
programme carrying one or more failed modules at Level Two, he/she may<br />
be permitted to retrieve those modules during any examination period when<br />
those modules would normally be assessed, including the resit period,<br />
provided that no more than three attempts are made at any individual<br />
module. Where a student fails a core module on three occasions he/she shall<br />
be required to withdraw from the programme.<br />
7.2.5 <strong>Module</strong>s may not be retrieved once the student is eligible for the award of a<br />
degree, i.e., once a meeting of the Examining Board has considered his/her<br />
performance and he/she is deemed to have satisfied the requirements of<br />
Section 7.2.8 (i) below.<br />
YEAR THREE<br />
8 AWARD OF DEGREE<br />
7.2.6 At the end of <strong>Year</strong> Four, the Examining Board shall consider the progress of<br />
each candidate in each module pursued during the Autumn and Spring<br />
Semesters in accordance with Senate Regulations and shall determine<br />
whether he/she:<br />
(i) has obtained at least 340 credits including the following:<br />
- a minimum of 120 credits at Level One or higher<br />
- a minimum of 120 credits at Level Two or higher<br />
- a minimum of 100 credits at Level Three or higher<br />
and may be eligible for the award of an honours degree.<br />
(ii) has obtained fewer than 340 credits and may be permitted to<br />
attempt to retrieve one or more failed modules.<br />
(iii) has obtained at least 320 credits including the following:<br />
- a minimum of 120 credits at Level One or higher<br />
- a minimum of 120 credits at Level Two or higher<br />
- a minimum of 80 credits at Level Three or higher<br />
and may be eligible for the award of a pass degree.<br />
8.1 In order to qualify for the award of an honours degree, a candidate shall be required<br />
to have satisfied the criteria detailed in Senate Regulations.<br />
8.2 The classification of degree shall be determined by the Examining Board following<br />
completion of the degree.<br />
8.3 The classification shall be determined in accordance with the procedures described in<br />
Senate Regulations and shall be based on the performance of each candidate in Level<br />
Two and Level Three modules pursued by the candidate as part of his/her degree<br />
programme.<br />
-10-
REGULATIONS MODULE CATALOGUE<br />
8.4 In assessing a candidate’s final degree classification a weight of 1/30 shall be<br />
attached to the single modules at Level Two, a weight of 1/15 shall be attached to<br />
the double modules at Level Two, a weight of 1/20 shall be attached to the single<br />
modules at Level Three and a weight of 1/10 shall to the double modules at Level<br />
Three listed in the module timetable.*<br />
8.5 The final degree classification shall be determined by the Examining Board by<br />
applying the candidate’s overall result, which is calculated in accordance with the<br />
procedures described above, to the University-wide scale detailed in Senate<br />
Regulations.<br />
8.6 A candidate who fails to qualify for the award of an honours degree or a pass degree<br />
shall be dealt with in accordance with Senate regulations.<br />
NB Regulations may be subject to change. The regulations detailed here are those which apply<br />
at the time of printing.<br />
* These weightings have been agreed by Boards of Studies in accordance with Regulations.<br />
The weight given to second and final years (40/60 respectively) reflects the importance of<br />
advanced material studied in the final year and places greater emphasis on a student’s<br />
performance in the final year.<br />
-11-
MODULE CATALOGUE REGULATIONS<br />
REGULATIONS FOR THE MODULAR PROGRAMME LEADING TO<br />
THE DEGREE OF<br />
BSc IN ACCOUNTING*<br />
BSc ECON IN ACCOUNTING AND ECONOMICS<br />
BSc IN ACCOUNTING AND FINANCE*<br />
BSc ECON IN ACCOUNTING AND MANAGEMENT<br />
BSc IN BUSINESS MANAGEMENT AND FINANCE<br />
*Regulations relating to the degree of BSc Accounting and BSc Accounting and Finance with the<br />
ICAEW Placement can be found on pages 18-24.<br />
1 GENERAL<br />
These regulations shall conform with the General Regulations of <strong>Cardiff</strong> University for<br />
Undergraduate Modular Programmes.<br />
2 ENTRY REQUIREMENTS<br />
In addition to satisfying the University General Requirement for entry to an undergraduate<br />
programme, candidates for admission shall normally be required:<br />
(1) to have reached a minimum age of 17 years on 1 October of the year of entry to the<br />
programme and<br />
(2) to have obtained a GCSE/GCE “O” Level pass in the following subjects at the<br />
following grades or above:<br />
English Language (C)<br />
Mathematics (B)<br />
or equivalent qualifications which are acceptable to the Selector.<br />
3 STRUCTURE OF THE PROGRAMME<br />
The programme is a full-time programme which shall extend for three years, and shall<br />
comprise six semesters.<br />
4 TIME LIMIT<br />
The time limit for completion of the programme shall be in accordance with <strong>Cardiff</strong> University<br />
Regulations for Modular Initial Degrees.<br />
5 PROGRAMME<br />
The Programme shall comprise the modules detailed in the attached <strong>Module</strong> Timetable which<br />
forms part of these regulations.<br />
6 ASSESSMENT<br />
6.1 Examinations and Assessments shall be conducted in accordance with <strong>Cardiff</strong><br />
University Regulations and Standing Orders.<br />
6.2 The method of assessment for each module shall be determined by the <strong>School</strong> Board<br />
upon the recommendation of the Boards of Studies and shall be specified in the<br />
approved module proforma and schedule of assessment.<br />
-12-
REGULATIONS MODULE CATALOGUE<br />
6.3 In achieving the minimum mark of 40% in order to pass each module, students will<br />
be required to obtain a minimum mark of 35% in each significant element of<br />
assessment.<br />
7 PROGRESSION<br />
7.1 General<br />
6.3.1 An element of assessment shall be defined as:<br />
i each examination where the module is assessed by more than one<br />
examination;<br />
ii each examination where the module is assessed by a combination of<br />
examination and coursework;<br />
iii the total number of coursework pieces where the module is assessed<br />
by a combination of examination and coursework;<br />
iv the total number of coursework pieces where the model is assessed<br />
by more than one element of coursework.<br />
6.3.2 A significant element of assessment shall be defined as one which<br />
contributes more than 10% to the final mark for that module.<br />
7.1.1 At the end of the Spring Semester, a meeting of the Examining Board shall<br />
consider the performance of each candidate in each module completed<br />
during the course of the Autumn and Spring semesters. The meeting of the<br />
Examining Board shall consider the performance of candidates in each of the<br />
elements of assessment specified in the appropriate module proforma.<br />
7.1.2 In accordance with the Senate Regulations for Modular Undergraduate<br />
Programmes, a candidate shall only be permitted to continue to pursue a<br />
programme provided that he/she is able to complete the programme, and do<br />
so within the approved time limit.<br />
7.1.3 Where a student is permitted by the Examining Board to retrieve a failed<br />
module, they shall attempt that module on each available occasion, or as<br />
prescribed by the Examining Board, up to a maximum of three failures in<br />
total. Absence from a resit examination shall only be condoned by the<br />
Examination Board on the production of evidence of reasonable extenuating<br />
circumstances.<br />
7.2 Full-time Programme<br />
YEAR ONE<br />
7.2.1 At the end of <strong>Year</strong> One, the Examining Board shall consider the progress of<br />
each candidate in each module pursued during the Autumn and Spring<br />
Semesters in accordance with Senate Regulations and shall determine<br />
whether he/she:<br />
(i) has obtained a minimum of 120 credits at Level One or higher and<br />
shall be permitted to proceed to the next academic stage of the<br />
programme;<br />
(ii) has not obtained sufficient credits to proceed to the next academic<br />
stage of the programme but has obtained a minimum of 60 credits<br />
-13-
MODULE CATALOGUE REGULATIONS<br />
and may be permitted to attempt one or more referred assessments<br />
prior to the commencement of the next academic session;<br />
(iii) is not eligible to proceed to the next academic stage of the<br />
programme but may be granted the opportunity to retrieve the failed<br />
modules in accordance with the provisions of Senate Regulations for<br />
Modular Undergraduate Programmes.<br />
7.2.2 Where a candidate is permitted to attempt one or more referred assessments<br />
prior to the commencement of the second academic year, the Examining<br />
Board shall meet again to consider the performance of each candidate in<br />
these referred assessments in accordance with Senate Regulations and shall<br />
determine whether he/she:<br />
YEAR TWO<br />
(i) has obtained a minimum of 120 credits at Level One or higher and<br />
shall be permitted to proceed to the next academic stage of the<br />
programme;<br />
(ii) is not eligible to proceed to the next academic stage of the<br />
programme but may be granted the opportunity to retrieve the failed<br />
module(s) in accordance with the provisions of Senate Regulations<br />
for Modular Undergraduate Programmes.<br />
7.2.3 At the end of <strong>Year</strong> Two, the Examining Board shall consider the progress of<br />
each candidate in each module pursued during the Autumn and Spring<br />
Semesters in accordance with Senate Regulations and shall determine<br />
whether he/she:<br />
(i) has obtained at least 240 credits, including the following:<br />
- a minimum of 120 credits at Level One or higher;<br />
and<br />
- a minimum of 120 credits at Level Two or higher<br />
and shall be permitted to proceed to the next academic stage of the<br />
programme;<br />
(ii) has not obtained sufficient credits to proceed to the next academic<br />
stage of the programme but has obtained a minimum of 180 credits,<br />
including the following:<br />
- a minimum of 120 credits at Level One or higher;<br />
and<br />
- a minimum of 60 credits at Level Two or higher<br />
and may be permitted to attempt one or more referred assessments<br />
prior to the commencement of the next academic session;<br />
(iii) is not eligible to proceed to the next academic stage of the<br />
programme but may be granted the opportunity to retrieve the failed<br />
module(s) in accordance with the provisions of Senate Regulations<br />
for Modular Undergraduate Programmes.<br />
7.2.4 Where a candidate is permitted to attempt to retrieve one or more failed<br />
module assessments prior to the commencement of the third academic year,<br />
-14
REGULATIONS MODULE CATALOGUE<br />
the Examining Board shall meet again to consider the performance of each<br />
candidate in these assessments in accordance with Senate Regulations and<br />
shall determine whether he/she:<br />
(i) has obtained at least 240 credits, including the following:<br />
- a minimum of 120 credits at Level One or higher;<br />
and<br />
- a minimum of 120 credits at Level Two or higher<br />
and shall be permitted to proceed to the next academic stage of the<br />
programme;<br />
(ii) has obtained at least 220 credits, including the following:<br />
- a minimum of 120 credits at Level One or higher;<br />
and<br />
- a minimum of 100 credits at Level Two or higher<br />
and may be permitted to proceed to the next academic stage of the<br />
programme carrying one or more failed modules at Level Two, the<br />
total value of which shall not exceed 20 credits;<br />
(iii) is not eligible to proceed to the next academic stage but may be<br />
granted the opportunity to retrieve the failed module(s) in<br />
accordance with the provisions of Senate Regulations for Modular<br />
Undergraduate Programmes.<br />
7.2.5 where a student is permitted to proceed to the next academic stage of the<br />
programme carrying one or more failed modules at Level Two, he/she may<br />
be permitted to retrieve those modules during any examination period when<br />
those modules would normally be assessed, including the resit period,<br />
provided that no more than three attempts are made at any individual<br />
module. Where a student fails a core module on three occasions he/she shall<br />
be required to withdraw from the programme.<br />
7.2.6 <strong>Module</strong>s may not be retrieved once the student is eligible for the award of a<br />
degree, i.e., once a meeting of the Examining Board has considered his/her<br />
performance and he/she is deemed to have satisfied the requirements of<br />
Section 7.2.7 (i) below.<br />
YEAR THREE<br />
7.2.7 At the end of <strong>Year</strong> Three, the Examining Board shall further consider the<br />
progress of each candidate in each module pursued during the Autumn and<br />
Spring Semesters in accordance with paragraph 11 of Senate Regulations<br />
and shall determine whether he/she:<br />
(i) has obtained at least 340 credits including the following:<br />
- a minimum of 120 credits at Level One or higher<br />
- a minimum of 120 credits at Level Two or higher<br />
- a minimum of 100 credits at Level Three or higher<br />
and may be eligible for the award of an honours degree.<br />
-15
MODULE CATALOGUE REGULATIONS<br />
8 AWARD OF DEGREE<br />
(ii) has obtained fewer than 340 credits and may be permitted to<br />
attempt to retrieve one or more failed modules.<br />
(iii) has obtained at least 320 credits including the following:<br />
- a minimum of 120 credits at Level One or higher<br />
- a minimum of 120 credits at Level Two or higher<br />
- a minimum of 80 credits at Level Three or higher<br />
and may be eligible for the award of a pass degree.<br />
7.2.8 Where a candidate is permitted to attempt one or more referred assessments<br />
following completion of their final year of study, the Examining Board shall<br />
meet again to consider the performance of each candidate in these referred<br />
assessments in accordance with Senate Regulations and shall determine<br />
whether he/she:<br />
(i) has obtained at least 340 credits including the following:<br />
- a minimum of 120 credits at Level One or higher<br />
- a minimum of 120 credits at Level Two or higher<br />
- a minimum of 100 credits at Level Three or higher<br />
and may be eligible for the award of an honours degree.<br />
(ii) has obtained fewer than 340 credits and may be permitted to<br />
attempt to retrieve one or more failed modules, provided this can be<br />
done within the time limits for the degree programme.<br />
(iii) has obtained at least 320 credits including the following:<br />
- a minimum of 120 credits at Level One or higher<br />
- a minimum of 120 credits at Level Two or higher<br />
- a minimum of 80 credits at Level Three or higher<br />
and may be eligible for the award of a pass degree.<br />
8.1 In order to qualify for the award of an honours degree, a candidate shall be required<br />
to have satisfied the criteria detailed in Senate Regulations.<br />
8.2 The classification of degree shall be determined by the Examining Board following<br />
completion of the degree.<br />
8.3 The classification shall be determined in accordance with the procedures described in<br />
Senate Regulations and shall be based upon the performance of each candidate in<br />
the Level Two and Level Three modules pursued by the candidate as part of his/her<br />
degree programme.<br />
8.4 In assessing a candidate’s final degree classification a weight of 1/30 shall be<br />
attached to the single modules at Level Two, a weight of 1/15 shall be attached to<br />
the double modules at Level Two, a weight of 1/20 shall be attached to the single<br />
modules at Level Three and a weight of 1/10 shall be attached to the double modules<br />
at Level Three listed in the module timetable.*<br />
8.5 The final degree classification shall be determined by the Examining Board by<br />
applying the candidate’s overall result, which is calculated in accordance with the<br />
-16-
REGULATIONS MODULE CATALOGUE<br />
procedures described above, to the University-wide scale detailed in Senate<br />
Regulations.<br />
8.6 A candidate who fails to qualify for the award of an honours degree or a pass degree<br />
shall be dealt with in accordance with Senate regulations.<br />
NB Regulations may be subject to change. The regulations detailed here are those which apply<br />
at the time of printing.<br />
* These weightings have been agreed by Boards of Studies in accordance with Regulations.<br />
The weight given to second and final years (40/60 respectively) reflects the importance of<br />
advanced material studied in the final year and places greater emphasis on a student’s<br />
performance in the final year.<br />
-17
MODULE CATALOGUE REGULATIONS<br />
REGULATIONS FOR THE ICAEW PLACEMENT ROUTE OF THE MODULAR PROGRAMME<br />
LEADING TO THE DEGREE OF BSc ACCOUNTING AND BSc ACCOUNTING & FINANCE*<br />
* Only students meeting the eligibility requirements will be invited to participate in the placement<br />
programme. Places are strictly limited and it is anticipated that not all eligible students who apply will<br />
be chosen. As well as a good performance in first year, students will need a strong curriculum vitae<br />
and success at interview.<br />
1 GENERAL<br />
These regulations shall conform with the General Regulations of <strong>Cardiff</strong> University for<br />
Undergraduate Modular Programmes.<br />
2 ENTRY REQUIREMENTS<br />
In addition to satisfying the University General Requirement for entry to an undergraduate<br />
programme, candidates for admission shall normally be required:<br />
(1) to have reached a minimum age of 17 years on 1 October of the year of entry to the<br />
programme and<br />
(2) to have obtained a GCSE/GCE “O” Level pass in the following subjects at Grade B or<br />
above:<br />
English Language<br />
Mathematics<br />
or equivalent qualifications which are acceptable to the Selector.<br />
(3) to have met or exceeded each of the following academic performance criteria<br />
during the first year of the BSc Accounting or BSc Accounting & Finance degree:<br />
For each Level One module, the higher of a pass mark or the mark specified by the<br />
ICAEW to achieve their ‘credit for prior learning’; and<br />
A minimum average mark of 60% for the first year; and<br />
A minimum mark of 60% for accounting specific modules at Level One.<br />
(4) to participate successfully in a rigorous application and interview process organised<br />
by the University and the employing firm(s).<br />
3 STRUCTURE OF THE PROGRAMME<br />
The programme is a full-time programme which shall extend for four years, and shall<br />
comprise:<br />
(a) four semesters of academic study at <strong>Cardiff</strong> University,<br />
(b) a one year work placement in a professional accountancy firm or a business<br />
environment under the ICAEW’s Undergraduate Partnership Programme,<br />
(c) two semesters of academic study at <strong>Cardiff</strong> University.<br />
4 TIME LIMIT<br />
The time limit for completion of the programme shall be in accordance with <strong>Cardiff</strong><br />
University Regulations for Modular initial degrees.<br />
-18-
REGULATIONS MODULE CATALOGUE<br />
5 PROGRAMME<br />
The Programme shall comprise the modules detailed in the attached <strong>Module</strong> Timetable<br />
which forms part of these regulations.<br />
6 ASSESSMENT<br />
6.1 Examinations and Assessments shall be conducted in accordance with <strong>Cardiff</strong><br />
University Regulations and Standing Orders.<br />
6.2 The method of assessment for each module shall be determined by the <strong>School</strong><br />
Board upon the recommendation of the Boards of Studies and shall be specified<br />
in the approved module proforma and schedule of assessment.<br />
6.3 In achieving the minimum mark of 40% in order to pass each module, students will<br />
be required to obtain a minimum mark of 35% in each significant element of<br />
assessment.<br />
7 PROGRESSION<br />
7.1 General<br />
6.3.1 An element of assessment shall be defined as:<br />
i each examination where the module is assessed by more than one<br />
examination;<br />
ii each examination where the module is assessed by a combination of<br />
examination and coursework;<br />
iii the total number of coursework pieces where the module is<br />
assessed by a combination of examination and coursework;<br />
iv the total number of coursework pieces where the model is assessed<br />
by more than one element of coursework.<br />
6.3.2 A significant element of assessment shall be defined as one which<br />
contributes more than 10% to the final mark for that module.<br />
7.1.1 At the end of the Spring Semester, a meeting of the Examining Board shall<br />
consider the performance of each candidate in each module completed<br />
during the course of the Autumn and Spring semesters. The meeting of the<br />
Examining Board shall consider the performance of candidates in each of<br />
the elements of assessment specified in the appropriate module proforma.<br />
The Examining Board shall also meet after the completion of the placement<br />
year to consider the performance of students during their period of work<br />
experience and in the associated elements of assessment.<br />
7.1.4 In accordance with the Senate Regulations for Modular Undergraduate<br />
Programmes, a candidate shall only be permitted to continue to pursue a<br />
programme provided that he/she is able to complete the programme, and<br />
do so within the approved time limit.<br />
7.1.5 Where a student is permitted by the Examination Board to retrieve a failed<br />
module, they shall attempt that module on each available occasion, or as<br />
prescribed by the Examination Board, up to a maximum of three failures in<br />
total. Absence from a resit examination shall only be condoned by the<br />
-19-
MODULE CATALOGUE REGULATIONS<br />
7.2 Full-time Programme<br />
YEAR ONE<br />
Examination Board on the production of evidence of reasonable special<br />
circumstances.<br />
7.2.1 At the end of <strong>Year</strong> One, the Examining Board shall consider the progress of<br />
each candidate in each module pursued during the Autumn and Spring<br />
Semesters in accordance with Senate Regulations and shall determine<br />
whether he/she:<br />
(i) has obtained a minimum of 120 credits at Level One or higher and<br />
shall be permitted to proceed to the next academic stage of the<br />
programme;<br />
(ii) has not obtained sufficient credits to proceed to the next academic<br />
stage of the programme but has obtained a minimum of 60 credits<br />
and may be permitted to attempt one or more referred assessments<br />
prior to the commencement of the next academic session;<br />
(iii) is not eligible to proceed to the next academic stage of the<br />
programme but may be granted the opportunity to retrieve the<br />
failed modules in accordance with the provisions of Senate<br />
Regulations for Modular Undergraduate Programmes.<br />
7.2.2 Where a candidate is permitted to attempt one or more referred<br />
assessments prior to the commencement of the second academic year, the<br />
Examining Board shall meet again to consider the performance of each<br />
candidate in these referred assessments in accordance with Senate<br />
Regulations and shall determine whether he/she:<br />
YEAR TWO<br />
(i) has obtained a minimum of 120 credits at Level One or higher and<br />
shall be permitted to proceed to the next academic stage of the<br />
programme;<br />
(ii) is not eligible to proceed to the next academic stage of the<br />
programme but may be granted the opportunity to retrieve the<br />
failed module(s) in accordance with the provisions of Senate<br />
Regulations for Modular Undergraduate Programmes.<br />
7.2.3 At the end of <strong>Year</strong> Two, the Examining Board shall consider the progress of<br />
each candidate in each module pursued during the Autumn and Spring<br />
Semesters in accordance with Senate Regulations and shall determine<br />
whether he/she:<br />
(i) has obtained at least 240 credits, including the following:<br />
- a minimum of 120 credits at Level One or higher;<br />
and<br />
- a minimum of 120 credits at Level Two or higher<br />
and shall be permitted to proceed to the next academic stage of<br />
the programme;<br />
-20-
REGULATIONS MODULE CATALOGUE<br />
(ii) has not obtained sufficient credits to proceed to the next academic<br />
stage of the programme but has obtained a minimum of 180 credits,<br />
including the following:<br />
- a minimum of 120 credits at Level One or higher;<br />
and<br />
- a minimum of 60 credits at Level Two or higher<br />
and may be permitted to attempt one or more referred assessments<br />
prior to the commencement of the next academic session;<br />
(iii) is not eligible to proceed to the next academic stage of the<br />
programme but may be granted the opportunity to retrieve the<br />
failed module(s) in accordance with the provisions of Senate<br />
Regulations for Modular Undergraduate Programmes.<br />
7.2.4 Where a candidate is permitted to attempt to retrieve one or more failed<br />
module assessments prior to the commencement of the third academic<br />
year, the Examining Board shall meet again to consider the performance of<br />
each candidate in these assessments in accordance with Senate Regulations<br />
and shall determine whether he/she:<br />
(i) has obtained at least 240 credits, including the following:<br />
- a minimum of 120 credits at Level One or higher;<br />
and<br />
- a minimum of 120 credits at Level Two or higher<br />
and shall be permitted to proceed to the next academic stage of<br />
the programme;<br />
(ii) has obtained at least 220 credits, including the following:<br />
- a minimum of 120 credits at Level One or higher;<br />
and<br />
- a minimum of 100 credits at Level Two or higher<br />
and may be permitted to proceed to the next academic stage of the<br />
programme carrying one or more failed modules at Level Two, the<br />
total value of which shall not exceed 20 credits;<br />
(iii) is not eligible to proceed to the next academic stage but may be<br />
granted the opportunity to retrieve the failed module(s) in<br />
accordance with the provisions of Senate Regulations for Modular<br />
Undergraduate Programmes.<br />
7.2.5 where a student is permitted to proceed to the next academic stage of the<br />
programme carrying one or more failed modules at Level Two, he/she may<br />
be permitted to retrieve those modules during any examination period<br />
when those modules would normally be assessed, including the resit period,<br />
provided that no more than three attempts are made at any individual<br />
module. Where a student fails a core module on three occasions he/she<br />
shall be required to withdraw from the programme.<br />
7.2.6 <strong>Module</strong>s may not be retrieved once the student is eligible for the award of<br />
a degree, i.e., once a meeting of the Examining Board has considered<br />
his/her performance and he/she is deemed to have satisfied the<br />
requirements of Section 7.2.8 (i) below.<br />
-21-
MODULE CATALOGUE REGULATIONS<br />
YEAR THREE<br />
7.2.7 In order to proceed to the next stage of the degree programme, a student<br />
must complete, to the satisfaction of the University, a one year work<br />
placement in a professional accountancy firm or a business environment.<br />
The Examining Board shall meet after the completion of the placement year<br />
to consider the performance of students during their period of work<br />
experience and in the associated elements of assessment.<br />
YEAR FOUR<br />
Students who do not complete the placement to the satisfaction of the<br />
University will not normally be permitted to be reassessed.<br />
At the discretion of the <strong>School</strong> Board, a candidate who does not complete a<br />
placement to the satisfaction of the University may be permitted to<br />
transfer to the corresponding degree programme which does not include a<br />
work placement.<br />
7.2.8 At the end of <strong>Year</strong> Four, the Examining Board shall consider the progress of<br />
each candidate in each module pursued during the Autumn and Spring<br />
Semesters in accordance with Senate Regulations and shall determine<br />
whether he/she:<br />
(i) has obtained at least 460 credits including the following:<br />
- a minimum of 120 credits at Level One or higher<br />
- a minimum of 120 credits at Level Two or higher<br />
- a minimum of 120 credits at Level S or higher<br />
- a minimum of 100 credits at Level F or higher<br />
and may be eligible for the award of an honours degree.<br />
(ii) has obtained fewer than 460 credits and may be permitted to<br />
attempt to retrieve one or more failed modules.<br />
(iii) has obtained at least 440 credits including the following:<br />
- a minimum of 120 credits at Level One or higher<br />
- a minimum of 120 credits at Level Two or higher<br />
- a minimum of 120 credits at Level S or higher<br />
- a minimum of 80 credits at Level F or higher<br />
and may be eligible for the award of a pass degree.<br />
7.2.9 Where a candidate is permitted to attempt one or more referred<br />
assessments following completion of their final year of study, the Examining<br />
Board shall meet again to consider the performance of each candidate in<br />
these referred assessments in accordance with paragraph 11 of Senate<br />
Regulations and shall determine whether he/she:<br />
(i) has obtained at least 460 credits including the following:<br />
- a minimum of 120 credits at Level One or higher<br />
- a minimum of 120 credits at Level Two or higher<br />
- a minimum of 120 credits at Level S or higher<br />
- a minimum of 100 credits at Level F or higher<br />
-22-
REGULATIONS MODULE CATALOGUE<br />
8 AWARD OF DEGREE<br />
and may be eligible for the award of an honours degree.<br />
(ii) has obtained fewer than 460 credits and may be permitted to<br />
attempt to retrieve one or more failed modules, provided this can<br />
be done within the time limits for the degree programme.<br />
(iii) has obtained at least 440 credits including the following:<br />
- a minimum of 120 credits at Level One or higher<br />
- a minimum of 120 credits at Level Two or higher<br />
- a minimum of 120 credits at Level S or higher<br />
- a minimum of 80 credits at Level F or higher<br />
and may be eligible for the award of a pass degree.<br />
8.1 In order to qualify for the award of an honours degree, a candidate shall be<br />
required to have satisfied the criteria detailed in Senate Regulations.<br />
8.2 The classification of degree shall be determined by the Examining Board following<br />
completion of the degree.<br />
8.3 The classification shall be determined in accordance with the procedures described<br />
in Senate Regulations and shall be based on the performance of each candidate in<br />
Level Two and Level F modules pursued by the candidate as part of his/her degree<br />
programme. Progression to Level F shall be determined in light of performance on<br />
the placement year (Level S), credit for which shall be awarded on a pass/fail<br />
basis. The results achieved at Level S shall not normally contribute to<br />
Classification.<br />
8.4 In assessing a candidate’s final degree classification a weight of 1/30 shall be<br />
attached to the single modules at Level Two, a weight of 1/15 shall be attached to<br />
the double modules at Level Two, a weight of 1/20 shall be attached to the single<br />
modules at Level F and a weight of 1/10 shall be attached to the double modules at<br />
Level F listed in the module timetable.*<br />
8.5 The final degree classification shall be determined by the Examining Board by<br />
applying the candidate’s overall result, which is calculated in accordance with the<br />
procedures described above, to the University-wide scale detailed in Senate<br />
Regulations.<br />
8.6 A candidate who fails to qualify for the award of an honours degree or a pass<br />
degree shall be dealt with in accordance with Senate regulations.<br />
NB Regulations may be subject to change. The regulations detailed here are those which apply<br />
at the time of printing.<br />
* These weightings have been agreed by Boards of Studies in accordance with Regulations.<br />
The weight given to second and final years (40/60 respectively) reflects the importance of<br />
advanced material studied in the final year and places greater emphasis on a student’s<br />
performance in the final year.<br />
-23
MODULE CATALOGUE REGULATIONS<br />
REGULATIONS FOR THE MODULAR PROGRAMME LEADING TO<br />
THE DEGREE OF<br />
BSc IN BUSINESS MANAGEMENT WITH A EUROPEAN LANGUAGE<br />
BSc IN ECON ECONOMICS WITH A EUROPEAN LANGUAGE<br />
BSc IN ECON BANKING & FINANCE WITH A EUROPEAN LANGUAGE<br />
BSc IN ECON BUSINESS ECONOMICS WITH A EUROPEAN LANGUAGE<br />
AND<br />
BSc BUSINESS STUDIES AND JAPANESE.<br />
1 GENERAL<br />
These regulations shall conform with the General Regulations of <strong>Cardiff</strong> University for<br />
Undergraduate Modular Programmes.<br />
2 ENTRY REQUIREMENTS<br />
In addition to satisfying the University General Requirement for entry to an undergraduate<br />
programme, candidates for admission shall normally be required:<br />
(1) to have reached a minimum age of 17 years on 1 October of the year of entry to the<br />
programme and<br />
(2) to have obtained a GCSE/GCE “O” Level pass in the following subjects at the<br />
following grades or above:<br />
English Language (C)<br />
Mathematics (B)<br />
or equivalent qualifications which are acceptable to the Selector and<br />
(3) in the case of Degrees with a European language, to have obtained a pass in the<br />
modern foreign language chosen at GCE Advanced Level or equivalent qualifications<br />
which are acceptable to the Selectors.<br />
3 STRUCTURE OF THE PROGRAMME<br />
The programme is a full-time programme which shall extend for four years, and shall comprise<br />
(a) four semesters of academic study at <strong>Cardiff</strong> University,<br />
(b) an intercalated year of study at a university in the country whose language is part of<br />
the student’s degree programme,<br />
(c) two semesters of academic study at <strong>Cardiff</strong> University.<br />
4 TIME LIMIT<br />
The time limit for completion of the programme shall be in accordance with <strong>Cardiff</strong> University<br />
Regulations for Modular initial degrees.<br />
5 PROGRAMME<br />
The Programme shall comprise the modules detailed in the attached <strong>Module</strong> Timetable which<br />
forms part of these regulations.<br />
-24-
REGULATIONS MODULE CATALOGUE<br />
6 ASSESSMENT<br />
6.1 Examinations and Assessments shall be conducted in accordance with <strong>Cardiff</strong><br />
University Regulations and Standing Orders.<br />
6.2 The method of assessment for each module shall be determined by the <strong>School</strong> Board<br />
upon the recommendation of the Boards of Studies and shall be specified in the<br />
approved module proforma and schedule of assessment.<br />
7 PROGRESSION<br />
7.1 General<br />
7.1.1 At the end of the Spring Semester, a meeting of the Examining Board shall<br />
consider the performance of each candidate in each module completed<br />
during the course of the Autumn and Spring semesters. The meeting of the<br />
Examining Board shall consider the performance of candidates in each of the<br />
elements of assessment specified in the appropriate module proforma.<br />
7.1.2 In accordance with the Senate Regulations for Modular Undergraduate<br />
Programmes, a candidate shall only be permitted to continue to pursue a<br />
programme provided that he/she is able to complete the programme, and do<br />
so within the approved time limit.<br />
7.1.3 Where a student is permitted by the Examining Board to retrieve a failed<br />
module, they shall attempt that module on each available occasion, or as<br />
prescribed by the Examining Board, up to a maximum of three failures in<br />
total. Absence from a resit examination shall only be condoned by the<br />
Examination Board on the production of evidence of reasonable extenuating<br />
circumstances.<br />
7.2 Full-time Programme<br />
YEAR ONE<br />
7.2.1 At the end of <strong>Year</strong> One, the Examining Board shall consider the progress of<br />
each candidate in each module pursued during the Autumn and Spring<br />
Semesters in accordance with Senate Regulations and shall determine<br />
whether he/she:<br />
(i) has obtained a minimum of 120 credits at Level One or higher and<br />
shall be permitted to proceed to the next academic stage of the<br />
programme;<br />
(ii) has not obtained sufficient credits to proceed to the next academic<br />
stage of the programme but has obtained a minimum of 60 credits<br />
and may be permitted to attempt one or more referred assessments<br />
prior to the commencement of the next academic session;<br />
(iii) is not eligible to proceed to the next academic stage of the<br />
programme but may be granted the opportunity to retrieve the failed<br />
modules in accordance with the provisions of Senate Regulations for<br />
Modular Undergraduate Programmes.<br />
7.2.2 Where a candidate is permitted to attempt one or more referred assessments<br />
prior to the commencement of the second academic year, the Examining<br />
Board shall meet again to consider the performance of each candidate in<br />
-25-
MODULE CATALOGUE REGULATIONS<br />
YEAR TWO<br />
these referred assessments in accordance with Senate Regulations and shall<br />
determine whether he/she:<br />
(i) has obtained a minimum of 120 credits at Level One or higher and<br />
shall be permitted to proceed to the next academic stage of the<br />
programme;<br />
(ii) is not eligible to proceed to the next academic stage of the<br />
programme but may be granted the opportunity to retrieve the failed<br />
module(s) in accordance with the provisions of Senate Regulations<br />
for Modular Undergraduate Programmes.<br />
7.2.3 At the end of <strong>Year</strong> Two, the Examining Board shall consider the progress of<br />
each candidate in each module pursued during the Autumn and Spring<br />
Semesters in accordance with Senate Regulations and shall determine<br />
whether he/she:<br />
(i) has obtained at least 240 credits, including the following:<br />
- a minimum of 120 credits at Level One or higher;<br />
and<br />
- a minimum of 120 credits at Level Two or higher<br />
and shall be permitted to proceed to the next academic stage of the<br />
programme;<br />
(ii) has not obtained sufficient credits to proceed to the next academic<br />
stage of the programme but has obtained a minimum of 180 credits,<br />
including the following:<br />
- a minimum of 120 credits at Level One or higher;<br />
and<br />
- a minimum of 60 credits at Level Two or higher<br />
and may be permitted to attempt one or more referred assessments<br />
prior to the commencement of the next academic session;<br />
(iii) is not eligible to proceed to the next academic stage of the<br />
programme but may be granted the opportunity to retrieve the failed<br />
module(s) in accordance with the provisions of Senate Regulations<br />
for Modular Undergraduate Programmes.<br />
7.2.4 Where a candidate is permitted to attempt to retrieve one or more failed<br />
module assessments prior to the commencement of the third academic year,<br />
the Examining Board shall meet again to consider the performance of each<br />
candidate in these assessments in accordance with Senate Regulations and<br />
shall determine whether he/she:<br />
(i) has obtained at least 240 credits, including the following:<br />
- a minimum of 120 credits at Level One or higher;<br />
and<br />
- a minimum of 120 credits at Level Two or higher<br />
-26
REGULATIONS MODULE CATALOGUE<br />
and shall be permitted to proceed to the next academic stage of the<br />
programme;<br />
(ii) has obtained at least 220 credits, including the following:<br />
- a minimum of 120 credits at Level One or higher;<br />
and<br />
- a minimum of 100 credits at Level Two or higher<br />
and may be permitted to proceed to the next academic stage of the<br />
programme carrying one or more failed modules at Level Two, the<br />
total value of which shall not exceed 20 credits;<br />
(iii) is not eligible to proceed to the next academic stage but may be<br />
granted the opportunity to retrieve the failed module(s) in<br />
accordance with the provisions of Senate Regulations for Modular<br />
Undergraduate Programmes.<br />
7.2.5 where a student is permitted to proceed to the next academic stage of the<br />
programme carrying one or more failed modules at Level Two, he/she may<br />
be permitted to retrieve those modules during any examination period when<br />
those modules would normally be assessed, including the resit period,<br />
provided that no more than three attempts are made at any individual<br />
module. Where a student fails a core module on three occasions he/she shall<br />
be required to withdraw from the programme.<br />
7.2.6 <strong>Module</strong>s may not be retrieved once the student is eligible for the award of a<br />
degree, i.e., once a meeting of the Examining Board has considered his/her<br />
performance and he/she is deemed to have satisfied the requirements of<br />
Section 7.2.8 (i) below.<br />
YEAR THREE<br />
7.2.7 In order to proceed to the next stage of the degree programme, a student<br />
must complete, to the satisfaction of the University, an intercalated year of<br />
study at a university abroad. In the case of <strong>Business</strong> Studies & Japanese,<br />
this will be in Japan, for degrees with a language, this will be a European<br />
country of the language of the degree programme.<br />
YEAR FOUR<br />
At the discretion of the <strong>School</strong> Board, a candidate who does not complete an<br />
intercalated year of study to the satisfaction of the University may be<br />
permitted;<br />
- to repeat the intercalated year of study, on one occasion only;<br />
- to transfer to a different degree programme which does not include<br />
an intercalated year of study.<br />
7.2.8 At the end of <strong>Year</strong> Four, the Examining Board shall consider the progress of<br />
each candidate in each module pursued during the Autumn and Spring<br />
Semesters in accordance with Senate Regulations and shall determine<br />
whether he/she:<br />
(i) has obtained at least 460 credits including the following:<br />
-27
MODULE CATALOGUE REGULATIONS<br />
8 AWARD OF DEGREE<br />
- a minimum of 120 credits at Level One or higher<br />
- a minimum of 120 credits at Level Two or higher<br />
- a minimum of 120 credits at Level S or higher<br />
- a minimum of 100 credits at Level Three or higher<br />
and may be eligible for the award of an honours degree.<br />
(ii) has obtained fewer than 460 credits and may be permitted to<br />
attempt to retrieve one or more failed modules.<br />
(iii) has obtained at least 440 credits including the following:<br />
- a minimum of 120 credits at Level One or higher<br />
- a minimum of 120 credits at Level Two or higher<br />
- a minimum of 120 credits at Level S or higher<br />
- a minimum of 80 credits at Level Three or higher<br />
and may be eligible for the award of a pass degree.<br />
7.2.9 Where a candidate is permitted to attempt one or more referred assessments<br />
following completion of their final year of study, the Examining Board shall<br />
meet again to consider the performance of each candidate in these referred<br />
assessments in accordance with paragraph 11 of Senate Regulations and<br />
shall determine whether he/she:<br />
(i) has obtained at least 460 credits including the following:<br />
- a minimum of 120 credits at Level One or higher<br />
- a minimum of 120 credits at Level Two or higher<br />
- a minimum of 120 credits at Level S or higher<br />
- a minimum of 100 credits at Level Three or higher<br />
- and may be eligible for the award of an honours degree.<br />
(ii) has obtained fewer than 460 credits and may be permitted to<br />
attempt to retrieve one or more failed modules, provided this can be<br />
done within the time limit for the degree programme.<br />
(iii) has obtained at least 440 credits including the following:<br />
- a minimum of 120 credits at Level One or higher<br />
- a minimum of 120 credits at Level Two or higher<br />
- a minimum of 120 credits at Level S or higher<br />
- a minimum of 80 credits at Level Three or higher<br />
and may be eligible for the award of a pass degree.<br />
8.1 In order to qualify for the award of an honours degree, a candidate shall be required<br />
to have satisfied the criteria detailed in Senate Regulations.<br />
8.2 The classification of degree shall be determined by the Examining Board following<br />
completion of the degree.<br />
8.3.1 Degree Programmes with a European Language<br />
-28-
REGULATIONS MODULE CATALOGUE<br />
The classification shall be determined in accordance with the procedures<br />
described in Senate Regulations and shall be based on the performance of<br />
each candidate in Level Two and Level Three modules pursued by the<br />
candidate as part of his/her degree programme. Progression to Level Three<br />
shall be determined in light of performance on the Intercalary <strong>Year</strong> (Level S),<br />
credit for which shall be awarded on a pass/fail basis. The results achieved at<br />
Level S shall not normally contribute to Classification.<br />
8.3.2 <strong>Business</strong> Studies and Japanese<br />
The classification shall be determined in accordance with the procedures<br />
described in Senate Regulations and shall be based on the performance of<br />
each candidate in Level Two, the intercalary year (Level S), and Level Three<br />
modules.<br />
8.4 In assessing a candidate’s final degree classification, the following weights shall apply<br />
to the modules in the <strong>Module</strong> Timetable accompanying these Regulations:<br />
8.4.1 Degree Programmes with a European Language*<br />
Level Two CARBS <strong>Module</strong>s (60 credits) 15% (5% per 20 credit module)<br />
Level Two Language <strong>Module</strong>s (60 credits) 15% (2.5% per 10 credit module)<br />
Level Three CARBS <strong>Module</strong>s (100 credits) 55% (11% per 20 credit module)<br />
Level Three Language <strong>Module</strong> (20 credits) 15%<br />
8.4.2 <strong>Business</strong> Studies and Japanese<br />
In assessing a candidate’s final degree classification the following weights<br />
shall apply to the modules in the <strong>Module</strong> Timetable accompanying these<br />
Regulations:<br />
BS2596 Japanese Language 2A (Level 2) 5%<br />
BS2597 Japanese Language 2B (Level 2) 5%<br />
BS2595 Modern Japanese Society (Level 2) 5%<br />
The three <strong>Business</strong> Studies modules at level two shall be accorded 6.666%<br />
each.<br />
Intercalary study programme in Japan (Level S) 5%<br />
Each level 3 Japanese 30-credit module shall be accorded a weight of 15%<br />
8.5 The final degree classification shall be determined by the Examining Board by<br />
applying the candidate’s overall result, which is calculated in accordance with the<br />
procedures described above, to the University-wide scale detailed in Senate<br />
Regulations.<br />
8.6 A candidate who fails to qualify for the award of an honours degree or a pass degree<br />
shall be dealt with in accordance with Senate regulations.<br />
NB Regulations may be subject to change. The regulations detailed here are those which apply<br />
at the time of printing.<br />
* These weightings have been agreed by Boards of Studies in accordance with Regulations.<br />
The weight given to second and final years (30/70 respectively) reflects the importance of<br />
advanced material studied in the final year and places greater emphasis on a student’s<br />
performance in the final year.<br />
-29-
MODULE CATALOGUE REGULATIONS<br />
REGULATIONS FOR THE MODULAR PROGRAMME LEADING TO<br />
THE DEGREE OF<br />
BSc IN ACCOUNTING WITH A EUROPEAN LANGUAGE<br />
1 GENERAL<br />
These regulations shall conform with the General Regulations of <strong>Cardiff</strong> University for<br />
Undergraduate Modular Programmes.<br />
2 ENTRY REQUIREMENTS<br />
In addition to satisfying the University General Requirement for entry to an undergraduate<br />
programme, candidates for admission shall normally be required:<br />
(1) to have reached a minimum age of 17 years on 1 October of the year of entry to the<br />
programme and<br />
(2) to have obtained a GCSE/GCE “O” Level pass in the following subjects at the<br />
following grades or above:<br />
English Language (C)<br />
Mathematics (B)<br />
or equivalent qualifications which are acceptable to the Selector and<br />
(3) to have obtained a pass in the modern foreign language chosen at GCE Advanced<br />
Level or equivalent qualifications which are acceptable to the Selectors.<br />
3 STRUCTURE OF THE PROGRAMME<br />
The programme is a full-time programme which shall extend for four years, and shall comprise<br />
(a) four semesters of academic study at <strong>Cardiff</strong> University,<br />
(b) an intercalated year of study at a university in the country whose language is part of<br />
the student’s degree programme,<br />
(c) two semesters of academic study at <strong>Cardiff</strong> University.<br />
4 TIME LIMIT<br />
The time limit for completion of the programme shall be in accordance with <strong>Cardiff</strong> University<br />
Regulations for Modular initial degrees.<br />
5 PROGRAMME<br />
The Programme shall comprise the modules detailed in the attached <strong>Module</strong> Timetable which<br />
forms part of these regulations.<br />
6 ASSESSMENT<br />
6.1 Examinations and Assessments shall be conducted in accordance with <strong>Cardiff</strong><br />
University Regulations and Standing Orders.<br />
-30-
REGULATIONS MODULE CATALOGUE<br />
6.2 The method of assessment for each module shall be determined by the <strong>School</strong> Board<br />
upon the recommendation of the Boards of Studies and shall be specified in the<br />
approved module proforma and schedule of assessment.<br />
6.3 In achieving the minimum mark of 40% in order to pass each module, students will<br />
be required to obtain a minimum mark of 35% in each significant element of<br />
assessment.<br />
7 PROGRESSION<br />
7.1 General<br />
6.3.1 An element of assessment shall be defined as<br />
i each examination where the module is assessed by more than one<br />
examination;<br />
ii each examination where the module is assessed by a combination of<br />
examination and coursework;<br />
iii the total number of coursework pieces where the module is assessed<br />
by a combination of examination and coursework;<br />
iv the total number of coursework pieces where the model is assessed<br />
by more than one element of coursework.<br />
6.3.2 A significant element of assessment shall be defined as one which contributes<br />
more than 10% to the final mark for that module.<br />
7.1.1 At the end of the Spring Semester, a meeting of the Examining Board shall<br />
consider the performance of each candidate in each module completed<br />
during the course of the Autumn and Spring semesters. The meeting of the<br />
Examining Board shall consider the performance of candidates in each of the<br />
elements of assessment specified in the appropriate module proforma.<br />
7.1.2 In accordance with the Senate Regulations for Modular Undergraduate<br />
Programmes, a candidate shall only be permitted to continue to pursue a<br />
programme provided that he/she is able to complete the programme, and do<br />
so within the approved time limit.<br />
7.1.3 Where a student is permitted by the Examining Board to retrieve a failed<br />
module, they shall attempt that module on each available occasion, or as<br />
prescribed by the Examining Board, up to a maximum of three failures in<br />
total. Absence from a resit examination shall only be condoned by the<br />
Examination Board on the production of evidence of reasonable extenuating<br />
circumstances.<br />
7.2 Full-time Programme<br />
YEAR ONE<br />
7.2.1 At the end of <strong>Year</strong> One, the Examining Board shall consider the progress of<br />
each candidate in each module pursued during the Autumn and Spring<br />
Semesters in accordance with Senate Regulations and shall determine<br />
whether he/she:<br />
-31-
MODULE CATALOGUE REGULATIONS<br />
(i) has obtained a minimum of 120 credits at Level One or higher and<br />
shall be permitted to proceed to the next academic stage of the<br />
programme;<br />
(ii) has not obtained sufficient credits to proceed to the next academic<br />
stage of the programme but has obtained a minimum of 60 credits<br />
and may be permitted to attempt one or more referred assessments<br />
prior to the commencement of the next academic session;<br />
(iii) is not eligible to proceed to the next academic stage of the<br />
programme but may be granted the opportunity to retrieve the failed<br />
modules in accordance with the provisions of Senate Regulations for<br />
Modular Undergraduate Programmes.<br />
7.2.2 Where a candidate is permitted to attempt one or more referred assessments<br />
prior to the commencement of the second academic year, the Examining<br />
Board shall meet again to consider the performance of each candidate in<br />
these referred assessments in accordance with Senate Regulations and shall<br />
determine whether he/she:<br />
YEAR TWO<br />
(i) has obtained a minimum of 120 credits at Level One or higher and<br />
shall be permitted to proceed to the next academic stage of the<br />
programme;<br />
(ii) is not eligible to proceed to the next academic stage of the<br />
programme but may be granted the opportunity to retrieve the failed<br />
module(s) in accordance with the provisions of Senate Regulations<br />
for Modular Undergraduate Programmes.<br />
7.2.3 At the end of <strong>Year</strong> Two, the Examining Board shall consider the progress of<br />
each candidate in each module pursued during the Autumn and Spring<br />
Semesters in accordance with Senate Regulations and shall determine<br />
whether he/she:<br />
(i) has obtained at least 240 credits, including the following:<br />
- a minimum of 120 credits at Level One or higher;<br />
and<br />
- a minimum of 120 credits at Level Two or higher<br />
and shall be permitted to proceed to the next academic stage of the<br />
programme;<br />
(ii) has not obtained sufficient credits to proceed to the next academic<br />
stage of the programme but has obtained a minimum of 180 credits,<br />
including the following:<br />
- a minimum of 120 credits at Level One or higher;<br />
and<br />
- a minimum of 60 credits at Level Two or higher<br />
and may be permitted to attempt one or more referred assessments<br />
prior to the commencement of the next academic session;<br />
-32-
REGULATIONS MODULE CATALOGUE<br />
(iii) is not eligible to proceed to the next academic stage of the<br />
programme but may be granted the opportunity to retrieve the failed<br />
module(s) in accordance with the provisions of Senate Regulations<br />
for Modular Undergraduate Programmes.<br />
7.2.4 Where a candidate is permitted to attempt to retrieve one or more failed<br />
module assessments prior to the commencement of the third academic year,<br />
the Examining Board shall meet again to consider the performance of each<br />
candidate in these assessments in accordance with Senate Regulations and<br />
shall determine whether he/she:<br />
(i) has obtained at least 240 credits, including the following:<br />
- a minimum of 120 credits at Level One or higher;<br />
and<br />
- a minimum of 120 credits at Level Two or higher<br />
and shall be permitted to proceed to the next academic stage of the<br />
programme;<br />
(ii) has obtained at least 220 credits, including the following:<br />
- a minimum of 120 credits at Level One or higher;<br />
and<br />
- a minimum of 100 credits at Level Two or higher<br />
and may be permitted to proceed to the next academic stage of the<br />
programme carrying one or more failed modules at Level Two, the<br />
total value of which shall not exceed 20 credits;<br />
(iii) is not eligible to proceed to the next academic stage but may be<br />
granted the opportunity to retrieve the failed module(s) in<br />
accordance with the provisions of Senate Regulations for Modular<br />
Undergraduate Programmes.<br />
7.2.5 where a student is permitted to proceed to the next academic stage of the<br />
programme carrying one or more failed modules at Level Two, he/she may<br />
be permitted to retrieve those modules during any examination period when<br />
those modules would normally be assessed, including the resit period,<br />
provided that no more than three attempts are made at any individual<br />
module. Where a student fails a core module on three occasions he/she shall<br />
be required to withdraw from the programme.<br />
7.2.6 <strong>Module</strong>s may not be retrieved once the student is eligible for the award of a<br />
degree, i.e., once a meeting of the Examining Board has considered his/her<br />
performance and he/she is deemed to have satisfied the requirements of<br />
Section 7.2.8 (i) below.<br />
YEAR THREE<br />
7.2.7 In order to proceed to the next stage of the degree programme, a student<br />
must complete, to the satisfaction of the University, an intercalated year of<br />
study at a university in a European country of the language of the degree<br />
programme.<br />
-33-
MODULE CATALOGUE REGULATIONS<br />
YEAR FOUR<br />
At the discretion of the <strong>School</strong> Board, a candidate who does not complete an<br />
intercalated year of study to the satisfaction of the University may be<br />
permitted;<br />
- to repeat the intercalated year of study, on one occasion only;<br />
- to transfer to a different degree programme which does not include<br />
an intercalated year of study.<br />
7.2.8 At the end of <strong>Year</strong> Four, the Examining Board shall consider the progress of<br />
each candidate in each module pursued during the Autumn and Spring<br />
Semesters in accordance with Senate Regulations and shall determine<br />
whether he/she:<br />
(i) has obtained at least 460 credits including the following:<br />
- a minimum of 120 credits at Level One or higher<br />
- a minimum of 120 credits at Level Two or higher<br />
- a minimum of 120 credits at Level S or higher<br />
- a minimum of 100 credits at Level Three or higher<br />
and may be eligible for the award of an honours degree.<br />
(ii) has obtained fewer than 460 credits and may be permitted to<br />
attempt to retrieve one or more failed modules.<br />
(iii) has obtained at least 440 credits including the following:<br />
- a minimum of 120 credits at Level One or higher<br />
- a minimum of 120 credits at Level Two or higher<br />
- a minimum of 120 credits at Level S or higher<br />
- a minimum of 80 credits at Level Three or higher<br />
and may be eligible for the award of a pass degree.<br />
7.2.9 Where a candidate is permitted to attempt one or more referred assessments<br />
following completion of their final year of study, the Examining Board shall<br />
meet again to consider the performance of each candidate in these referred<br />
assessments in accordance with paragraph 11 of Senate Regulations and<br />
shall determine whether he/she:<br />
(i) has obtained at least 460 credits including the following:<br />
- a minimum of 120 credits at Level One or higher<br />
- a minimum of 120 credits at Level Two or higher<br />
- a minimum of 120 credits at Level S or higher<br />
- a minimum of 100 credits at Level Three or higher<br />
- and may be eligible for the award of an honours degree.<br />
(ii) has obtained fewer than 460 credits and may be permitted to<br />
attempt to retrieve one or more failed modules, provided this can be<br />
done within the time limits for the degree programme.<br />
(iii) has obtained at least 440 credits including the following:<br />
- a minimum of 120 credits at Level One or higher<br />
-34-
REGULATIONS MODULE CATALOGUE<br />
8 AWARD OF DEGREE<br />
- a minimum of 120 credits at Level Two or higher<br />
- a minimum of 120 credits at Level S or higher<br />
- a minimum of 80 credits at Level Three or higher<br />
and may be eligible for the award of a pass degree.<br />
8.1 In order to qualify for the award of an honours degree, a candidate shall be required<br />
to have satisfied the criteria detailed in Senate Regulations.<br />
8.2 The classification of degree shall be determined by the Examining Board following<br />
completion of the degree.<br />
8.3 The classification shall be determined in accordance with the procedures described in<br />
Senate Regulations and shall be based on the performance of each candidate in Level<br />
Two and Level Three modules pursued by the candidate as part of his/her degree<br />
programme. Progression to Level Three shall be determined in light of performance<br />
on the Intercalary <strong>Year</strong> (Level S), credit for which shall be awarded on a pass/fail<br />
basis. The results achieved at Level S shall not normally contribute to Classification.<br />
8.4 In assessing a candidate’s final degree classification the following weights shall apply<br />
to the modules in the <strong>Module</strong> Timetable accompanying these Regulations:*<br />
8.4.1 Degree Programmes with a European Language<br />
Level Two CARBS <strong>Module</strong>s (60 credits) 15% (5% per 20 credit module)<br />
Level Two Language <strong>Module</strong>s (60 credits) 15% (2.5% per 10 credit module)<br />
Level Three CARBS <strong>Module</strong>s (100 credits) 55% (11% per 20 credit module<br />
and 5.5% per 10 credit module)<br />
Level Three Language <strong>Module</strong> (20 credits) 15%<br />
8.5 The final degree classification shall be determined by the Examining Board by<br />
applying the candidate’s overall result, which is calculated in accordance with the<br />
procedures described above, to the University-wide scale detailed in Senate<br />
Regulations.<br />
8.6 A candidate who fails to qualify for the award of an honours degree or a pass degree<br />
shall be dealt with in accordance with Senate regulations.<br />
NB Regulations may be subject to change. The regulations detailed here are those which apply<br />
at the time of printing.<br />
* These weightings have been agreed by Boards of Studies in accordance with Regulations.<br />
The weight given to second and final years (30/70 respectively) reflects the importance of<br />
advanced material studied in the final year and places greater emphasis on a student’s<br />
performance in the final year.<br />
-35-
MODULE CATALOGUE PROGRAMME STRUCTURE<br />
1. Semester Dates 2011 – 2012<br />
GENERAL<br />
Monday 3 October 2011 to Sunday 29 January 2012<br />
(Christmas Vacation: Saturday 17 December 2011 to Sunday 8 January 2012)<br />
Spring Semester<br />
Monday 30 January 2012 to Friday 16 June 2012<br />
(Easter Vacation: Saturday 31 March 2012 to Sunday 22 April 2012)<br />
2. PROGRAMME REGULATIONS<br />
The Regulations which apply to the degree programmes offered by <strong>Cardiff</strong> <strong>Business</strong> <strong>School</strong><br />
are detailed on pages 1 to 35 of this module catalogue. They include information on the<br />
relative contribution of each module to the year and/or the determination of the award, the<br />
requirements for progression from one year of a programme to the next and for the award of<br />
the qualification.<br />
3. PROGRAMME DETAILS<br />
All students pursuing year 3 of a degree programme within <strong>Cardiff</strong> <strong>Business</strong> <strong>School</strong> will be<br />
required to take modules totalling 120 credits. This will comprise a combination of<br />
compulsory and optional modules, and may include double modules worth 20 credits each,<br />
and single modules worth 10 credits each. Full details of the structure of each degree<br />
programme are given on pages 41 to 66 of this catalogue.<br />
Details of individual modules are available on pages 67 to 193, and include aims, syllabi,<br />
teaching methods and methods of assessment, including the weighting of individual pieces of<br />
assessment, the duration of examinations/class tests, and deadlines for submission of incourse<br />
assessment.<br />
4. EXAMINING BOARD<br />
4.1 Chair.<br />
The Chair of the <strong>Year</strong> 3/Final <strong>Year</strong> Examining Board is Professor Peter Marlow.<br />
4.2 Examining Board Conventions.<br />
BSC IN BUSINESS MANAGEMENT<br />
BSC ECON IN BANKING AND FINANCE<br />
BSC ECON IN BUSINESS ECONOMICS<br />
BSC ECON IN ECONOMICS<br />
BSC ECON IN ECONOMICS & FINANCE<br />
BSC ECON IN ECONOMICS AND MANAGEMENT STUDIES<br />
BSC BUSINESS MANAGEMENT WITH A EUROPEAN LANGUAGE<br />
BSC ECON BANKING & FINANCE WITH A EUROPEAN LANGUAGE<br />
BSC ECON BUSINESS ECONOMICS WITH A EUROPEAN LANGUAGE<br />
BSC ECON ECONOMICS WITH A EUROPEAN LANGUAGE<br />
BSc BUSINESS STUDIES AND JAPANESE<br />
These conventions are to be read in conjunction with:<br />
• the Programme Regulations and Methods of Assessment in the <strong>Cardiff</strong><br />
<strong>Business</strong> <strong>School</strong> Degree Programme Booklet final year;<br />
-36-
PROGRAMME STRUCTURE MODULE CATALOGUE<br />
• the Senate Assessment Regulations for Modular Undergraduate Programmes<br />
(p42-63 <strong>Cardiff</strong> University Academic Regulations Handbook);<br />
• the Senate Regulations for Modular Undergraduate Programmes (p27-42<br />
<strong>Cardiff</strong> University Academic Regulations Handbook).<br />
Credit for Failed <strong>Module</strong>s<br />
In exceptional cases, usually on the basis of special circumstances, a candidate may<br />
be awarded the credits for a failed module whilst the mark is left under 40%.<br />
Rounding of Marks<br />
Rounding occurs when the coursework total is combined with the examination total<br />
to give a module mark. The overall mark is also rounded in order to calculate the<br />
degree classification. Marks of x.5 and above are rounded up to x +1, and x.49 and<br />
below are rounded down to x.<br />
Special Circumstances<br />
Where a student has requested that his/her circumstances be kept confidential, the<br />
minimum number of people who will need to be informed are the Chair and the Exam<br />
Liaison Officer.<br />
Eligibility For Compensation<br />
The term ‘Compensation’ here refers to the practice of the Examining<br />
Board awarding extra marks other than those awarded in response to<br />
special circumstances.<br />
• In order to be considered for compensation a candidate must normally<br />
obtain a mark of 40 or above in at least four of his/her six double module<br />
assessments.<br />
• A candidate who obtains a mark below 40 in two double module<br />
assessments will be eligible for compensation if his/her marks for those<br />
assessments are in the range 35-39 and his/her overall average is above 50.<br />
• A candidate who obtains a mark below 40 in just one double module<br />
assessment will be eligible for compensation if his/her mark for that<br />
assessment is in the range 35-39 and his/her overall average is above 45<br />
• A candidate will not normally be eligible for compensation if he/she obtains a<br />
mark below 35 in any double module assessment.<br />
A candidate who is awarded a compensated pass in one or more modules will<br />
normally be awarded a mark of 40 in that/those assessments but the Board can at its<br />
discretion leave the mark below 40.<br />
Note: for purposes of determining eligibility for compensation two single modules are<br />
equivalent to one double module<br />
Structure of Re-Assessment<br />
Where a candidate is permitted to repeat the assessment in a failed module, the<br />
structure of the assessment shall be 100% examination unless the Board decides that<br />
it is more appropriate to repeat the assessment under the same structure.<br />
Absence from Assessment<br />
Where a student is absent from any examination or class test or has not submitted<br />
coursework and the examining board is not satisfied that there are reasonable special<br />
circumstances it shall award a mark of zero for the examination, class test or piece of<br />
coursework.<br />
-37-
MODULE CATALOGUE PROGRAMME STRUCTURE<br />
Recording of Absence With Good Cause<br />
Where a candidate is undertaking a year abroad and does not attend an examination<br />
for a carried module he/she will be recorded as absent with good cause in any of the<br />
assessment periods during that academic year. This however, does not preclude the<br />
student actually taking an examination if he/she so chooses.<br />
In the case of students carrying a failed module in Japanese, they will be required to<br />
take a form of assessment prior to the start of the following academic year.<br />
BSC ACCOUNTING<br />
BSC ECON ACCOUNTING & ECONOMICS<br />
BSc ACCOUNTING & FINANCE<br />
BSC ECON ACCOUNTING & MANAGEMENT<br />
BSC ACCOUNTING WITH A EUROPEAN LANGUAGE<br />
BSC BUSINESS MANAGEMENT & FINANCE<br />
These conventions are to be read in conjunction with:<br />
• the Programme Regulations and Methods of Assessment in the <strong>Cardiff</strong><br />
<strong>Business</strong> <strong>School</strong> Degree Programme Booklet Final <strong>Year</strong>;<br />
• the Senate Assessment Regulations for Modular Undergraduate Programmes<br />
(<strong>Cardiff</strong> University Academic Regulations Handbook);<br />
• the Senate Regulations for Modular Undergraduate Programmes (<strong>Cardiff</strong><br />
University Academic Regulations Handbook).<br />
Credit for Failed <strong>Module</strong>s<br />
In exceptional cases, usually on the basis of special circumstances, a candidate may<br />
be awarded the credits for a failed module whilst the mark is left under 40%.<br />
Rounding of Marks<br />
Rounding occurs when the coursework total is combined with the examination total<br />
to give a module mark. The overall mark is also rounded in order to calculate the<br />
degree classification. Marks of x.5 and above are rounded up to x +1, and x.49 and<br />
below are rounded down to x.<br />
Special Circumstances<br />
Where a student has requested that his/her circumstances be kept confidential, the<br />
minimum number of people who will need to be informed are the Chair and the Exam<br />
Liaison Officer.<br />
Award of Pass in Each <strong>Module</strong><br />
In order to pass a module a candidate must achieve at least 35% in each significant<br />
piece of assessment as well as achieve an overall average of at least 40%. A<br />
significant element of assessment is defined as one which contributes more than<br />
10% to the final module mark and an element is defined as:<br />
• each examination where the module is assessed by more than one<br />
examination;<br />
• the total for the coursework pieces where the module is assessed by a<br />
combination of examination and coursework;<br />
• each examination where the module is assessed by a combination of<br />
examination and coursework;<br />
• the total for the coursework pieces where the module is assessed by more<br />
than one piece of coursework.<br />
-38-
PROGRAMME STRUCTURE MODULE CATALOGUE<br />
Structure of Re-Assessment<br />
Students who fail a module, whether:<br />
i. by failing to attain 35% in each significant element of assessment; or<br />
ii. by failing to achieve a minimum overall mark of 40% for the module; or<br />
iii. both<br />
shall be required to resit those significant elements of assessment which they have<br />
failed (i.e. those for which they have achieved below 40%) up to a maximum of 3<br />
attempts.<br />
At the resit board resit candidates shall be assessed on the combined marks for each<br />
element of assessment for each module. Where candidates fail to complete a resit<br />
assessment and the examining board is not satisfied that there are reasonable special<br />
circumstances it shall award a mark of zero for that resit assessment. In order to<br />
pass the module students must achieve a minimum overall mark of 40% for the<br />
module and a minimum of 35% in each significant element of assessment. The<br />
marks considered will be the highest achieved for each element of assessment at any<br />
attempt. In all cases where a student resits the module mark shall be capped at<br />
40%.<br />
Where a student achieves an overall mark for a module of 40% or more but fails that<br />
module through failing to achieve 35% in each significant element of assessment, the<br />
module mark shall be recorded as 39%.<br />
Absence from Assessment<br />
Where a student is absent from any examination or class test or has not submitted<br />
coursework and the examining board is not satisfied that there are reasonable special<br />
circumstances it shall award a mark of zero for the examination, class test or piece of<br />
coursework.<br />
Recording of Absence With Good Cause<br />
Where a candidate is undertaking a year abroad and does not attend an examination<br />
for a carried module he/she will be recorded as absent with good cause in any of the<br />
assessment periods during that academic year. This however, does not preclude the<br />
student actually taking an examination if he/she so chooses.<br />
4.3 Anonymous Marking<br />
4.3.1 Examinations.<br />
In accordance with University Senate Assessment Regulations, all<br />
examination papers are marked anonymously at the internal marking stage,<br />
(only the students’ numbers are known to the marker until the marks are<br />
entered onto the database as confirmed internal marks - if the identity of a<br />
student needs to be revealed prior to the internal marking process being<br />
completed, the <strong>School</strong> follows the procedures set out in Senate Assessment<br />
Regulation 7.3).<br />
4.3.2 Class Tests and Other Coursework.<br />
Coursework and class tests are not marked anonymously; the students’ name<br />
is known to the marker.<br />
-39-
MODULE CATALOGUE PROGRAMME STRUCTURE<br />
PROGRAMME<br />
STRUCTURES<br />
FINAL YEAR<br />
-40-
PROGRAMME STRUCTURE MODULE CATALOGUE<br />
AIMS OF THE PROGRAMME<br />
N400 BSc ACCOUNTING<br />
This degree programme is aimed at providing a thorough understanding of the discipline of<br />
accounting. The theory, concepts, principles and techniques of the core subject areas of financial<br />
accounting, management accounting and business finance and the closely related subject areas of<br />
auditing, taxation and other specialist topics chosen from a range of permitted option modules, are<br />
covered in depth. The close relationship between accounting and the disciplines of economics, law<br />
and management is emphasised throughout the programme.<br />
The degree programme is organised to develop students' academic and technical skills and to provide<br />
the breadth of understanding that is an essential requisite for a successful career in accounting and<br />
business.<br />
YEAR 3 – REQUIREMENTS<br />
Three compulsory double modules<br />
BS3502 <strong>Business</strong> Finance<br />
BS3504 Financial Accounting<br />
BS3517 Management Accounting and Control<br />
Three single modules per semester<br />
Autumn Spring<br />
3 Single <strong>Module</strong>s from 3 Single <strong>Module</strong>s from<br />
BS3512 Accounting Information Systems BS3613 Accounting Investigation<br />
BS3503 Development of Accounting BS3614 Corporate Governance and<br />
Accountability<br />
BS3506 International Accounting BS3612 Public Sector Accounting<br />
BS3520 Analysis of Financial Reporting<br />
Information<br />
BS3618 The Accounting Profession<br />
-41-
MODULE CATALOGUE PROGRAMME STRUCTURE<br />
LN14 BSc ECON ACCOUNTING AND<br />
ECONOMICS<br />
AIMS OF THE PROGRAMME<br />
This degree programme is aimed at providing a thorough understanding of the disciplines of<br />
accounting and economics. This will be achieved by covering in depth the core accounting subject<br />
areas of financial accounting, management accounting and business finance. Also, through the use<br />
of module groups in economics in the second and third years, the programme has the aim of<br />
permitting students to choose the additional subjects they would prefer to study and examine in<br />
depth.<br />
YEAR 3 – REQUIREMENTS<br />
Three compulsory double modules<br />
BS3502 <strong>Business</strong> Finance<br />
BS3504 Financial Accounting<br />
BS3517 Management Accounting and Control<br />
Plus modules from one of the following groups<br />
Group 1<br />
Three double modules from<br />
BS3571 Economics of Banking<br />
BS3554 Financial Economics<br />
BS3555 International Finance<br />
BS3548 <strong>Business</strong> History<br />
Group 2<br />
Three double modules from<br />
BS3570 Applied Macroeconomics & Finance<br />
BS3548 <strong>Business</strong> History<br />
BS3547 <strong>Business</strong> Applications<br />
BS3572 Industrial Economics<br />
BS3561 Modern <strong>Business</strong> Enterprise<br />
Group 3<br />
Both<br />
BS3565 Macroeconomic Analysis<br />
BS3566 Microeconomic Analysis<br />
and one double module from<br />
BS3546 Applied Welfare Economics<br />
BS3548 <strong>Business</strong> History<br />
BS3551 Econometrics<br />
BS3556 International Economic History<br />
BS3568 International Trade<br />
BS3558 Labour Economics<br />
BS3562 Public Finance (Please note that this module will not run in the 2011-12 session)<br />
REQUIREMENTS<br />
Students who studied BS2551 Money, Banking and Finance must select modules from Group 1<br />
Students who studied BS2560 Managerial Economics must select modules from Group 2<br />
Students who studied BS2549 Macroeconomic Theory must select modules from Group 3<br />
-42-
PROGRAMME STRUCTURE MODULE CATALOGUE<br />
N490 BSc ACCOUNTING AND FINANCE<br />
AIMS OF THE PROGRAMME<br />
The overall aim of the programme is to provide students with a thorough understanding of the<br />
discipline of accounting and finance. At the same time it seeks to enable students to select for study<br />
particular aspects of these and cognate disciplines that suit their own individual interests and<br />
requirements within a framework of ensuring that the totality of modules followed represents a<br />
coherent learning experience. The close relationship between accounting and finance and the<br />
disciplines of economics, law and management is emphasised throughout the programme. The<br />
degree programme is organised to develop students’ academic and technical skills and to provide the<br />
breadth of understanding that is an essential requisite for successful careers in accounting, finance<br />
and business. Appropriate skills training and use are both embedded within the modules taken and,<br />
where necessary, provided as additional components. Within these skills, it is intended that the<br />
programme of study meets, and exceeds, the requirements of the Accounting Benchmark Statement<br />
issued by the QAA and fulfils the exemption requirements of professional accounting bodies.<br />
YEAR 3 – REQUIREMENTS<br />
Four compulsory double modules<br />
BS3502 <strong>Business</strong> Finance<br />
BS3504 Financial Accounting<br />
BS3517 Management Accounting and Control<br />
BS3514 International Corporate Finance<br />
Plus One Compulsory Single <strong>Module</strong> per Semester<br />
Autumn Semester Spring Semester<br />
BS3515 Financial Derivatives BS3615 Security Analysis & Portfolio<br />
Management<br />
Plus One Single <strong>Module</strong> per Semester from<br />
Autumn Semester Spring Semester<br />
BS3516 Empirical Finance and<br />
Accounting Literature (Please<br />
note that this module will not run<br />
in the 2011-12 session)<br />
BS3520 Analysis of Financial Reporting<br />
Information<br />
BS3616 Finance Investigation* (Please<br />
note that this module will not<br />
run in the 2011-12 session)<br />
BS3614 Corporate Governance &<br />
Accountability<br />
BS3512 Accounting Information Systems BS3618 The Accounting Profession<br />
BS3503 Development of Accounting BS3612 Public Sector Accounting<br />
BS3506 International Accounting BS3619 Modelling in Management<br />
Science<br />
BS3519 Exploratory Data Analysis<br />
* Note to take this module you must also select BS3516 Empirical Finance & Accounting<br />
Literature in the first semester<br />
-43-
MODULE CATALOGUE PROGRAMME STRUCTURE<br />
NN24 BSc ECON ACCOUNTING AND<br />
MANAGEMENT<br />
AIMS OF THE PROGRAMME<br />
This degree programme is aimed at providing a thorough understanding of the disciplines of<br />
accounting and management. This will be achieved by covering in depth the core accounting<br />
subjects of financial accounting, management accounting and business finance and the core<br />
management subject area of business policy. Also, through the use of optional modules in<br />
management in the second and third years, the programme has the aim of permitting students to<br />
choose the additional subjects they would prefer to study and examine in depth.<br />
YEAR 3 – REQUIREMENTS<br />
Four compulsory double modules<br />
BS3502 <strong>Business</strong> Finance<br />
BS3504 Financial Accounting<br />
BS3517 Management Accounting and Control<br />
BS3543 Strategic Management<br />
And two double modules from<br />
BS3725 Advertising & Marketing Communications Management<br />
BS3728 Ethics & Morality of <strong>Business</strong><br />
BS3730 International <strong>Business</strong> & Marketing<br />
BS3740 International Human Resource Management<br />
BS3735 Organisational Analysis & Change<br />
BS3741 Marketing Decision Making<br />
BS3538 Work & Employment<br />
-44-
PROGRAMME STRUCTURE MODULE CATALOGUE<br />
N410 BSc ACCOUNTING WITH A EUROPEAN<br />
LANGUAGE<br />
AIMS OF THE PROGRAMME<br />
This degree programme is aimed at providing the student with a thorough understanding of the<br />
discipline of accounting together with near native competence in a specified European language and a<br />
sound knowledge of the culture and institutions of the country of the language.<br />
The theory, concepts, principles and techniques of the core subject areas of financial accounting,<br />
management accounting and business finance are covered in depth. The close relationship between<br />
accounting and the disciplines of economics, law and management is emphasised throughout the<br />
programme.<br />
The degree programme is organised to develop students' academic and technical skills and to provide<br />
the breadth of understanding that is an essential requisite for a successful career in accounting and<br />
business with particular reference to Europe.<br />
YEAR 4 – REQUIREMENTS<br />
(3 compulsory double modules)<br />
BS3502 <strong>Business</strong> Finance<br />
BS3504 Financial Accounting<br />
BS3517 Management Accounting and Control<br />
and 2 single modules per semester from<br />
Autumn Semester Spring Semester<br />
BS3512 Accounting Information Systems BS3613 Accounting Investigation<br />
BS3503 Development of Accounting BS3614 Corporate Governance and<br />
Accountability<br />
BS3506 International Accounting BS3612 Public Sector Accounting<br />
BS3520 Analysis of Financial Reporting<br />
Information<br />
BS3618 The Accounting Profession<br />
BS3701<br />
and one of the following Routes<br />
ROUTE 1 – FRENCH<br />
Language Skills for Professionals (French)<br />
ROUTE 2 – GERMAN<br />
BS3721 Language Skills for Professionals (German)<br />
ROUTE 3 – SPANISH<br />
BS3711 Language Skills for Professionals (Spanish)<br />
-45-
MODULE CATALOGUE PROGRAMME STRUCTURE<br />
N300 BSc ECON BANKING & FINANCE<br />
AIMS OF THE PROGRAMME<br />
The Banking and Finance degree programme provides students with a thorough understanding of the<br />
method, content and scope of economic analysis, particularly in the fields of money, banking and<br />
finance. It aims to stimulate students intellectually to appreciate the value of economic analysis in<br />
understanding economic problems and equip them with a thorough grounding in the theory,<br />
concepts, principles and techniques of core subject areas of the discipline: macroeconomics,<br />
microeconomics, quantitative analysis, monetary economics and financial economics. It gives<br />
students a firm foundation of knowledge in the workings of the UK economy, with an emphasis on<br />
the banking and financial sectors, and the ability to use that knowledge in a range of contexts.<br />
The programme aims to develop in students the ability to apply economic analysis to solve theoretical<br />
and applied problems in economics and finance, and to evaluate alternative policy options. The study<br />
of economics, banking and finance encourages a range of transferable discipline-specific and core<br />
skills that will be of value to students in future education and in their subsequent careers. In <strong>Year</strong> 3<br />
the programme offers students the opportunity to acquire detailed knowledge and technique in the<br />
specialist areas of economics of banking, international finance and financial economics.<br />
YEAR 3 – REQUIREMENTS<br />
Three compulsory double modules<br />
BS3571 Economics of Banking<br />
BS3554 Financial Economics<br />
BS3555 International Finance<br />
Plus three modules at least two of which must be from Group 1<br />
Group 1<br />
BS3546 Applied Welfare Economics<br />
BS3548 <strong>Business</strong> History<br />
BS3551 Econometrics<br />
BS3568 International Trade<br />
BS3556 International Economic History<br />
BS3558 Labour Economics<br />
BS3562 Public Finance (Please note that this module will not run in the 2011-12 session)<br />
BS3572 Industrial Economics<br />
Group 2<br />
BS3511 Accounting Theory and Practice<br />
BS3728 Ethics and Morality of <strong>Business</strong><br />
BS3543 Strategic Management<br />
BS3741 Marketing Decision Making<br />
BS3538 Work and Employment<br />
-46-
PROGRAMME STRUCTURE MODULE CATALOGUE<br />
N3R9 BSc ECON BANKING & FINANCE WITH A<br />
EUROPEAN LANGUAGE<br />
AIMS OF THE PROGRAMME<br />
The Banking and Finance with a European Language degree programme provides students with a<br />
thorough understanding of the method, content and scope of economic analysis, particularly in the<br />
fields of money, banking and finance. It aims to stimulate students intellectually to appreciate the<br />
value of economic analysis in understanding economic problems and equip them with a thorough<br />
grounding in the theory, concepts, principles and techniques of core subject areas of the discipline:<br />
macroeconomics, microeconomics, quantitative analysis, monetary economics and financial<br />
economics. It gives students a firm foundation of knowledge in the workings of the UK economy,<br />
with an emphasis on the banking and financial sectors, and the ability to use that knowledge in a<br />
range of contexts.<br />
This degree programme aims to provide students with a competence in a specified European<br />
language and knowledge of the economy of the country of the language.<br />
The programme aims to develop in students the ability to apply economic analysis to solve theoretical<br />
and applied problems in economics and finance, and to evaluate alternative policy options. The study<br />
of economics, banking and finance encourages a range of transferable discipline-specific and core<br />
skills that will be of value to students in future education and in their subsequent careers. In <strong>Year</strong> 4<br />
the programme offers students the opportunity to acquire detailed knowledge and technique in the<br />
specialist areas of economics of banking, international finance and financial economics.<br />
YEAR 4 - REQUIREMENTS<br />
Three compulsory double modules<br />
BS3571 Economics of Banking<br />
BS3554 Financial Economics<br />
BS3555 International Finance<br />
and two double modules from:<br />
BS3546 Applied Welfare Economics<br />
BS3548 <strong>Business</strong> History<br />
BS3551 Econometrics<br />
BS3556 International Economic History<br />
BS3568 International Trade<br />
BS3558 Labour Economics<br />
BS3562 Public Finance (Please note that this module will not run in the 2011-12 session)<br />
and one of the following Routes<br />
ROUTE 1 – FRENCH<br />
BS3701 Language Skills for Professionals (French)<br />
ROUTE 2 – GERMAN<br />
BS3721 Language Skills for Professionals (German)<br />
ROUTE 3 – SPANISH<br />
BS3711 Language Skills for Professionals (Spanish)<br />
-47-
MODULE CATALOGUE PROGRAMME STRUCTURE<br />
N201 BSc BUSINESS MANAGEMENT<br />
AIMS OF THE PROGRAMME<br />
This degree programme is designed to provide a thorough knowledge of the main disciplines relevant<br />
to management and business together with an appreciation of the different functional areas involved.<br />
It provides a combination of theoretical ideas and practical techniques which gives a thorough<br />
grounding for a variety of careers in a range of management functions such as marketing and human<br />
resource management, as well as in general management.<br />
YEAR 3 – REQUIREMENTS<br />
Two compulsory double modules (40 credits)<br />
BS3735 Organisational Analysis & Change<br />
BS3543 Strategic Management<br />
Plus optional double modules: at least one and no more than two from each of the<br />
following three groups (80 credits)<br />
GROUP 1<br />
Optional Double <strong>Module</strong>s in HRM<br />
BS3740 International Human Resource Management<br />
BS3538 Work & Employment<br />
GROUP 2<br />
Optional Double <strong>Module</strong>s in Marketing<br />
BS3725 Advertising & Marketing Communications Management<br />
BS3730 International <strong>Business</strong> & Marketing<br />
BS3741 Marketing Decision Making<br />
BS3742 Services & Relationship Marketing<br />
GROUP 3<br />
Optional Double <strong>Module</strong>s in Accounting, Operations & General Management<br />
BS3511 Accounting Theory & Practice<br />
BS3739 Advanced Operations Management<br />
BS3727 Entrepreneurship & Small <strong>Business</strong> Development<br />
BS3728 Ethics & Morality of <strong>Business</strong><br />
BS3589 International <strong>Business</strong> Logistics<br />
BS3530 Japanese Management Systems<br />
BS3544 Management & Public Policy in the European Union<br />
BS3738 Strategic Supply Management<br />
Optional Single <strong>Module</strong>s in Accounting, Operations & General Management (NOTE: these modules<br />
must be taken together)<br />
BS3519 Exploratory Data Analysis<br />
BS3619 Modelling in Management Science<br />
-48-
PROGRAMME STRUCTURE MODULE CATALOGUE<br />
NN26 BSc BUSINESS MANAGEMENT<br />
(HUMAN RESOURCES)<br />
AIMS OF THE PROGRAMME<br />
This degree programme is designed to provide a thorough knowledge of the main disciplines relevant<br />
to management and business together with an appreciation of the different functional areas involved.<br />
It provides a combination of theoretical ideas and practical techniques which gives a thorough<br />
grounding for a variety of careers in a range of management functions such as marketing and human<br />
resource management, as well as in general management.<br />
YEAR 3 – REQUIREMENTS<br />
Four compulsory double modules (80 credits)<br />
BS3740 International Human Resource Management<br />
BS3735 Organisational Analysis & Change<br />
BS3543 Strategic Management<br />
BS3538 Work & Employment<br />
and one of the following Groups<br />
GROUP 1: Two optional double modules (40 credits)<br />
BS3511 Accounting, Theory & Practice<br />
BS3739 Advanced Operations Management<br />
BS3725 Advertising & Marketing Communications Management<br />
BS3727 Entrepreneurship & Small <strong>Business</strong> Development<br />
BS3728 Ethics & Morality of <strong>Business</strong><br />
BS3530 Japanese Management Systems<br />
BS3544 Management & Public Policy in the European Union<br />
BS3741 Marketing Decision Making<br />
BS3742 Services & Relationship Marketing<br />
GROUP 2: One optional double module (20 credits)<br />
AND both single modules (10 credits each) as listed below:<br />
DOUBLE MODULES<br />
BS3511 Accounting, Theory & Practice<br />
BS3739 Advanced Operations Management<br />
BS3725 Advertising & Marketing Communications Management<br />
BS3727 Entrepreneurship & Small <strong>Business</strong> Development<br />
BS3728 Ethics & Morality of <strong>Business</strong><br />
BS3530 Japanese Management Systems<br />
BS3544 Management & Public Policy in the European Union<br />
BS3741 Marketing Decision Making<br />
BS3742 Services & Relationship Marketing<br />
SINGLE MODULES<br />
BS3519 Exploratory Data Analysis<br />
BS3619 Modelling in Management Science<br />
-49-
MODULE CATALOGUE PROGRAMME STRUCTURE<br />
N202 BSc BUSINESS MANAGEMENT<br />
(INTERNATIONAL MANAGEMENT)<br />
AIMS OF THE PROGRAMME<br />
This degree programme is designed to provide a thorough knowledge of the main disciplines relevant<br />
to management and business together with an appreciation of the different functional areas involved.<br />
It provides a combination of theoretical ideas and practical techniques which gives a thorough<br />
grounding for a variety of careers in a range of management functions such as marketing and human<br />
resource management, as well as in general management.<br />
YEAR 3 – REQUIREMENTS<br />
Four compulsory double modules (80 credits)<br />
BS3730 International <strong>Business</strong> & Marketing<br />
BS3740 International Human Resource Management<br />
BS3530 Japanese Management Systems<br />
BS3543 Strategic Management<br />
and one of the following Groups<br />
GROUP 1: Two optional double modules (40 credits)<br />
BS3511 Accounting Theory and Practice<br />
BS3739 Advanced Operations Management<br />
BS3725 Advertising & Marketing Communications Management<br />
BS3727 Entrepreneurship & Small <strong>Business</strong> Development<br />
BS3728 Ethics & Morality of <strong>Business</strong><br />
BS3589 International <strong>Business</strong> Logistics<br />
BS3544 Management & Public Policy in the European Union<br />
BS3741 Marketing Decision Making<br />
BS3735 Organisational Analysis & Change<br />
BS3742 Services & Relationship Marketing<br />
BS3738 Strategic Supply Management<br />
BS3538 Work & Employment<br />
GROUP 2: One optional double module (20 credits)<br />
AND both single modules (10 credits each) as listed below:<br />
DOUBLE MODULES<br />
BS3511 Accounting Theory and Practice<br />
BS3739 Advanced Operations Management<br />
BS3725 Advertising & Marketing Communications Management<br />
BS3727 Entrepreneurship & Small <strong>Business</strong> Development<br />
BS3728 Ethics & Morality of <strong>Business</strong><br />
BS3589 International <strong>Business</strong> Logistics<br />
BS3544 Management & Public Policy in the European Union<br />
BS3741 Marketing Decision Making<br />
BS3735 Organisational Analysis & Change<br />
BS3742 Services & Relationship Marketing<br />
BS3738 Strategic Supply Management<br />
BS3538 Work & Employment<br />
SINGLE MODULES<br />
BS3519 Exploratory Data Analysis<br />
BS3619 Modelling in Management Science<br />
-50-
PROGRAMME STRUCTURE MODULE CATALOGUE<br />
N291 BSc BUSINESS MANAGEMENT<br />
(LOGISTICS AND OPERATIONS)<br />
AIMS OF THE PROGRAMME<br />
This degree programme is designed to provide a thorough knowledge of the main disciplines relevant<br />
to management and business together with an appreciation of the different functional areas involved.<br />
It provides a combination of theoretical ideas and practical techniques which gives a thorough<br />
grounding for a variety of careers in a range of management functions such as marketing and human<br />
resource management, as well as in general management.<br />
YEAR 3 – REQUIREMENTS<br />
Four compulsory double modules (80 credits)<br />
BS3739 Advanced Operations Management<br />
BS3589 International <strong>Business</strong> Logistics<br />
BS3543 Strategic Management<br />
BS3738 Strategic Supply Management<br />
and one of the following Groups<br />
GROUP 1: Plus two optional double modules (40 credits)<br />
BS3725 Advertising & Marketing Communications Management<br />
BS3727 Entrepreneurship & Small <strong>Business</strong> Development<br />
BS3728 Ethics & Morality of <strong>Business</strong><br />
BS3730 International <strong>Business</strong> & Marketing<br />
BS3740 International Human Resource Management<br />
BS3530 Japanese Management Systems<br />
BS3544 Management & Public Policy of the European Union<br />
BS3741 Marketing Decision Making<br />
BS3735 Organisational Analysis & Change<br />
BS3742 Services & Relationship Marketing<br />
BS3538 Work & Employment<br />
GROUP 2: One optional double module (20 credits)<br />
AND both single modules (10 credits each) as listed below:<br />
DOUBLE MODULES<br />
BS3725 Advertising & Marketing Communications Management<br />
BS3727 Entrepreneurship & Small <strong>Business</strong> Development<br />
BS3728 Ethics & Morality of <strong>Business</strong><br />
BS3730 International <strong>Business</strong> & Marketing<br />
BS3740 International Human Resource Management<br />
BS3530 Japanese Management Systems<br />
BS3544 Management & Public Policy of the European Union<br />
BS3741 Marketing Decision Making<br />
BS3735 Organisational Analysis & Change<br />
BS3742 Services & Relationship Marketing<br />
BS3538 Work & Employment<br />
SINGLE MODULES<br />
BS3519 Exploratory Data Analysis<br />
BS3619 Modelling in Management Science<br />
-51-
MODULE CATALOGUE PROGRAMME STRUCTURE<br />
NN25 BSc BUSINESS MANAGEMENT<br />
(MARKETING)<br />
AIMS OF THE PROGRAMME<br />
This degree programme is designed to provide a thorough knowledge of the main disciplines relevant<br />
to management and business together with an appreciation of the different functional areas involved.<br />
It provides a combination of theoretical ideas and practical techniques which gives a thorough<br />
grounding for a variety of careers in a range of management functions such as marketing and human<br />
resource management, as well as in general management.<br />
YEAR 3 – REQUIREMENTS<br />
Four compulsory double modules<br />
BS3725 Advertising & Marketing Communications Management<br />
BS3741 Marketing Decision Making<br />
BS3742 Services & Relationship Marketing<br />
BS3543 Strategic Management<br />
and one of the following Groups<br />
GROUP 1: Two optional double module (40 credits)<br />
BS3511 Accounting, Theory & Practice<br />
BS3739 Advanced Operations Management<br />
BS3727 Entrepreneurship & Small <strong>Business</strong> Development<br />
BS3728 Ethics & Morality of <strong>Business</strong><br />
BS3589 International <strong>Business</strong> Logistics<br />
BS3730 International <strong>Business</strong> & Marketing<br />
BS3740 International Human Resource Management<br />
BS3544 Management & Public Policy in the European Union<br />
BS3735 Organisational Analysis & Change<br />
BS3738 Strategic Supply Management<br />
BS3538 Work & Employment<br />
GROUP 2: One optional double module (20 credits)<br />
AND both single modules (10 credits each) as listed below:<br />
DOUBLE MODULES<br />
BS3511 Accounting, Theory & Practice<br />
BS3739 Advanced Operations Management<br />
BS3727 Entrepreneurship & Small <strong>Business</strong> Development<br />
BS3728 Ethics & Morality of <strong>Business</strong><br />
BS3589 International <strong>Business</strong> Logistics<br />
BS3730 International <strong>Business</strong> & Marketing<br />
BS3740 International Human Resource Management<br />
BS3544 Management & Public Policy in the European Union<br />
BS3735 Organisational Analysis & Change<br />
BS3738 Strategic Supply Management<br />
BS3538 Work & Employment<br />
SINGLE MODULES<br />
BS3519 Exploratory Data Analysis<br />
BS3619 Modelling in Management Science<br />
-52-
PROGRAMME STRUCTURE MODULE CATALOGUE<br />
N290 BSc BUSINESS MANAGEMENT WITH A<br />
EUROPEAN LANGUAGE<br />
AIMS OF THE PROGRAMME<br />
This degree programme is designed to provide the student with a thorough knowledge of the main<br />
disciplines relevant to management and business management together with near native competence<br />
in a specified European language and a sound knowledge of the culture and institutions of the<br />
country of the language.<br />
This degree programme provides a combination of theoretical ideas and practical techniques which<br />
gives a thorough grounding for a variety of careers in a range of management functions such as<br />
marketing and human resource management, as well as in general management, particularly in a<br />
European context.<br />
YEAR 4 - REQUIREMENTS<br />
(Two compulsory double modules)<br />
BS3544 Management and Public Policy in the EU<br />
BS3543 Strategic Management<br />
and one of the following Groups<br />
GROUP 1: Three optional double modules (60 credits)<br />
BS3511 Accounting Theory and Practice<br />
BS3739 Advanced Operations Management<br />
BS3725 Advertising & Marketing Communications Management<br />
BS3727 Entrepreneurship & Small <strong>Business</strong> Development<br />
BS3728 Ethics & Morality of <strong>Business</strong><br />
BS3730 International <strong>Business</strong> & Marketing<br />
BS3740 International Human Resource Management<br />
BS3741 Marketing Decision Making<br />
BS3735 Organisational Analysis & Change<br />
BS3742 Services & Relationship Marketing<br />
BS3538 Work and Employment<br />
GROUP 2: 2 optional double modules (40 credits) AND both single modules (10 credits<br />
each) as listed below:<br />
DOUBLE MODULES<br />
BS3511 Accounting Theory and Practice<br />
BS3739 Advanced Operations Management<br />
BS3725 Advertising & Marketing Communications Management<br />
BS3727 Entrepreneurship & Small <strong>Business</strong> Development<br />
BS3728 Ethics & Morality of <strong>Business</strong><br />
BS3730 International <strong>Business</strong> & Marketing<br />
BS3740 International Human Resource Management<br />
BS3741 Marketing Decision Making<br />
BS3735 Organisational Analysis & Change<br />
BS3742 Services & Relationship Marketing<br />
BS3538 Work and Employment<br />
SINGLE MODULES<br />
BS3519 Exploratory Data Analysis<br />
BS3619 Modelling in Management Science<br />
and one compulsory language module<br />
ROUTE 1 – FRENCH<br />
BS3701 Language Skills for Professionals (French)<br />
-53-
MODULE CATALOGUE PROGRAMME STRUCTURE<br />
ROUTE 2 – GERMAN<br />
BS3721 Language Skills for Professionals (German)<br />
ROUTE 3 – SPANISH<br />
BS3711 Language Skills for Professionals (Spanish)<br />
-54-
PROGRAMME STRUCTURE MODULE CATALOGUE<br />
NN23 BUSINESS MANAGEMENT AND FINANCE<br />
AIMS OF THE PROGRAMME<br />
This degree programme is aimed at providing a thorough understanding of the theoretical and<br />
applied aspects of the disciplines of business management and finance. It seeks to provide students<br />
with a knowledge and understanding of those areas of business, management, finance and<br />
quantitative techniques, which are necessary for a proper understanding of management and finance<br />
and to place management and finance in their broader organisational and professional contexts. It<br />
provides a combination of theoretical ideas and practical techniques which gives a thorough<br />
grounding for a variety of careers in management and finance, in business generally, and in other<br />
fields.<br />
YEAR 3 REQUIREMENTS<br />
Three compulsory double modules<br />
BS3502 <strong>Business</strong> Finance<br />
BS3514 International Corporate Finance<br />
BS3543 Strategic Management<br />
One compulsory double module in the Autumn Semester<br />
Autumn Semester Spring Semester<br />
BS3515 Financial Derivatives BS3615 Security Analysis & Portfolio Management<br />
Plus two double modules from<br />
BS3725 Advertising & Marketing Communications Management<br />
BS3728 Ethics & Morality of <strong>Business</strong><br />
BS3740 International Human Resource Management<br />
BS3741 Marketing Decision Making<br />
BS3742 Services and Relational Marketing<br />
BS3739 Advanced Operations Management<br />
BS3735 Organisational Analysis and Change<br />
-55-
MODULE CATALOGUE PROGRAMME STRUCTURE<br />
L114 BSc ECON BUSINESS ECONOMICS<br />
AIMS OF THE PROGRAMME<br />
The <strong>Business</strong> Economics degree programme provides students with an understanding of economic<br />
theory, particularly that which focuses on the organisational and managerial characteristics of the<br />
modern business enterprise. It aims to give students a firm understanding of the structure of<br />
business decision making, and an appreciation of how theoretical and quantitative economic<br />
perspectives can improve such decision making. It equips students with a thorough grounding in the<br />
theory, concepts, principles and techniques of the core subject areas of the discipline, including<br />
microeconomics, quantitative analysis and managerial economics.<br />
The programme aims to inform students of the main features of the UK industrial economy and the<br />
key developments in business. The study of business economics encourages a range of transferable<br />
discipline-specific and core analytical skills that will be of value to students in their subsequent<br />
careers. The programme examines government and international business policy to identify their<br />
ramifications for the development of markets and firms. It introduces students to subject areas<br />
outside the economics discipline by offering them the opportunity to follow modules in finance,<br />
marketing and other aspects of management.<br />
YEAR 3 – REQUIREMENTS<br />
Four compulsory double modules<br />
BS3570 Applied Macroeconomics & Finance<br />
BS3547 <strong>Business</strong> Applications<br />
BS3572 Industrial Economics<br />
BS3561 Modern <strong>Business</strong> Enterprise<br />
Plus two further modules, at least one of which must be from Group 1<br />
Group 1<br />
BS3546 Applied Welfare Economics<br />
BS3548 <strong>Business</strong> History<br />
BS3551 Econometrics<br />
BS3568 International Trade<br />
BS3556 International Economic History<br />
BS3558 Labour Economics<br />
BS3562 Public Finance (Please note that this module will not run in the 2011-12 session)<br />
Group 2<br />
BS3511 Accounting Theory & Practice<br />
BS3727 Entrepreneurship and Small <strong>Business</strong> Development<br />
BS3728 Ethics and Morality of <strong>Business</strong><br />
BS3543 Strategic Management<br />
BS3741 Marketing Decision Making<br />
BS3538 Work and Employment<br />
-56-
PROGRAMME STRUCTURE MODULE CATALOGUE<br />
L1R9 BSc ECON BUSINESS ECONOMICS WITH A<br />
EUROPEAN LANGUAGE<br />
AIMS OF THE PROGRAMME<br />
The <strong>Business</strong> Economics with a European Language degree programme provides students with an<br />
understanding of economic theory, particularly that which focuses on the organisational and<br />
managerial characteristics of the modern business enterprise. It aims to give students a firm<br />
understanding of the structure of business decision making, and an appreciation of how theoretical<br />
and quantitative economic perspectives can improve such decision making. It equips students with a<br />
thorough grounding in the theory, concepts, principles and techniques of the core subject areas of<br />
the discipline, including microeconomics, quantitative analysis and managerial economics.<br />
This degree programme aims to provide students with a competence in a specified European<br />
language and knowledge of the economy of the country of the language.<br />
The programme aims to inform students of the main features of the UK industrial economy and the<br />
key developments in business. The study of business economics encourages a range of transferable<br />
discipline-specific and core analytical skills that will be of value to students in their subsequent<br />
careers. The programme examines government and international business policy to identify their<br />
ramifications for the development of markets and firms.<br />
YEAR 4 - REQUIREMENTS<br />
Four compulsory double modules<br />
BS3570 Applied Macroeconomics & Finance<br />
BS3547 <strong>Business</strong> Applications<br />
BS3560 Managerial Economics<br />
BS3561 Modern <strong>Business</strong> Enterprise<br />
and one double modules from:<br />
BS3546 Applied Welfare Economics<br />
BS3548 <strong>Business</strong> History<br />
BS3551 Econometrics<br />
BS3556 International Economic History<br />
BS3568 International Trade<br />
BS3558 Labour Economics<br />
BS3562 Public Finance (Please note that this module will not run in the 2011-12 session)<br />
and one of the following Routes<br />
ROUTE 1 – FRENCH<br />
BS3701 Language Skills for Professionals (French)<br />
ROUTE 2 – GERMAN<br />
BS3721 Language Skills for Professionals (German)<br />
ROUTE 3 – SPANISH<br />
BS3711 Language Skills for Professionals (Spanish)<br />
-57-
MODULE CATALOGUE PROGRAMME STRUCTURE<br />
NT12 BSc BUSINESS STUDIES AND JAPANESE<br />
AIMS OF THE PROGRAMME<br />
This degree programme is designed to provide the student with a thorough knowledge of the main<br />
disciplines relevant to business management together with a high level of competence in the<br />
Japanese language and a sound knowledge of Japanese culture and institutions.<br />
This degree programme provides a combination of theoretical ideas and practical techniques which<br />
gives a thorough grounding for a variety of careers in a range of management functions such as<br />
marketing and human resource management, as well as in general management, particularly in a<br />
Japanese context.<br />
YEAR 4 - REQUIREMENTS<br />
Four compulsory modules<br />
BS5421 Advanced Japanese Communication (30 Credits)<br />
BS5422 Advanced Japanese Studies (30 Credits)<br />
BS3530 Japanese Management Systems (20 Credits)<br />
BS3543 Strategic Management (20 Credits)<br />
one module from<br />
BS3511 Accounting Theory and Practice<br />
BS3725 Advertising & Marketing Communications Management<br />
BS3728 Ethics & Morality of <strong>Business</strong><br />
BS3730 International <strong>Business</strong> & Marketing<br />
BS3740 International Human Resource Management<br />
BS3735 Organisational Analysis & Change<br />
BS3741 Marketing Decision Making<br />
BS3538 Work & Employment<br />
-58-
AIMS OF THE PROGRAMME<br />
L100 BSc ECON ECONOMICS<br />
The Economics degree programme aims to provide students with a thorough understanding of the<br />
method, content and scope of Economic analysis and to stimulate students to appreciate the value of<br />
economic analysis in understanding both economic problems and a wider range of social and political<br />
issues. The programme will equip students with a thorough grounding in the theory, concepts,<br />
principles and techniques of the core subject areas of the discipline: macroeconomics,<br />
microeconomics and quantitative analysis. It aims to give students a firm foundation of knowledge of<br />
the workings of the UK economy and the ability to use that knowledge in a range of contexts. It<br />
develops in students the ability to apply economic analysis to theoretical and applied problems in<br />
economics and to evaluate policy options.<br />
The programme encourages a range of transferable discipline-specific and core skills that will be of<br />
value to students in future education and in their subsequent careers. It aims to interest students in<br />
the breadth and depth of economic analysis by offering them the opportunity to acquire knowledge<br />
and technique in a number of specialised areas. These include public finance, econometrics, welfare<br />
economics, economic history, labour economics and international economics.<br />
YEAR 3 - REQUIREMENTS<br />
Two compulsory double modules<br />
BS3565 Macroeconomic Analysis<br />
BS3566 Microeconomic Analysis<br />
And four double modules from:<br />
BS3546 Applied Welfare Economics<br />
BS3548 <strong>Business</strong> History<br />
BS3551 Econometrics<br />
BS3554 Financial Economics<br />
BS3556 International Economic History<br />
BS3555 International Finance<br />
BS3568 International Trade<br />
BS3558 Labour Economics<br />
BS3562 Public Finance (Please note that this module will not run in the 2011-12 session)<br />
BS3572 Industrial Economics<br />
-59-
LN13 BSc ECON ECONOMICS AND FINANCE<br />
AIMS OF THE PROGRAMME<br />
The aim of the Economics & Finance programme is to provide students with a thorough<br />
understanding of the disciplines of economics and finance. It seeks to enable students to study<br />
particular aspects of these and cognate disciples within a coherent structure. The close relationship<br />
between economics and finance and disciplines of accounting and law is emphasised throughout the<br />
programme. The degree programme is organised to develop students’ academic and technical skills<br />
and to provide the breadth of understanding that is essential for successful careers in economics,<br />
finance and business.<br />
Through the study of economics and finance, the Programme encourages a range of transferable<br />
discipline-specific and core skills that will be of value to students in future education and in their<br />
subsequent careers. It aims to interest student in the breadth and depth of economic and finance<br />
analysis by offering them the opportunity across the three years of study to acquire knowledge and<br />
technique in a number of specialised areas. These include monetary economics, financial economics,<br />
international corporate finance and business finance.<br />
YEAR 3 – REQUIREMENTS<br />
Five compulsory double modules<br />
BS3502 <strong>Business</strong> Finance<br />
BS3551 Econometrics<br />
BS3514 International Corporate Finance<br />
BS3565 Macroeconomic Analysis<br />
BS3566 Microeconomic Analysis<br />
Plus one single module per semester<br />
Autumn Semester Spring Semester<br />
BS3515 Financial Derivatives BS3615 Security Analysis & Portfolio<br />
Management<br />
Or one compulsory double module<br />
BS3554 Financial Economics<br />
-60-
LN12 BSc ECON ECONOMICS AND<br />
MANAGEMENT STUDIES<br />
AIMS OF THE PROGRAMME<br />
The Economics and Management Degree Programme aims to equip students with a thorough<br />
grounding in the concepts, principles and techniques of the core areas of both economics and<br />
management: including microeconomics, quantitative analysis, marketing and strategic management.<br />
It provides students with an understanding of economic and management theory, particularly that<br />
which focuses on the efficiency, the competitive position, the organisational characteristics and the<br />
strategic objectives of the modern business enterprise. It aims to give students a firm understanding<br />
of the structure of business decision making, and an appreciation of how economic and management<br />
perspectives can improve such decision-making. It informs students of the main features of the UK<br />
industrial economy and the key developments in business and management. It develops in students<br />
the ability to apply economic and management analysis, including quantitative techniques, to<br />
problems within the business economy and to evaluate alternative policy options.<br />
The programme encourages a range of transferable discipline-specific and core analytical skills that<br />
will be of value to students in their subsequent careers. Over the three years of study, it aims to<br />
introduce students to a wide range of subject areas in both the economics and management<br />
disciplines.<br />
YEAR 3 – REQUIREMENTS<br />
Three double modules from:<br />
BS3511 Accounting Theory & Practice<br />
BS3727 Entrepreneurship & Small <strong>Business</strong> Development<br />
BS3728 Ethics & Morality of <strong>Business</strong><br />
BS3741 Marketing Decision Making<br />
BS3543 Strategic Management<br />
BS3538 Work & Employment<br />
Plus modules from one of the following Groups<br />
Group 1<br />
Three double modules from:<br />
BS3548 <strong>Business</strong> History<br />
BS3571 Economics of Banking<br />
BS3554 Financial Economics<br />
BS3555 International Finance<br />
Group 2<br />
Three double modules from:<br />
BS3570 Applied Macroeconomics & Finance<br />
BS3547 <strong>Business</strong> Applications<br />
BS3548 <strong>Business</strong> History<br />
BS3572 Industrial Economics<br />
BS3561 Modern <strong>Business</strong> Enterprise<br />
Group 3<br />
Both<br />
BS3565 Macroeconomic Analysis<br />
BS3566 Microeconomic Analysis<br />
Plus one double module from:<br />
BS3546 Applied Welfare Economics<br />
BS3548 <strong>Business</strong> History<br />
BS3551 Econometrics<br />
BS3556 International Economic History<br />
-61-
BS3568 International Trade<br />
BS3558 Labour Economics<br />
BS3562 Public Finance (Please note that this module will not run in the 2011-12 session)<br />
REQUIREMENTS<br />
Students who studied BS2551 Money, Banking and Finance must select modules from Group 1<br />
Students who studied BS2560 Managerial Economics must select modules from Group 2<br />
Students who studied BS2549 Macroeconomic Theory must select modules from Group 3<br />
-62-
L160 BSc ECONOMICS WITH A EUROPEAN<br />
LANGUAGE<br />
AIMS OF THE PROGRAMME<br />
The Economics with a European Language degree programme aims to provide students with a<br />
thorough understanding of the method, content and scope of Economic analysis and to stimulate<br />
students to appreciate the value of economic analysis in understanding both economic problems and<br />
a wider range of social and political issues. The programme will equip students with a thorough<br />
grounding in the theory, concepts, principles and techniques of the core subject areas of the<br />
discipline: macroeconomics, microeconomics and quantitative analysis. It aims to give students a<br />
firm foundation of knowledge of the workings of the UK economy and the ability to use that<br />
knowledge in a range of contexts. It develops in students the ability to apply economic analysis to<br />
theoretical and applied problems in economics and to evaluate policy options.<br />
This degree programme aims to provide students with a competence in a specified European<br />
language and knowledge of the economy of the country of the language.<br />
The programme encourages a range of transferable discipline-specific and core skills that will be of<br />
value to students in future education and in their subsequent careers. It aims to interest students in<br />
the breadth and depth of economic analysis by offering them the opportunity to acquire knowledge<br />
and technique in a number of specialised areas, including public finance, welfare economics,<br />
economic history, labour economics and international economics.<br />
YEAR 4 - REQUIREMENTS<br />
Two compulsory double modules<br />
BS3565 Macroeconomic Analysis<br />
BS3566 Microeconomic Analysis<br />
And three double modules from:<br />
BS3546 Applied Welfare Economics<br />
BS3548 <strong>Business</strong> History<br />
BS3551 Econometrics<br />
BS3554 Financial Economics<br />
BS3555 International Finance<br />
BS3556 International Economic History<br />
BS3568 International Trade<br />
BS3558 Labour Economics<br />
BS3562 Public Finance (Please note that this module will not run in the 2011-12 session)<br />
And one of the following Routes<br />
ROUTE 1 – FRENCH<br />
BS3701 Language Skills for Professionals (French)<br />
ROUTE 2 – GERMAN<br />
BS3721 Language Skills for Professionals (German)<br />
ROUTE 3 – SPANISH<br />
BS3711 Language Skills for Professionals (Spanish)<br />
-63-
FACULTY OF HUMANITIES AND SOCIAL STUDIES<br />
JOINT HONOURS DEGREE PROGRAMMES<br />
BSc ECON ECONOMICS AND POLITICS<br />
YEAR 3 – REQUIREMENTS<br />
Three double modules from:<br />
BS3565 Macroeconomic Analysis*<br />
BS3566 Microeconomic Analysis*<br />
BS3546 Applied Welfare Economics<br />
BS3548 <strong>Business</strong> History<br />
BS3551 Econometrics**<br />
BS3556 International Economic History<br />
BS3557 International Trade<br />
BS3558 Labour Economics<br />
BS3562 Public Finance (Please note that this module will not run in the 2011-12 session)<br />
BS3554 Financial Economics<br />
BS3571 Economics of Banking<br />
BS3555 International Finance<br />
BS3572 Industrial Economics<br />
PLUS 60 CREDITS OF MODULES FROM HUMANITIES<br />
* Macroeconomic Analysis and Microeconomic Analysis must be taken together and students must<br />
have taken BS2556 Empirical Economics in <strong>Year</strong> 2.<br />
**In order to select BS3551 Econometrics, students must have taken BS2556 Empirical Economics in<br />
<strong>Year</strong> 2.<br />
BA ECONOMICS WITH A HUMANITIES SUBJECT<br />
YEAR 3 – REQUIREMENTS<br />
Three double modules from:<br />
BS3546 Applied Welfare Economics<br />
BS3548 <strong>Business</strong> History<br />
BS3556 International Economic History<br />
BS3568 International Trade<br />
BS3558 Labour Economics<br />
BS3562 Public Finance (Please note that this module will not run in the 2011-12 session)<br />
BS3554 Financial Economics<br />
BS3571 Economics of Banking<br />
BS3555 International Finance<br />
BS3572 Industrial Economics<br />
PLUS 60 CREDITS OF MODULES FROM HUMANITIES<br />
-64-
EUROPEAN STUDIES<br />
JOINT HONOURS DEGREE PROGRAMMES<br />
BA FRENCH AND JAPANESE<br />
BA GERMAN AND JAPANESE<br />
BA SPANISH AND JAPANESE<br />
BA ITALIAN AND JAPANESE<br />
FINAL YEAR - REQUIREMENTS<br />
Two compulsory modules<br />
BS5421 Advanced Japanese Communication (30 credits)<br />
BS5422 Advanced Japanese Studies (30 credits)<br />
PLUS THE REQUISITE NUMBER OF MODULES FROM HUMANITIES<br />
-65-
MODULE CATALOGUE MODULE DESCRIPTIONS<br />
MODULE<br />
DESCRIPTIONS<br />
-66-
MODULE DESCRIPTIONS MODULE CATALOGUE<br />
ACCOUNTING INFORMATION SYSTEMS<br />
MODULE CODE: BS3512<br />
NUMBER OF CREDITS: 10<br />
SEMESTER: Autumn<br />
PROGRAMMES: BS Accounting, BSc Accounting & Finance, BSc Accounting with a<br />
European Language<br />
AIMS OF THE MODULE:<br />
The aim of the module is to provide students with a systems perspective on the processing,<br />
presentation, and use of accounting information.<br />
LEARNING OUTCOMES OF THE MODULE<br />
On completion of the module a student should be able to<br />
A Knowledge and Understanding:<br />
• know current developments in accounting information systems (AIS) and AIS technologies<br />
• understand theory and modelling techniques relating to the development of firm-wide<br />
information systems<br />
• understand audit risks and internal controls within AIS and their characteristics<br />
• know and critically evaluate computer assisted audit tools, techniques and the scope of their<br />
application<br />
• know current information search and presentation tools and techniques<br />
B Intellectual Skills:<br />
• an ability to think in systems terms<br />
• a capacity to identify and critically evaluate AIS and enterprise-wide development trends and<br />
most relevant information technologies<br />
C Discipline Specific Skills:<br />
• identify and evaluate current developments in accounting information systems and AIS<br />
technologies<br />
• apply conceptual modelling techniques such as E-R modelling and REA modelling<br />
• assess accounting software<br />
• identify and evaluate audit risks within AIS<br />
• design internal controls<br />
• evaluate computer assisted audit techniques<br />
D Transferable Skills:<br />
• effectively search information on the Internet<br />
• use Access, Excel and other information technologies<br />
• design Web pages using HTML and XBRL<br />
• assess computer hardware and software performance<br />
• draw flowcharts and data flow diagrams<br />
METHODS OF TEACHING AND LEARNING:<br />
Teaching is by means of approximately seventeen lectures and five tutorials or computer laboratory<br />
workshops. The theoretical aspects of topics are mainly covered in lectures. Tutorials and workshops<br />
provide students with opportunities to develop hands-on computing skills, consolidate the underlying<br />
theory by means of discussion, and cover the more practical aspects of the subject. Five tutorial<br />
questions (tasks), most of which are computer-based, will be given to students through the course.<br />
Students will be expected to attempt the questions before the tutorials or workshops start. The<br />
questions will be discussed and/or demonstrated at the tutorial or workshop by a tutor or students.<br />
To enable independent learning, a computer-based assignment is incorporated. As the module deals<br />
with major IT advancements closely related to AIS, it requires considerable efforts to prepare lectures<br />
and tutorials so as to provide students with an effective framework to learn. Textbooks are never<br />
updated and thus students are required to read additional materials. An open door policy is<br />
-67-
MODULE CATALOGUE MODULE DESCRIPTIONS<br />
maintained to allow additional interaction with students. E-mails are frequently used to interact with<br />
students (e.g. to provide students with readings, and to receive and answer students queries).<br />
Indicative study hours: 80<br />
ASSESSMENT:<br />
Examination Component: 70%<br />
Two hour examination at the end of the Autumn semester. The<br />
examination paper consists of six questions taken from different<br />
syllabus areas of which three are to be attempted. The paper covers<br />
technical questions such as flowcharting and REAL modelling as well<br />
as essay-types issues (e.g., identifying and evaluating advantages<br />
and weaknesses of the traditional view-driven AIS architecture)<br />
Continuous Assessment: 30%<br />
Computer-based group assignment of 1500 words or the equivalent<br />
with the submission date being week 11 of the Autumn semester.<br />
This is designed to allow student cooperative learning and problem<br />
solving by concertedly using the knowledge and skills developed<br />
before or on this course.<br />
Informal assessments are undertaken mainly through lectures and tutorials by interacting with<br />
students.<br />
SYLLABUS CONTENT:<br />
Definition of accounting information systems (AIS); view-driven AIS versus events-driven AIS;<br />
computer systems; accounting packages; database technology; the Internet, WWW, HTML, XBRL and<br />
AIS; AIS documenting techniques: flowcharts and data flow diagrams; Enterprise-wide system<br />
modelling and AIS development: E-R modelling and REA modelling; Internal control systems;<br />
Computer auditing.<br />
INDICATIVE READING LIST:<br />
Dunn, C., Cherrington, J. O. and Hollander, A. S. (2005). Enterprise Information Systems: A Pattern-<br />
Based Approach. (3 rd Edition). McGraw-Hill.<br />
Hollander, A. S., Denna, E. S. and Cherrington, J. O. (1996, 2000). Accounting, Information<br />
Technology, and <strong>Business</strong> Solutions (1 st and 2 nd editions). Chicago and London: Irwin.<br />
Moscove, S., Simkin, M. G., and Bagranoff, N. A. (2010) (11 th edition). Core Concepts of Accounting<br />
Information Systems. New York: John Wiley & Sons<br />
Romney, M. B. and Steinbart, P. J. (2009). AIS (11 th edition). New Jersey: Prentice Hall<br />
www.toptentechs.com<br />
-68
MODULE DESCRIPTIONS MODULE CATALOGUE<br />
ACCOUNTING INVESTIGATION<br />
MODULE CODE: BS3613<br />
NUMBER OF CREDITS: 10<br />
SEMESTER: Spring<br />
PROGRAMMES: BSc Accounting and BSc Accounting with a European Language<br />
AIMS OF THE MODULE:<br />
This module aims to enable students to integrate the areas of IT and accounting in individual<br />
assignments based on independent learning.<br />
LEARNING OUTCOMES OF THE MODULE<br />
On completion of the module a student should be able to<br />
A Knowledge and Understanding:<br />
• demonstrate an understanding of the theoretical and practical aspects of the accounting<br />
research process<br />
• understand the alternative methodological approaches to accounting research and show an<br />
awareness of the limitations of various accounting research methods<br />
B Intellectual Skills:<br />
• solve problems, including the ability to collect and manipulate financial and other numerical<br />
data<br />
• exercise powers of inquiry, logic, and critical analysis in the interpretation and evaluation of<br />
arguments and evidence<br />
• sustain a critical argument in writing<br />
C Discipline Specific Skills:<br />
• the capacity to identify an accounting research topic and search for relevant information to<br />
investigate this topic<br />
• apply theoretical and/or empirical analysis to an accounting topic<br />
D Transferable Skills:<br />
• communicate ideas, principles and theories effectively by oral and written means<br />
• exercise initiative, self reliance and time management skills and work independently<br />
• appreciate alternative viewpoints<br />
• exercise numeracy, problem solving and IT skills<br />
• access and utilise information in a variety of research resources, both traditional (e.g. library)<br />
and IT (e.g. the Internet and electronic journals).<br />
METHODS OF TEACHING AND LEARNING:<br />
The module comprises 4 hours of lectures and approximately 15 hours of student/supervisor contact.<br />
The remainder of the time is taken up by students working independently, which constitutes the core<br />
method of learning. The lectures are conducted at the beginning of the semester, and introduce<br />
students to the structure of the module. The lectures therefore include a discussion of accounting<br />
research methods available, and also provide examples of suitable accounting topics. The lectures<br />
are supported by handouts and published articles as exemplars of empirical and theoretical analysis.<br />
Following the lectures, students are required to select a topic, in consultation with the module coordinator.<br />
After the topic is selected, students work independently to research the topic. During this<br />
period, the module co-ordinator is available at designated periods each week for support and advice<br />
on the accounting investigation. Furthermore, students are encouraged to utilise IT to correspond<br />
with the module co-ordinator to make enquiries relating to their investigation. Correspondence<br />
between students and supervisor is thus ongoing throughout the investigation to ensure that any<br />
problems in the investigation are resolved promptly and effectively.<br />
Indicative study hours: 80<br />
-69-
MODULE CATALOGUE MODULE DESCRIPTIONS<br />
ASSESSMENT:<br />
Continuous Assessment: 100%<br />
One 500 word report to be submitted in week 4 of the Spring<br />
Semester<br />
One 4500 word report to be submitted in week 10 of the Spring<br />
Semester<br />
Formal assessment of this module is of a continuous nature, and comprises two elements. The first is<br />
a 500 word report which outlines the aims and objectives of the investigation, describes the methods<br />
to be employed in the investigation, and outlines any data to be collected. This preliminary report<br />
represents 25% of the total assessment and is designed to ensure that students devote the necessary<br />
attention to the selection of a suitable topic for investigation. This also allows students to identify<br />
and evaluate relevant prior research on the topic they have chosen, and to give due consideration to<br />
the application of suitable technology to the topic.<br />
The second and most substantive component of the formal assessment is the preparation of a 4500<br />
word report which describes the investigation and discusses the findings of the investigation in light<br />
of prior research. In conducting the investigation and preparing the report, students must<br />
demonstrate proficiency with suitable IT software. This may be demonstrated through the<br />
application of IT to collect and/or analyse empirical data, or through a theoretical and/or analytical<br />
modelling of an accounting topic. Students must also demonstrate an understanding of the<br />
accounting issue under investigation.<br />
SYLLABUS CONTENT:<br />
Students are required to investigate and prepare a report on a topic which has been selected in<br />
conjunction with the module co-ordinator. The topic must involve the application of IT to investigate<br />
an accounting issue, drawn from the core areas of financial accounting, management accounting and<br />
business finance. The module co-ordinator provides study guidance according to the topic chosen.<br />
INDICATIVE READING LIST:<br />
Hussey, R. and Hussey, J. <strong>Business</strong> Research Macmillan.<br />
Ryan, B., Scapens, R. and Theobald, M. Research Method and Methodology in Finance and<br />
Accounting, Academic Press<br />
Saunders, M., Lewis, P. and Thornhill, A. Research Methods for <strong>Business</strong> Students, FT Prentice Hall,<br />
3 rd edition<br />
-70-
MODULE DESCRIPTIONS MODULE CATALOGUE<br />
ACCOUNTING THEORY AND PRACTICE<br />
MODULE CODE: BS3511<br />
NUMBER OF CREDITS: 20<br />
SEMESTER: Autumn & Spring<br />
PROGRAMMES: BSc <strong>Business</strong> Management, BSc <strong>Business</strong> Management (Human<br />
Resources), BSc <strong>Business</strong> Management (International Management),<br />
BSc <strong>Business</strong> Management (Marketing), BSc Banking and Finance,<br />
BSc Econ <strong>Business</strong> Economics, BSc <strong>Business</strong> Management with a<br />
European Language, BSc <strong>Business</strong> Studies with Japanese, BSc Econ<br />
Economics & Management Studies.<br />
AIMS OF THE MODULE:<br />
The aim of the module is to build on students’ financial skill acquired at levels one and two and<br />
broaden and deepen their financial awareness and understanding. In particular, this module seeks to<br />
develop students’ critical understanding of practical accounting techniques within the context of a<br />
sound, theoretical framework of knowledge.<br />
LEARNING OUTCOMES OF THE MODULE<br />
On completion of the module a student should be able to<br />
A. Knowledge and Understanding<br />
• demonstrate a knowledge and a critical understanding of advanced financial ideas and<br />
concepts;<br />
• understand and evaluate current developments within the financial accounting area.<br />
B Intellectual Skills:<br />
• search for and acquire relevant information<br />
• collect and manipulate financial and other numerical data<br />
• analyse, interpret and draw reasoned conclusions from a set of data<br />
C Discipline Specific Skills:<br />
• appreciate the role of accounting in the contexts of internal control and corporate reporting<br />
and governance<br />
• gather, construct and interpret financial information<br />
• account for groups of companies, overseas activities and the impact of inflation<br />
• demonstrate a knowledge of the form and content of corporate reports and accounts<br />
D Transferable Skills:<br />
• effectively communicate ideas, principles and theories<br />
• exercise initiative, self-reliance and time management skills and work independently<br />
• appreciate alternative viewpoints<br />
• exercise numeracy, problem-solving and IT skills<br />
• access and utilise information in a variety of resources both traditional and IT<br />
METHODS OF TEACHING AND LEARNING:<br />
Teaching will take place in the Autumn and Spring semesters. There will be 34 hours of lectures and<br />
10 hours of supplementary seminars. The lectures will cover the theoretical concepts underpinning<br />
accounting and include their practical application. The seminars will be based around seminar<br />
questions dealing with the appreciation of accounting theory and its application. The lectures will be<br />
research-driven and provide students with core knowledge. The seminars will be conducted in an<br />
interactive manner to exploit the advantages of small group teaching. Detailed handouts and a<br />
structured reading list are given to students to encourage the completion of class questions, which<br />
build upon the material covered in lectures. The seminars will also be informed by student reading<br />
required in advance of the session.<br />
Indicative study hours: 160<br />
-71-
MODULE CATALOGUE MODULE DESCRIPTIONS<br />
ASSESSMENT:<br />
Examination Component 70%<br />
One 3 hour examination at the end of the Spring Semester<br />
Continuous Assessment 30%<br />
An individual written report of 2500 words to be submitted in week 1<br />
of the Spring Semester<br />
The assessments comprise an assignment and an examination. The assignment is designed to<br />
expose students to an accounting topic where they can search for material and then apply that<br />
material to business situations. The examination will test students’ knowledge, understanding and<br />
analytical skills. In particular, this third-level module will aim to test the students’ ability to solve<br />
practical problems, and to put forward reasons, analytically, and evidence-based arguments.<br />
SYLLABUS CONTENT:<br />
Lectures will cover the following topics: Accounting environment of UK companies. Strategic<br />
Accounting and Risk. Communication and presentation of financial information. Conceptual theory.<br />
Value added statements. Accounting standards. Group accounting. Employee reporting, social<br />
reporting and environmental reporting. Creative accounting. Accounting for changing prices, foreign<br />
currency and other accounting issues. Financial Statement Analysis. International Accounting.<br />
INDICATIVE READING LIST:<br />
Jones, M.J. (2006), Accounting, John Wiley and Sons.<br />
Griffiths, I. (1995), New Creative Accounting, MacMillans.<br />
Nobes, C. and R.H. Parker (2007), Comparative International Accounting, Phillip Allen.<br />
Deegan C and J Unerman, Financial Accounting Theory (European Edition) McGraw-Hill<br />
-72-
MODULE DESCRIPTIONS MODULE CATALOGUE<br />
ADVANCED ADVANCED JAPANESE JAPANESE JAPANESE COMMUNICATION<br />
COMMUNICATION<br />
MODULE CODE: BS5421<br />
NUMBER OF CREDITS: 30<br />
SEMESTER: Autumn & Spring<br />
PROGRAMMES: BSc (Joint) <strong>Business</strong> Studies and Japanese, BA (Joint) French and<br />
Japanese, BA (Joint) German and Japanese, BA (Joint) Italian and<br />
Japanese, BA (Joint) Spanish and Japanese<br />
AIMS OF THE MODULE:<br />
This module aims to develop and extend students’ knowledge and understanding of the Japanese<br />
language.<br />
LEARNING OUTCOMES OF THE MODULE<br />
On completion of the module a student should be able to<br />
A Knowledge and Understanding:<br />
• understand the main ideas and most details of connected discourse on a variety of topics<br />
beyond their immediate personal experience<br />
• converse in Japanese in a clearly participatory fashion on a variety of topics of a formal and<br />
informal nature<br />
B Intellectual Skills:<br />
• the consolidation and progression of previously learnt Japanese, combined with new idioms<br />
and vocabulary<br />
• a heightened cultural awareness of the application of language<br />
• the development of one’s own comprehension and delivery<br />
C Discipline Specific Skills:<br />
• a sound working knowledge of Japanese grammar, combined with awareness of honorific and<br />
humilific speech.<br />
• an increasing vocabulary base<br />
D Transferable Skills:<br />
• active participation in group discussions.<br />
• the ability to present information orally and to lead discussion amongst peers.<br />
METHODS OF TEACHING AND LEARNING:<br />
Classes will include all aspects of language skills. Students will be expected to prepare before classes<br />
and actively participate in the classes.<br />
Indicative study hours: 240<br />
ASSESSMENT:<br />
Examination Component 50% One three hour examination at the end of the spring semester.<br />
Continuous Assessment 50% One class test and one interview<br />
The formal assessment is designed to cover the learning outcomes for the module and to test<br />
development in all the key language skills. This may include garnering information from the spoken<br />
word, from written Japanese texts, and presenting information in spoken and written forms.<br />
Informal assessment is provided through discussion in classes and provides an ongoing mechanism<br />
for assessing the extent to which students are meeting the module’s learning outcomes.<br />
Students achieving 70% in the oral component of this module will be awarded Distinction in Oral<br />
Proficiency in Japanese.<br />
SYLLABUS CONTENT:<br />
Students will work with a variety of materials. The materials used will be appropriate to the needs<br />
-73-
MODULE CATALOGUE MODULE DESCRIPTIONS<br />
and areas of interest of all students.<br />
-74
MODULE DESCRIPTIONS MODULE CATALOGUE<br />
ADVANCED ADVANCED JAPANESE JAPANESE STUDIES<br />
STUDIES<br />
MODULE CODE: BS5422<br />
NUMBER OF CREDITS: 30<br />
SEMESTER: Autumn & Spring<br />
PROGRAMMES: BSc <strong>Business</strong> Studies and Japanese, BA (Joint) French and Japanese,<br />
BA (Joint) German and Japanese, BA (Joint) Italian and Japanese, BA<br />
(Joint) Spanish and Japanese<br />
AIMS OF THE MODULE:<br />
This module aims to provide students with a comprehensive understanding of aspects of Japanese<br />
society. It will provide students with a sound understanding of the theories that are used to study<br />
these aspects of Japanese society. It will develop in students the ability to appreciate, illustrate,<br />
differentiate and exemplify different explanations of how Japan functions using established theories,<br />
information gathered and from personal experience gained in Japan.<br />
LEARNING OUTCOMES OF THE MODULE<br />
On completion of the module a student should be able to<br />
A Knowledge and Understanding:<br />
• understand key aspects of Japanese society.<br />
• illustrate and compare the major differences between Japanese society and society in other<br />
developed nations as appropriate.<br />
B Intellectual Skills:<br />
• interpret and analyse information provided in lectures and seminars<br />
• carry out independent reading and research, and be able to present these findings in oral and<br />
written work<br />
• produce an in depth argument for or analysis of a given event or hypothesis<br />
C Discipline Specific Skills:<br />
• understand at an advanced level, aspects of the political, economic, educational and social<br />
systems of Japan<br />
• obtain information from Japanese sources<br />
D Transferable Skills:<br />
• present in written or oral form a clear, well argued and summated analysis on a given theme<br />
• use information resources independently and effectively<br />
• present information orally<br />
METHODS OF TEACHING AND LEARNING:<br />
Teaching will take place in the Autumn and Spring Semesters. Classes will focus upon providing the<br />
important – but by no means exclusive – information and training in developing the skills necessary to<br />
complete the module. Students will be expected to present and lead discussions.<br />
Indicative study hours: 240<br />
-75-
MODULE CATALOGUE MODULE DESCRIPTIONS<br />
ASSESSMENT:<br />
Continuous Assessment: 60%<br />
Number of pieces: One dissertation (8,000 words) worth 40%; one 15-minute class<br />
presentation worth 20%.<br />
Submission date of dissertation: Week 12 of Spring semester.<br />
Examination component: 40%, one two-hour examination at the end of the Spring<br />
Semester<br />
The formal assessment is designed to cover the learning outcomes for the module and to test skill<br />
development, including demonstration of the use of Japanese texts, that will test the student’s<br />
understanding of Japanese society.<br />
Informal assessment is provided through discussion in classes and provides an ongoing mechanism<br />
for assessing the extent to which students are meeting the module’s learning outcomes.<br />
SYLLABUS CONTENT:<br />
The syllabus will cover aspects of Japanese society and will include the study of relevant Japanese<br />
language texts. Discussions will be held with the expectation that students will draw upon the<br />
information learnt in this and other modules, as well as personal experience.<br />
INDICATIVE READING LIST:<br />
Hendry, J., 2003, Understanding Japanese Society, London: Routledge<br />
Hood, C.P., 2001, Japanese Educational Reform: Nakasone’s Legacy, London: Routledge<br />
Hood, C.P., 2006, Shinkansen – From Bullet Train to Symbol of Modern Japan, London: Routledge<br />
Hood, C.P., 2011, Dealing with Disaster in Japan: Responses to the Flight JL123 Crash, London:<br />
Routledge.<br />
Sugimoto, Y, 1997, An Introduction to Japanese Society, Cambridge: Cambridge University Press<br />
Kingston, J., 2001, Japan’s Transformation 1952 – 2000, Harlow: Pearson<br />
Umemura, M., 2011, The Japanese Pharmaceutical Industry, London: Routledge.<br />
Williams, D., 1994, Japan: Beyond The End of History, London: Routledge<br />
Williams, D., 1996, Japan and the Enemies of Open Political Science, London: Routledge<br />
Williams, D., 2004, Defending Japan’s Pacific War: The Kyoto Philosophers and the Idea of a Postwhite<br />
World, London: Routledge<br />
-76-
MODULE DESCRIPTIONS MODULE CATALOGUE<br />
ADVANCED OPERATIONS MANAGEMENT<br />
<strong>Module</strong> Code: BS3739<br />
Number of Credits: 20<br />
Semester Autumn & Spring<br />
Semester: BSc <strong>Business</strong> Management, BSc <strong>Business</strong> Management (Human<br />
Resources), BSc <strong>Business</strong> Management (Logistics & Operations), BSc<br />
<strong>Business</strong> Management (Marketing), BSc <strong>Business</strong> Management with a<br />
European Language, BSc <strong>Business</strong> Studies and Japanese.<br />
AIMS OF THE MODULE:<br />
The Strategic Operations Management module builds on the work undertaken in the BS2582 Operations<br />
Management module and aims to provide students an advanced understanding of operations<br />
management research methods and their application in solving business problems. It also develops an<br />
appreciation of the role of operational research in the development of business strategy. The Advanced<br />
Operations Management module aims to:<br />
• provide students with a number of operational management strategies that can be applied to<br />
real world problems.<br />
• stimulate an appreciation of the use of different types of operations management strategies to<br />
solving problems.<br />
• give students a foundation in operations management research.<br />
• enable students to apply the relevant operations management strategy to the correct situation.<br />
• enable students to understand operational management strategies and research and draw the<br />
correct conclusions from them.<br />
• give students an appreciation of the role of research in strategy development.<br />
• reinforce other modules in the programme from a strategic and research perspective.<br />
LEARNING OUTCOMES OF THE MODULE<br />
On completion of the module a student should be able to:<br />
A. Knowledge and Understanding<br />
• Evaluate best practice operations management strategies and their applications.<br />
• Understand the context and assumptions behind the application of various operational<br />
management strategies.<br />
• Demonstrate the ability to solve problems using Operations Management strategies.<br />
• Recognise the link between operations management strategies and other corporate strategies.<br />
B. Intellectual Skills:<br />
• Critically appraise various strategies within the context of operational constraints<br />
• Develop and present a balanced, considered, professional argument of the strengths and<br />
weaknesses of operations management strategies and research methods.<br />
• Test the application of various operational strategies via business games.<br />
C. Discipline Specific Skills:<br />
• Critically appraise various strategies within the context of operational constraints<br />
• Relate the strategic aspects of operations management to actual “how it is done” activities<br />
• Demonstrate their ability to solve problems using Operations Management techniques.<br />
• Recognise common barriers to operational improvement activities and how they can be<br />
overcome.<br />
D. Transferable Skills:<br />
• Utilise computer spreadsheet software as an aid to problem solving.<br />
• Working with others in a team.<br />
• Demonstrate communication skills by presenting well argued justifications for their strategic<br />
choices.<br />
METHODS OF TEACHING AND LEARNING:<br />
Teaching will take place during Autumn and Spring semesters. There will be approximately 44 hours of<br />
tutorials and lectures. Tutorials will focus on carefully selected worked examples, case studies, computer<br />
-77-
MODULE CATALOGUE MODULE DESCRIPTIONS<br />
exercises and management games to re-enforce the lecture topics.<br />
The module is fully supported by a web page for the module that contains; worked examples, computer<br />
spreadsheet models of various concepts explored in the module, links to other useful websites, previous<br />
assignments and exams papers and other supplementary material.<br />
ASSESSMENT:<br />
Examination Component 60%<br />
One 3 hour examination in the Spring Semester.<br />
Continuous Assessment 40%<br />
One assignment of 2500 words to be submitted in week 8 of the<br />
Autumn Semester (20%), and an individual project assignment<br />
equivalent to 2500 words to be submitted in week 7 of the Spring<br />
Semester (20%).<br />
Learning outcomes are assessed through three methods. There is a three hour examination (60%) at<br />
the end of the module, an individual essay assignment of 2500 words submitted at the end of the first<br />
semester, and an individual project assignment, equivalent to 2500 words, submitted in Semester 2.<br />
The two pieces of course work have equal weighting contributing to 40% of the module assessment.<br />
The topics on which students are assessed relate to key aspects of the syllabus and are intended to be<br />
problem solving in nature. The examination is in two halves with questions related to both semesters.<br />
One half will be quantitative in nature and the other will be qualitative. Answers will be in the form of<br />
essays, numerical solutions and diagrammatical representations.<br />
SYLLABUS CONTENT:<br />
The syllabus will build on latest research and developments in operations management and research<br />
strategy. The students will be shown how to critically analyse the latest strategic thinking in operations<br />
management and to discuss the relevance of these strategies to various operational environments.<br />
Coverage of the syllabus content will be achieved through the effective linking of key research papers<br />
with specific taught sessions where the underpinning knowledge and specific research themes are<br />
reinforced. Selected research papers will be provided to the students and discussed during the lecture<br />
periods. From here key tools, techniques and paradigms are drawn out and fully developed in the<br />
teaching phase of the lecture. Figure 1 below shows the learning approach.<br />
Research Approach<br />
Adopted, Research<br />
Themes, Findings etc<br />
Research<br />
Research<br />
Papers<br />
Papers<br />
Tools, Techniques,<br />
Frameworks proposed and<br />
adopted<br />
Underpinning Underpinning / / Supported Supported Teaching Teaching Themes<br />
Themes<br />
Figure 1 – Learning Approach<br />
-78-<br />
Strategic direction of research, how<br />
does the paper inform / set strategy<br />
in operations management
MODULE DESCRIPTIONS MODULE CATALOGUE<br />
The module tutors will review annually the top 10 papers that have made a significant contribution in<br />
the field of operations management. Candidate journals include, but are not limited to, Journal of<br />
Operations Management, International Journal of Operations and Production Management, International<br />
Journal of Production Research and International Journal of Production Economics. The papers will also<br />
be selected based on their research methods content pertinent to the field of operations management.<br />
Research data sources will be categorised as archival, empirical, analytical and opinion.<br />
INDICATIVE READING LIST:<br />
Hill, T., Operations management : strategic context and managerial analysis, Macmillan, 2000<br />
(Further list will be provided)<br />
-79-
MODULE CATALOGUE MODULE DESCRIPTIONS<br />
ADVERTISING AND MARKETING COMMUNICATIONS<br />
MANAGEMENT<br />
MODULE CODE: BS3725<br />
NUMBER OF CREDITS: 20<br />
SEMESTER: Autumn & Spring<br />
PROGRAMMES: BSc Econ Accounting and Management, BSc <strong>Business</strong> Management,<br />
BSc <strong>Business</strong> Management (Human Resources), BSc <strong>Business</strong><br />
Management (International Management), BSc <strong>Business</strong><br />
Management (Logistics & Operations Management), BSc <strong>Business</strong><br />
Management (Marketing), BSc <strong>Business</strong> Management with a<br />
European Language, BSc <strong>Business</strong> Studies and Japanese, BSc<br />
<strong>Business</strong> Management & Finance<br />
AIMS OF THE MODULE:<br />
The module aims to provide students with an understanding of marketing communications. The<br />
module helps students to examine the behavioural and communications theories that underpin or<br />
contribute to marketing communications. Also, students will focus on the specific promotional tools<br />
(such as advertising, direct marketing, sales promotion, personal selling, and public relations) that are<br />
available to organisations to communicate with their external and internal audiences.<br />
LEARNING OUTCOMES OF THE MODULE<br />
On completion of the module a student should be able to<br />
A. Knowledge and Understanding<br />
• Understand the range of marketing communications vehicles available to the<br />
marketer<br />
• Explore underpinning communications theory within the marketing communications context<br />
B. Intellectual Skills:<br />
• Critically appraise and evaluate marketing communication models and theories<br />
• Formulate, evaluate and report marketing communications mix solutions and/or strategies<br />
• Critically appraise and account for the value of market intelligence through marketing<br />
research or communication planning and control, and the associated information system<br />
issues.<br />
C. Discipline Specific Skills:<br />
• Critically evaluate marketing communications mix components and/or strategies in developing<br />
successful integrated marketing communication campaigns<br />
• Analyse, evaluate and apply a variety of marketing information and research approaches<br />
within the development of marketing communications programmes and for the evaluation of<br />
these.<br />
D. Transferable Skills:<br />
• Demonstrate ability to analyse concepts and theories and to apply these to different contexts<br />
and then to evaluate applicability and implications within both a business and societal<br />
context.<br />
METHODS OF TEACHING AND LEARNING:<br />
There are 44 hours of classes. The lecture programme consists of one hour of teaching followed by a<br />
one hour interactive session that includes the use of videos, the Internet and analysis of case studies.<br />
The module also involves the use of guest speakers. Students are supported throughout the module<br />
with electronic Blackboard facilities.<br />
Indicative study hours: 160<br />
ASSESSMENT:<br />
Examination Component 60%<br />
-80-
MODULE DESCRIPTIONS MODULE CATALOGUE<br />
One 3 hour examination in the Spring Semester.<br />
Continuous Assessment 40%<br />
One assignment of 2500 words to be submitted in week 2 of the<br />
Spring Semester<br />
Assessment is via one individual assignment and a three hour examination, selected to achieve the<br />
learning outcomes for the module. The continuous assessment is based on a practical piece of work<br />
that permits assessment of students’ abilities, skills and competencies related to all of the learning<br />
outcomes. The focus of the continuous assessment remains on developing and evaluating skills and<br />
abilities related to comprehension and application. The assessment will normally be based on major<br />
marketing communications case study which assesses these competencies and provides important<br />
formative as well as diagnostic assessment of students.<br />
The final examination component then evaluates students’ overall abilities, skills and competencies<br />
related to all of understanding, analysis, application, synthesis and evaluation.<br />
SYLLABUS CONTENT:<br />
Marketing communication theories, process, role of signs, meaning and culture<br />
Integrated marketing communications and the marketing communication planning process<br />
Sequential models of advertising, elaboration likelihood model, role of advertising and branding<br />
Context of communications – ethics, self regulation and legislation; the international dimension<br />
Tools of marketing communications, aim, key characteristics, selection and effectiveness<br />
Comprehensive discussion of major tools such as advertising, sales promotion, direct marketing;<br />
public relations; personal selling<br />
Message appeals and strategies; media characteristics, planning and strategy; agency - client<br />
relationship<br />
Communications for services marketing and for business to business marketing<br />
INDICATIVE READING LIST:<br />
Fill, Chris (2005), Marketing Communications: engagement, strategies and practice, 4th edition,<br />
Prentice Hall Europe<br />
De Pelsmacker Patrick, Geuens M. and Van den Bergh J. (2007), Marketing Communications, A<br />
European Perspective<br />
Pickton, D. and Broderick, A. (2005), Integrated Marketing Communications, Pearson<br />
Education/Prentice Hall,<br />
Smith, P. R. and Taylor, J (2004), Marketing Communications: An Integrated Approach, 4th edition,<br />
Kogan Page: London<br />
Shimp. Terrance A. (2000), Advertising Promotion: supplemental aspects of integrated marketing<br />
communications<br />
Evans, Martin, O’Malley, L., and Patterson, M., (2004), Exploring Direct & Customer Relationship<br />
Marketing, 2nd edition, London: Thomson.<br />
Tapp, Alan (2000), Principles of Direct and Database Marketing, 3rd edition, Pearson<br />
Evans, M., Jamal A., and Foxall, G., (2009), Consumer Behaviour, second edition, Wiley: London<br />
-81-
MODULE CATALOGUE MODULE DESCRIPTIONS<br />
ANALYSIS OF FINANCIAL REPORTING INFORMATION<br />
MODULE CODE: BS3520<br />
NUMBER OF CREDITS: 10<br />
SEMESTER: Autumn<br />
PROGRAMMES: BSc Accounting & Finance; BSc Accounting, BSc Accounting with a<br />
European Language<br />
AIMS OF THE MODULE:<br />
The module aims to enable students to use and evaluate financial statements in company investment<br />
appraisal and understand the relationship between financial reporting and market-based information.<br />
LEARNING OUTCOMES OF THE MODULE<br />
On completion of the module a student should be able to:<br />
(A Knowledge and Understanding)<br />
• Show a systematic knowledge of how financial reporting information can be used in<br />
fundamental valuation models.<br />
• Show a systematic knowledge of the empirical research into the relationship between<br />
financial reporting data and stock market data.<br />
• Distinguish between operating and financing items in financial reporting information.<br />
• Discuss how financial reporting information can be used in the analysis of credit risk.<br />
• Understand how to assess the quality of financial reporting information.<br />
• Discuss the implications of the efficient markets hypothesis for the analysis of financial<br />
reporting information.<br />
(B Intellectual Skills)<br />
• Synthesise and evaluate primary and secondary data.<br />
• Solve problems, including the ability to manipulate financial and other numerical data and to<br />
apply statistical concepts at an appropriate level.<br />
• Exercise powers of inquiry, logic, and critical analysis, interpretation and evaluation of<br />
arguments and evidence.<br />
• Sustain a critical argument in writing.<br />
(C Discipline Specific Skills)<br />
• Evaluate and apply financial ratios to assess company performance.<br />
• Use various types of financial reporting information as inputs to fundamental accounting<br />
valuation models.<br />
• Apply corporate failure prediction models using financial reporting data.<br />
(D Transferable Skills)<br />
• Communicate ideas, principles and theories effectively by oral and written means.<br />
• Exercise initiative, self reliance and time management skills and work independently.<br />
• Appreciate alternative viewpoints.<br />
• Exercise numeracy, problem solving and IT skills.<br />
• Access and analyse information using a variety of research resources both traditional (e.g.<br />
library) and IT (e.g. statistical programs and databases).<br />
METHODS OF TEACHING AND LEARNING:<br />
The formal timetabled component of the module comprises approximately eighteen lectures and four<br />
classes. The lecture programme, which is supported by detailed handouts, is used to introduce<br />
material to students, to direct them (through the use of recommended reading and web sites<br />
included in the handouts) to sources which will enable them, during the private study time they<br />
devote to the module (fifty eight hours), to increase their knowledge and understanding of that<br />
material, and to empower them to attempt the problems which are set for classes. Classes are<br />
closely integrated to the lecture programme and are designed to enable students to apply the<br />
material covered in that programme to solve problems and to discuss and evaluate those solutions.<br />
In order to get the most out of classes, it is essential that students should attempt to work the<br />
questions set for each class before that class takes place so that they may contribute fully to any<br />
-82-
MODULE DESCRIPTIONS MODULE CATALOGUE<br />
discussion of the issues raised by those questions.<br />
Indicative study hours: 80<br />
ASSESSMENT:<br />
Examination Component: 100%<br />
One 2 hour examination at the end of the autumn semester<br />
The examination paper is designed to enable students to demonstrate their intellectual skills of<br />
analysis, synthesis and evaluation and the extent to which they have met the module learning<br />
outcomes. The paper will include questions of two types: first, problem questions requiring students<br />
to use the theoretical and technical material from the module to solve problems and to evaluate their<br />
solutions; second, essay questions designed to enable students to demonstrate their understanding of<br />
the theoretical, technical and empirical material covered on the module.<br />
Informal assessment is provided through the class problems (for which solutions are provided) which<br />
enable students to self-assess the extent to which they are meeting the module learning outcomes.<br />
In addition the module coordinator is available at advertised times throughout the module to answer<br />
queries and discuss progress with students.<br />
SYLLABUS CONTENT:<br />
Assumptions and limitations of financial ratio analysis. Prediction models and financial reporting<br />
information. Company valuation with financial reporting information. Financial reporting information<br />
and stock market data. Distinction between operating and financial items. Reformulation of financial<br />
statements. Assessing the quality of financial reporting information. Analysis of qualitative financial<br />
reporting data.<br />
INDICATIVE READING LIST:<br />
Penman, S.H. (2004) Financial Statement Analysis and Security Valuation (4 th edition), McGraw Hill.<br />
Barker, R. (2001) Determining Value FT Prentice Hall.<br />
-83
MODULE CATALOGUE MODULE DESCRIPTIONS<br />
APPLIED MACROECONOMICS AND FINANCE<br />
MODULE CODE: BS3570<br />
NUMBER OF CREDITS: 20<br />
SEMESTER: Autumn & Spring<br />
PROGRAMMES: BSc Econ Accounting and Economics, BSc Econ <strong>Business</strong> Economics,<br />
BSc Econ Economics and Management Studies, BSc <strong>Business</strong><br />
Economics and a European Language<br />
AIMS OF THE MODULE:<br />
The Applied Macroeconomics and Finance module aims to:<br />
• provide students with the ability to understand and predict the macroeconomic environment<br />
• encourage students to employ economic analysis to evaluate macroeconomic policy<br />
• develop and enhance the skills and materials obtained in the year 2 Macroeconomic Theory<br />
module.<br />
• enhance, through teaching and learning, subject-specific and transferable skills, including<br />
technical, analytical and research methods.<br />
LEARNING OUTCOMES OF THE MODULE<br />
On completion of the module a student should be able to<br />
A Knowledge and Understanding:<br />
• students will understand the macroeconomic behaviour of the principal world economies<br />
• recognise the potential and limits of macroeconomic theory an aid to predicting<br />
macroeconomic variables.<br />
• understand the roles of policymakers and the constraints upon them in determining<br />
macroeconomic outcomes.<br />
B Intellectual Skills:<br />
• analytical skills: Students are expected to apply logical analysis and modelling to<br />
macroeconomic problems.<br />
• evaluative skills: Students should be able to accurately identify macroeconomic problems, and<br />
to understand how policy makers might seek solutions to them.<br />
C Discipline Specific Skills:<br />
• appreciate the usefulness and limitations of economic theory to predicting the<br />
macroeconomy.<br />
• recognise the significance of limitations and constraints on macroeconomic policy-makers<br />
D Transferable Skills:<br />
• work individually, setting goals and developing ideas.<br />
• problem solve using a range of quantitative methodologies<br />
• develop logical and concise solutions to specific decision-type problems.<br />
• respond accurately to questioning on researched topic areas<br />
• collect, organise and analyse data on defined topics<br />
• use a variety of information and technology resources, including electronic data sources and<br />
the internet.<br />
METHODS OF TEACHING AND LEARNING:<br />
Teaching occurs in the Autumn and Spring semesters. There are approximately 44 hours of contact<br />
comprising 34 hours of lectures and 10 hours of classes. Lectures provide students with an outline of<br />
the course material. Students are encouraged to read around the module topics through a series of<br />
key reading from a core text, and with some supporting information from satellite texts. Classes<br />
concentrate on set numerical and essay style problems allied to the core lecture material. Students<br />
prepare answers to problems, deliver brief presentations of solutions, and participate in class<br />
-84-
MODULE DESCRIPTIONS MODULE CATALOGUE<br />
discussions.<br />
Classes explore particular decision situations in more detail. Class questions typically require a mix of<br />
qualitative and qualitative solutions.<br />
Indicative study hours: 160<br />
ASSESSMENT:<br />
Examination Component: 100%<br />
One 2 hour exam at the end of the Autumn semester. (20%)<br />
One 3 hour examination at the end of the Spring semester based on<br />
material covered in both semesters. (80%)<br />
The two hour examination at the end of the Autumn semester will examine students understanding of<br />
key concepts and theories relating to semester one topics.<br />
The examination at the end of the Spring Semester is based on material covered in both Semesters.<br />
This examination requires students to answer both essay questions and multi-part quantitative<br />
questions. Students will demonstrate that they understand the theoretical foundations of the course,<br />
provide critiques of ideas and methodologies where necessary, and be able to apply logical, scientific<br />
approaches to decision-making in a range of decision situations.<br />
SYLLABUS CONTENT:<br />
The real macroeconomy: economic growth, labour markets and unemployment, private sector<br />
demand, the real exchange rate<br />
The supply and demand for money: monetary policy<br />
Inflation and business cycles: aggregate demand and supply<br />
Macroeconomic policy: fiscal policy and debt, demand management, supply-side policy, growth policy,<br />
forecasting models<br />
Asset Markets: market efficiency, concepts and testing, derivatives and risk<br />
INDICATIVE READING LIST:<br />
O Blanchard, Macroeconomics 3 rd ed (Prentice Hall 2003)<br />
M Burda and C Wyplosz, Macroeconomics: A European Text, 5 th edition (OUP 2009)<br />
W Carlin and D Sockice, Macroeconomics: Imperfections, Institutions and Policies (OUP 2006)<br />
D Miles and A Scott, Macroeconomics: Understanding the Wealth of Nations, 2 nd Edition (Wiley 2005)<br />
PR Krugman, The Return of Depression Economics and the Crisis of 2008 (Penguin 2008)<br />
-85
MODULE CATALOGUE MODULE DESCRIPTIONS<br />
APPLIED WELFARE ECONOMICS<br />
MODULE CODE: BS3546<br />
NUMBER OF CREDITS: 20<br />
SEMESTER: Autumn & Spring<br />
PROGRAMMES: BSc Econ Banking & Finance, BSc Econ <strong>Business</strong> Economics, BSc<br />
Econ Economics, BSc Econ Economics and Management Studies, BSc<br />
Econ Accounting and Economics, BSc Economics with a European<br />
Language, BSc Econ Economics and Politics, BA Economics with a<br />
Humanities Subject, BSc Econ <strong>Business</strong> Economics with a European<br />
Language, BSc Econ Banking and Finance with a European Language<br />
AIMS OF THE MODULE:<br />
Applied Welfare Economics is offered as an optional module for final year students across a range of<br />
single and joint honours degree programmes involving Economics. Its role within the degree<br />
programme is to complement the core microeconomic theory modules by applying the analysis of<br />
welfare economics to policy issues, such as cost-benefit analysis and socioeconomic problems<br />
including climate change and crime. Applied Welfare Economics builds on the welfare economics<br />
content of year 2 microeconomics. The coursework offers final year students a chance to develop and<br />
display skills by undertaking a small individual research project which applies economic analysis to a<br />
real problem of their own choice.<br />
Applied Welfare Economics aims to provide students with a thorough grounding in the theory,<br />
concepts, principles and techniques of welfare economics focusing in particular on the application of<br />
economic analysis to policy problems in areas such as health, education, transport, crime prevention<br />
and the environment including the use of cost-benefit and cost-effectiveness analysis.<br />
LEARNING OUTCOMES OF THE MODULE<br />
On completion of the module a student should be able to<br />
A Knowledge and Understanding:<br />
• explain the welfare economic foundations of cost-benefit analysis and the principles behind its<br />
application to investments in, for example, education and transport.<br />
• distinguish the main techniques used to measure and value social costs and benefits and be<br />
able to contrast implicit and explicit valuations of specific non-marketed costs and benefits.<br />
• apply and explain the discounting techniques used by cost-benefit decision rules, including<br />
NPV and IRR<br />
• interpret the results of published cost-benefit and cost-effectiveness studies, and assess the<br />
methodology employed.<br />
B Intellectual Skills:<br />
• apply deductive reasoning, numerical concepts and logical analysis to cost-benefit<br />
calculations.<br />
• recognise the relevance of rationality, marginal analysis and equilibrium to decision problems<br />
in the public sector.<br />
• apply appropriate economic analysis, for instance the analysis of choice under uncertainty or<br />
of externalities to problems of social and economic concern and to see the common links in<br />
economic terms between apparently disparate problems.<br />
• evaluate the economic basis for alternative proposals to improve the allocation of resources<br />
within specific areas, for example the use of QALYs to guide expenditure decisions in health,<br />
and the introduction of road pricing to reduce congestion costs.<br />
C Discipline Specific Skills:<br />
• be able to argue for the relevance of an economic approach to persistent economic and social<br />
problems in the UK, such as climate change, transport safety and health services rationing.<br />
• simplify complex problems using a cost-benefit framework into a form which allows effective<br />
problem solving and decision making.<br />
• identify systematically the opportunity costs and benefits associated with alternative courses<br />
of action.<br />
-86-
MODULE DESCRIPTIONS MODULE CATALOGUE<br />
D Transferable Skills:<br />
• choose their own topic and work on their own to produce a unique and substantial piece of<br />
applied economic research, setting their own schedule, developing their own ideas and<br />
working to their own self-imposed standards.<br />
• collect their own data using appropriate methods, for instance by designing and<br />
administering a questionnaire.<br />
• organise and analyse data using recognised quantitative techniques, such as regression<br />
analysis or discounting.<br />
• integrate factual information and data derived into the consideration of quantifiable<br />
problems.<br />
METHODS OF TEACHING AND LEARNING:<br />
Teaching takes place in both the autumn and spring semesters. There are approximately 31 hours of<br />
lectures and 12 hours of classes. Applied Welfare Economics is divided into 10 blocks. Each block<br />
includes three hours of lectures and one one-hour class. Two hours are spent in workshops in which<br />
the students work through a problem in small groups.<br />
Each lecture is accompanied by a handout which makes explicit the structure of the lecture by<br />
providing the headings. The handout may also include data and or diagrams. Students are<br />
encouraged to ask questions either during or after lectures. For each block students are provided with<br />
a reading list identifying references which are useful for preparation for class exercises and for<br />
revision. Although the module is taught in ten blocks, the lectures pick out and emphasise common<br />
economic themes across topics.<br />
Classes are held in groups of approximately ten students. Questions for classes are handed out a<br />
week in advance and students prepare their answers before the class. The class problems expect<br />
written answers; these are discussed in class, taken in and returned with marks and comments. The<br />
work students do for classes is not part of the formal assessment. It encourages students to keep up<br />
with the material, to do some reading, to test their comprehension by tackling a set of specially<br />
designed exercises and to present and discuss the issues and analysis. Where classes do not get<br />
through all the questions the answers may be made available via Blackboard.<br />
Indicative study hours: 160<br />
ASSESSMENT:<br />
Examination Component 60%<br />
One 3 hour examination at the end of the Spring Semester<br />
Continuous Assessment 40%<br />
One project of approximately 3000 words to be submitted in week 7<br />
of the Spring Semester<br />
Each student chooses her/his own Applied Welfare Economics project topic, with guidance from staff.<br />
Each student comes forward with a proposal which incorporates a question which they propose to<br />
answer plus some ideas about how to tackle the question e.g. how to value the key costs and<br />
benefits of a project to be analysed. Staff approve each topic as feasible, and also comment on the<br />
proposals in outline form. The students carry out their own research and write up their own project.<br />
This format combines maximum freedom of choice on topic with a rigorous insistence on the<br />
relevance of economic analysis and the use of appropriate methods. During the process of carrying<br />
out the project, from idea to submission, students acquire both subject-specific and transferable<br />
skills. The emphasis in this coursework is on using the economics, applying the principles to do<br />
something – it is a practical exercise.<br />
The Applied Welfare Economics exam is split into two sections. Section A carries one third of the<br />
marks and offers students a choice of one question out of two. Question 1 consists of an extract<br />
from an article or paper, and asks a series of eight questions about the contents; question 2 asks<br />
students to set up and comment on an economic appraisal of a current policy issue. Section A carries<br />
two thirds of the marks and contains five essay questions, from which students choose two. These<br />
essay questions will typically ask students to evaluate the standard methods employed in cost-benefit<br />
-87-
MODULE CATALOGUE MODULE DESCRIPTIONS<br />
analysis or to apply economic principles to more than one subject area.<br />
SYLLABUS CONTENT:<br />
The syllabus of Applied Welfare Economics focuses on the main areas of application of welfare<br />
economics principles to policy decisions. The principles and practice of cost-benefit analysis are<br />
covered, and the actual and potential contribution to be made by an economic approach to solving<br />
specific current problems in the fields of transport, the environment, crime, health and education are<br />
analysed.<br />
INDICATIVE READING LIST:<br />
A Boardman D Greenberg A Vining and D Weimer (2010) Cost-benefit analysis: concepts and<br />
practice, 4 th edition.<br />
E J Mishan & E Quay (2007) Cost Benefit Analysis, 5 th Edition.<br />
-88
MODULE DESCRIPTIONS MODULE CATALOGUE<br />
BUSINESS APPLICATIONS<br />
MODULE CODE: BS3547<br />
NUMBER OF CREDITS: 20<br />
SEMESTER: Autumn & Spring<br />
PROGRAMMES: BSc Econ <strong>Business</strong> Economics, BSc Econ Accounting and Economics,<br />
BSc Econ Economics and Management, BSc Econ <strong>Business</strong> Economics<br />
with a European Language<br />
AIMS OF THE MODULE:<br />
The <strong>Business</strong> Applications module aims to develop the concepts explored in the Managerial Economics<br />
module, and make use of the skills acquired in the Empirical <strong>Business</strong> Economics module to analyse<br />
business decisions using<br />
spreadsheets. The module extends the economics discipline by showing how the knowledge and skills<br />
acquired in core economics areas may be applied to resource allocation problems within the firm. It<br />
deals with the structure of business decision making, and how practical applications can be<br />
enlightened using theoretical economic perspectives. It develops computerised models for the<br />
economic analysis of business decisions and equips students with the principles and techniques of<br />
economic, statistical and mathematical analysis as applied to key decision areas in business<br />
management. In the process it provides transferable subject-specific and core analytical skills that will<br />
be of value to students in their future education and careers.<br />
LEARNING OUTCOMES OF THE MODULE<br />
On completion of the module a student should be able to<br />
A Knowledge and Understanding:<br />
• apply and assess the ‘modelling’ paradigm to the solution of complex real world problems<br />
commonly met in the business environment<br />
• understand the diagnostic statistics available in statistical packages, and various other<br />
attributes for assessing the reliability of forecasts<br />
• evaluate demand estimations, forecasts and their theoretical bases<br />
• appreciate the purpose and limitations of national economic and market data and be<br />
competent in utilising them for decision models and forecasts<br />
B Intellectual Skills:<br />
• describe and apply the main principles and techniques of <strong>Business</strong> Economics, particularly<br />
those which utilise spreadsheets:<br />
• apply the methodology of economic and financial modelling used in decision making,<br />
including investment appraisal, pricing and output analysis which can benefit from<br />
quantitative techniques.<br />
C Discipline Specific Skills:<br />
• economic and Statistical modelling<br />
D Transferable Skills:<br />
• computer-model development is fostered in small workshop groups so that students acquire<br />
the necessary skills step by step. The material used in these workshops is simplified for<br />
pedagogic reasons but the principles studied are widely transferable to a business<br />
environment.<br />
METHODS OF TEACHING AND LEARNING:<br />
Teaching will be conducted through 22 hours of lectures and 22 one-hour computer workshops.<br />
Lectures, which often include demonstrations using modern audio-visual equipment, offer a coherent<br />
statement of the syllabus whilst the practical application of the models studied in the computer<br />
laboratory offer important re-enforcement and ‘learning by doing’. Regular supervised computer lab<br />
workshops in smaller groups enables monitoring of student progress and to ensure the acquisition of<br />
the necessary spreadsheet skills and knowledge.<br />
-89-
MODULE CATALOGUE MODULE DESCRIPTIONS<br />
Indicative study hours: 160<br />
ASSESSMENT:<br />
Examination Component 100%<br />
One 2 hour examination at the end of the Autumn semester based<br />
on the syllabus covered in that semester. (30%)<br />
One 4 hour examination at the end of the Spring semester based on<br />
the syllabus of BOTH semesters. (70%)<br />
Examinations are held in the microcomputer laboratories<br />
SYLLABUS CONTENT:<br />
1. Computer Models of the Firm<br />
Profit-maximising monopoly and Baumol's sales-revenue-maximising model.<br />
Solutions involving spreadsheet tabulation, backward iteration, and the logical function of<br />
Excel<br />
2. Investment and Finance<br />
Discounted cash flow and the NPV, IRR and PMT functions of Excel. Application of DCF to<br />
project selection, ranking, rent or buy, capital rationing, and optimal replacement problems.<br />
3. Management Science<br />
Application of linear programming to production and transportation; with marketing<br />
applications in advertising, media planning and site location analysis. Extensions to the<br />
capital rationing problem.<br />
4. Forecasting techniques<br />
Definitions, methodologies, qualitative, quantitative, costs and benefits. Development of<br />
smoothing techniques: time-series decomposition, simple exponential smoothing and the<br />
Holt-Winters triple parameter technique.<br />
5. Revision of basic 2-variable regression model<br />
Development of multiple regression as a spreadsheet application. Basic forecasting with the<br />
model and its implementation in the spreadsheet. Point and interval forecasts. Sources of<br />
forecasting error.<br />
6. Regression methodologies<br />
(i) Co-linearity, ARMA, indicators, causal modeling:- e.g. the Stock Adjustment Model.<br />
(ii) Ex ante and Ex post forecasts. Naïve forecasts. Forecast assessment – accuracy<br />
analysis.<br />
(iii) Using single equation economic models – The policy problem.<br />
(iv) Using simple simultaneous economic models and their spreadsheet application - Gauss-<br />
Seidel.<br />
7. Dynamic simultaneous economic models<br />
Dynamic modeling in a spreadsheet environment. Application for forecasting, economic<br />
modeling and policy decision with 'what-if' analysis.<br />
8. Statistical forecasting strategy.<br />
ARMA models – identification, estimation and diagnostic checking in the spreadsheet<br />
INDICATIVE READING LIST:<br />
D. Whigham “Quantitative <strong>Business</strong> Methods Using Excel” Oxford<br />
J.F. Barlow “Excel Models for <strong>Business</strong> and Operations Management” (3 rd ed) Wiley 2005<br />
D. R. Anderson, Sweeney & Williams “Contemporary <strong>Business</strong> Statistics with Microsoft Excel”<br />
Thomson/Southwestern<br />
D. R. Anderson, Sweeney & Williams “An Introduction to Management Science - quantitative<br />
approaches to decision making” Thomson/Southwestern<br />
A. H. Kvanli , Pavur & Keeling “Introduction to <strong>Business</strong> Statistics - a computer integrated data<br />
-90-
MODULE DESCRIPTIONS MODULE CATALOGUE<br />
analysis approach” Thomson/Southwestern<br />
Of less direct relevance for the reasons given are:<br />
A. Gully "Modelling Economic Systems - a spreadsheet-based approach" International Thomson Press<br />
1996 (uses Quattro Pro)<br />
J. Bridge "Managerial Decisions with the Microcomputer" Philip Allan Chs 2, 4, 5 (uses Lotus 1-2-3)<br />
The following do not use spreadsheets but discuss some of the topics covered.<br />
G. Judge "Quantitative analysis for Economics and <strong>Business</strong>" Chs 8,9,10<br />
G. Keating "The Production and use of Economic Forecasts"<br />
J. Jarrett "<strong>Business</strong> Forecasting Methods" Blackwell 1987<br />
R. S. Pindyck and D. L. Rubinfeld “Econometric Models and Forecasting” McGraw-Hill<br />
H. Levy and M. Sarnat “Capital Investment and Financing Decisions” Prentice Hall<br />
S. Lumby “Investment Appraisal and Financing Decisions” Van Nostrand Reinhold<br />
The underlying econometric theory can be found in the text:<br />
R C. Hill et. al. “Principles of Econometrics” (3 rd ed) Wiley 2008 Sections 4.1 (app4A), 6.8, Ch 9, 12,<br />
The following are comparatively easy reading and deal with closely related IT and economic data<br />
analysis issues.<br />
G. Judge “Computing Skills for Economists” Wiley 2000<br />
G. Koop “Analysis of Economic Data” (3 rd ed) Wiley 2008<br />
-91
MODULE CATALOGUE MODULE DESCRIPTIONS<br />
BUSINESS FINANCE<br />
MODULE CODE: BS3502<br />
NUMBER OF CREDITS: 20<br />
SEMESTER: Autumn & Spring<br />
PROGRAMMES: BSc Accounting, BSc Econ Accounting & Economics, BSc Econ<br />
Accounting & Management, BSc Accounting & Finance, BSc<br />
Accounting with a European Language, BSc Econ Economics &<br />
Finance, BSc <strong>Business</strong> Management & Finance.<br />
AIMS OF THE MODULE:<br />
The aim of the module is to build on the knowledge of finance acquired in previous modules, in<br />
particular BS2502, by introducing students to further areas of the underlying theory and practice of<br />
finance.<br />
LEARNING OUTCOMES OF THE MODULE<br />
On completion of the module a student should be able to<br />
A Knowledge and Understanding:<br />
• show a systematic knowledge and understanding of, and critically evaluate, the efficient<br />
markets hypothesis and its implications for investors on the stock exchange and for firms’<br />
investment and financing decisions.<br />
• show a systematic knowledge and understanding of, and critically evaluate, option pricing<br />
theory and its implications for firms’ investment and financing decisions.<br />
• show a systematic knowledge and understanding of, and critically evaluate, the theory and<br />
practice of capital structure decisions.<br />
• show a systematic knowledge and understanding of, and critically evaluate, different types of<br />
leases and the underlying theory of lease or buy decisions.<br />
• show a systematic knowledge and understanding of, and critically evaluate, the theory and<br />
practice of corporate dividend decisions.<br />
• show a systematic knowledge and understanding of, and critically evaluate, the theory and<br />
practice of working capital management and treasury management.<br />
• show a systematic knowledge and understanding of, and critically evaluate, the motives,<br />
methods and consequences of corporate merger activity.<br />
• show a systematic knowledge and understanding of, and critically evaluate, a range of other<br />
corporate restructuring practices.<br />
• show a systematic knowledge and understanding of, and critically evaluate, the causes of<br />
corporate failure and quantitative and qualitative failure prediction models.<br />
B Intellectual Skills:<br />
• synthesise and evaluate primary and secondary data.<br />
• solve problems, including the ability to manipulate financial and other numerical data and to<br />
apply statistical concepts at an appropriate level.<br />
• exercise powers of inquiry, logic, and critical analysis, interpretation and evaluation of<br />
arguments and evidence.<br />
• sustain a critical argument in writing.<br />
C Discipline Specific Skills:<br />
• price options and apply option pricing models to corporate financing and investment<br />
decisions.<br />
• apply appropriate techniques to evaluate lease or buy decisions.<br />
• apply a range of inventory management, credit management and cash management models.<br />
• apply a range of techniques for the management of interest rate risk.<br />
• use a variety of models to value potential takeover targets.<br />
• apply and interpret corporate failure prediction models based on quantitative and qualitative<br />
data.<br />
-92-
MODULE DESCRIPTIONS MODULE CATALOGUE<br />
D Transferable Skills:<br />
• communicate ideas, principles and theories effectively by oral and written means.<br />
• exercise initiative, self reliance and time management skills and work independently.<br />
• appreciate alternative viewpoints.<br />
• exercise numeracy, problem solving and IT skills.<br />
• access and utilise information in a variety of research resources both traditional (e.g. library)<br />
and IT (e.g. the Internet, databases).<br />
METHODS OF TEACHING AND LEARNING:<br />
The formal timetabled component of the module comprises approximately thirty two lectures and<br />
twelve classes. The lecture programme, which is supported by detailed handouts, is used to<br />
introduce material to students, to direct them (through the use of recommended reading and web<br />
sites included in the handouts) to sources which will enable them, during the private study time they<br />
devote to the module (one hundred and sixteen hours), to increase their knowledge and<br />
understanding of that material, and to empower them to attempt the problems which are set for<br />
classes. Classes are closely integrated to the lecture programme and are designed to enable students<br />
to apply the material covered in that programme to solve problems and to discuss and evaluate those<br />
solutions and the theories underlying them. Students are supported throughout the module through<br />
private consultation with the module coordinator.<br />
Indicative study hours: 160<br />
ASSESSMENT:<br />
Examination Component: 100%<br />
One 1½ hour examination at the end of the autumn semester (30%<br />
weighting).<br />
One 3 hour examination at the end of the spring semester (70%<br />
weighting).<br />
Formal assessment is by means of one and one half hour examination at the end of the autumn<br />
semester and one three hour examination at the end of the spring semester.<br />
The examination papers are designed to enable students to demonstrate their intellectual skills of<br />
analysis, synthesis and evaluation. Both papers include questions of two types: first, problem<br />
questions requiring students to use the theoretical and technical material from the module to solve<br />
problems and to evaluate their solutions; second, essay questions designed to enable students to<br />
demonstrate their understanding of the theoretical and technical material covered on the module.<br />
Informal assessment is provided through the class problems (for which solutions are provided) which<br />
enable students to self assess the extent to which they are meeting the module learning outcomes.<br />
In addition the module coordinator is available throughout the module to answer queries and discuss<br />
progress with students.<br />
SYLLABUS CONTENT:<br />
The efficient markets hypothesis; option pricing, capital structure and the cost of capital; the lease or<br />
buy decision; dividend policy and corporate value. Working capital and treasury management,<br />
mergers and take-overs, company restructuring; financial failure; small company finance.<br />
INDICATIVE READING LIST:<br />
Arnold G. C., Corporate Financial Management, 4th Edition, FT Pitman 2008<br />
Brealey, R A, Myers, S C, Principles of Corporate Finance, 9 th Edition, McGraw-Hill, 2008<br />
Pike, R and Neale, B, Corporate Finance and Investment, 6 th Edition, FT Prentice Hall, 2009<br />
-93-
MODULE CATALOGUE MODULE DESCRIPTIONS<br />
BUSINESS HISTORY<br />
MODULE CODE: BS3548<br />
NUMBER OF CREDITS: 20<br />
SEMESTER: Autumn & Spring<br />
PROGRAMMES: BSc Econ Banking & Finance, BSc Econ <strong>Business</strong> Economics, BSc<br />
Econ Economics, BSc Econ Accounting & Economics, BSc Econ<br />
Economics & Management Studies, BSc Econ Economics & Politics,<br />
BA Economics with Humanities, BSc Economics with a European<br />
Language, BSc Econ Banking & Finance with a European Language,<br />
BSc Econ <strong>Business</strong> Economics with a European Language.<br />
AIMS OF THE MODULE:<br />
The aim of the module is to provide third year undergraduates with an understanding of the method,<br />
content and scope of <strong>Business</strong> History.<br />
LEARNING OUTCOMES OF THE MODULE<br />
On completion of the module a student should be able to<br />
A Knowledge and Understanding:<br />
• describe and analyse the main changes in the structure of the British economy over the past<br />
two centuries and the impact of such changes on business<br />
• describe and analyse changes in the relationship between business and the state in Britain<br />
since the mid-nineteenth century<br />
• describe and analyse the factors explaining the rise of the accounting profession in Britain<br />
since the end of the nineteenth century<br />
• describe and analyse the factors influencing the development of business size in Britain since<br />
the end of the nineteenth century<br />
• describe and understand the factors which have affected the development of organisational<br />
structures, management systems and decision-making in British business since the end of the<br />
nineteenth century<br />
• understand the nature of business, how it has changed over time and the forces that have<br />
led to such changes<br />
B Intellectual Skills:<br />
• demonstrate an ability to assimilate facts and use them as the basis of an intellectual<br />
argument<br />
• understand the difference between the theoretical (deductivist) approach of economic<br />
theorists and the empirical (inductivist) approach of historians<br />
C Discipline Specific Skills:<br />
• exhibit an understanding of<br />
o the nature and limitations of historical evidence<br />
o the meaning and usefulness of historical data<br />
D Transferable Skills:<br />
• demonstrate an ability to argue a case from different viewpoints<br />
METHODS OF TEACHING AND LEARNING:<br />
The formal timetabled components of the module comprise 34 hours of lectures and 10 hours of<br />
seminars. The lecture programme is supported by a module outline which details the structure of the<br />
module. Students receive a series of lecture handouts to accompany the lectures and a regular series<br />
of fortnightly seminars integrated with the lectures is held, which encourages students to utilise the<br />
knowledge gained, both from lectures and from their associated reading. The questions on the<br />
seminar worksheets test student understanding of key topics discussed in the lectures. Students are<br />
also encouraged to realise that there may not be definitive answers to historical questions and are<br />
encouraged to express their own views (backed up, of course, by appropriate evidence and, if<br />
appropriate, underlying theoretical models). The seminars encourage students to express their<br />
understanding of key facts and arguments, thereby developing their own historical and analytical<br />
-94-
MODULE DESCRIPTIONS MODULE CATALOGUE<br />
skills and thereby helping them attain the learning outcomes for this module. Students are supported<br />
throughout the module through the provision of fortnightly seminars and access to the lecturers<br />
through advertised weekly ‘office hours’ and student-lecturer e-mail contact.<br />
Indicative study hours: 160<br />
ASSESSMENT:<br />
Examination Component 70%<br />
One 3 hour examination at the end of the Spring Semester<br />
Continuous Assessment 30%<br />
Two assessed essays, one to be submitted in week 12 of the Autumn<br />
Semester and one to be submitted in week 10 of the Spring<br />
Semester.<br />
An assessed essay is set in each semester, based on certain of the material presented in that<br />
semester. The assessment tests the ability of students to understand the nature of some historical<br />
debate, and their ability to marshal historical evidence and logical arguments in support of the case<br />
that they have made.<br />
The Spring Semester examination is divided into two sections. The two sections each contain a range<br />
of questions relating to the material taught in the separate semesters. Students are required to show<br />
an understanding of material taught in the two semesters by answering two questions from each of<br />
the sections. Questions are set in a manner which requires students to show an ability to understand<br />
the key arguments/elements in answering the question and to support their answers with appropriate<br />
supporting historical material.<br />
Informal assessment is provided through seminar questions, which are designed to stimulate<br />
independent learning and to provide an ongoing mechanism for assessing the extent to which<br />
students are meeting the module’s learning outcomes. Seminars also encourage students to engage<br />
in historical debate and to develop their skills in expressing historical arguments. Students are<br />
encouraged throughout the module to consult those members of staff who conduct their seminars,<br />
the lecturers and the module leader, with any queries they may have about any aspects of the<br />
module.<br />
SYLLABUS CONTENT:<br />
The syllabus is divided into two main sections: (i) the macroeconomic aspects of business history<br />
(comprises one-half of the module teaching allocation): structural change of business sectors;<br />
development of research and development, marketing and advertising; the growth of professions;<br />
state-business relations; social business issues; (ii) the microeconomic aspects of business history<br />
(one-half of the module teaching allocation): growth of legal business forms; finance of business;<br />
growth in business size; different models of organisational structure; business goals and the historical<br />
development of methods to assist decision-making.<br />
INDICATIVE READING LIST:<br />
John F Wilson, British <strong>Business</strong> History, 1720 – 1994, Manchester University Press, 1995<br />
David J Jeremy, A <strong>Business</strong> History of Britain 1900 – 1990s, Oxford University Press, 1998<br />
Gordon Boyce and Simon Ville, The Development of Modern <strong>Business</strong>, Palgrave, 2002<br />
-95
MODULE CATALOGUE MODULE DESCRIPTIONS<br />
CORPORATE GOVERNANCE AND ACCOUNTABILITY<br />
MODULE CODE: BS3614<br />
NUMBER OF CREDITS: 10<br />
SEMESTER: Spring<br />
PROGRAMMES: BSc Accounting, BSc Accounting with a European Language, BSc<br />
Accounting & Finance<br />
AIMS OF THE MODULE:<br />
This module aims to introduce students to recent developments in the theory and practice of<br />
corporate governance, corporate accountability to stakeholders, corporate social responsibility,<br />
corporate social and environmental reporting and socially responsible investment.<br />
LEARNING OUTCOMES OF THE MODULE<br />
On completion of the module a student should be able to<br />
A Knowledge and Understanding:<br />
• describe the growing relevance of an ethical framework to accounting and finance;<br />
• describe the recent reforms in UK corporate governance and evaluate their impact on UK<br />
companies and the institutional investment community;<br />
• analyse the development of corporate social and environmental reporting and evaluate the<br />
growing importance of accountability in the UK;<br />
• explain the development of socially responsible investment in the UK and evaluate the impact<br />
of its recent growth on companies and institutional investors, focusing on the pension fund<br />
community;<br />
• critically evaluate the current state of corporate governance and accountability in an<br />
international context<br />
B Intellectual Skills:<br />
• assess the viability of an ethical framework in the context of UK accounting and finance;<br />
• evaluate the usefulness of the broad corporate governance reform agenda to UK companies<br />
and stakeholders;<br />
• assess international attempts to reform corporate governance in a comparative context.<br />
C Discipline Specific Skills:<br />
• acquire ability to compare and contrast corporate governance policy documents over time<br />
and between countries;<br />
• evaluate the findings of academic research relating to corporate governance and<br />
accountability in order to assess the impact of corporate governance reform on UK companies<br />
and stakeholders.<br />
D Transferable Skills:<br />
• acquire the ability to analyse, compare and contrast policy documents<br />
• acquire the ability to evaluate the findings of academic and professional research<br />
• acquire the ability to assess the impact of policy in the area of accounting and finance<br />
• acquire the ability to consider the views of a diverse group of interested parties in relation to<br />
a policy issue<br />
METHODS OF TEACHING AND LEARNING:<br />
Teaching takes place in the Spring semester. The formal timetabled components of the module<br />
comprise seventeen hours of lectures and five hours of classes. Lectures cover theoretical concepts<br />
and summaries of the most recent practice by companies and financial institutions. The findings of<br />
recent academic and professional research are discussed in relation to relevant theory and practice.<br />
Case study material is used and in order to broaden the students' understanding of corporate<br />
governance and accountability the lectures and classes blend theory and practice. Questions for class<br />
discussion are distributed in the first lecture. In the first class, the tutor will cover the required<br />
material and will split the students into four groups. For the following four classes, each group will<br />
prepare and present their answers to the week's questions. Following the presentation there will be<br />
an open discussion of the practical and policy implications of the topics covered. The content of<br />
-96-
MODULE DESCRIPTIONS MODULE CATALOGUE<br />
lectures and classes are moulded to the learning outcomes of the module so that students who<br />
successfully complete the module are able to demonstrate achievement of all of the required<br />
outcomes.<br />
Indicative study hours: 80<br />
ASSESSMENT:<br />
Examination Component 100%<br />
One 2 hour examination at the end of the Spring semester<br />
The examination is designed to allow students to demonstrate that they have achieved the learning<br />
outcomes established for this module as well as to test their skill development. The examination<br />
consists of six questions. They are all essay questions but some questions will be split into several<br />
parts. Every question will require students to evaluate the topic under consideration from both a<br />
theoretical and practical perspective. Students are required to demonstrate that they have acquired<br />
intellectual, communication, evaluative and subject-specific skills from taking this module.<br />
Informal assessment takes place through class sessions where students are required to prepare<br />
solutions to class questions, distributed at the beginning of the module. The assessment involves<br />
students demonstrating that they have attempted all questions either by presenting the material to<br />
the class or through the medium of class debate and discussion. Class questions focus principally on<br />
evaluation and analysis of academic papers as well as policy documents and case study material. All<br />
questions require students to demonstrate theoretical and practical competence as well as the ability<br />
to apply knowledge to discussions and case studies. Students are encouraged throughout the module<br />
to submit queries, essay plans and any problem they encounter to the module co-ordinator and/or<br />
tutors on the module for discussion.<br />
SYLLABUS CONTENT:<br />
Ethics in finance and accounting; defining corporate governance and competing theoretical<br />
paradigms; initiatives and codes of practice in the UK; internal control; the impact of corporate<br />
governance reform in the UK; the role of institutional investors; corporate governance and<br />
accountability; corporate social and environmental reporting; socially responsible investment;<br />
globalising corporate governance and convergence; empirical evidence on developments in<br />
international corporate governance.<br />
INDICATIVE READING LIST:<br />
Solomon, J F (2007) Corporate Governance and Accountability, John Wiley & Sons Inc<br />
Monks, R A G and N Minow (2001) Corporate Governance, 2 nd edn, Blackwell, Oxford<br />
-97
MODULE CATALOGUE MODULE DESCRIPTIONS<br />
DEVELOPMENT OF ACCOUNTING<br />
MODULE CODE: BS3503<br />
NUMBER OF CREDITS: 10<br />
SEMESTER: Autumn<br />
PROGRAMMES: BSc Accounting, BSc Accounting & Finance, BSc Accounting with a<br />
European Language<br />
AIMS OF THE MODULE<br />
This single module aims to provide students with an understanding of key aspects in the development<br />
of accounting practices, personnel and institutions. The module introduces students to major episodes<br />
in the development of the financial reporting practices used today and the continuously evolving<br />
nature of the discipline of accounting. The module therefore provides students with an awareness of<br />
the nature, potential and limitations of modern accounting based on a study of selected episodes in<br />
its historical development.<br />
LEARNING OUTCOMES OF THE MODULE<br />
On completion of the module a student should be able to<br />
A Knowledge and Understanding:<br />
• that accounting practices, theories and institutions have changed over the years in response<br />
to the priorities of different groups in society and to changing environmental conditions.<br />
• show that they understand the process of accounting change and why accounting practices,<br />
theories and institutions exist in their present form.<br />
B Intellectual Skills:<br />
• show they possess the capacity to identify and search for relevant information.<br />
• demonstrate the ability to evaluate and interpret written material.<br />
• gather information and construct a narrative around it.<br />
C Discipline Specific Skills:<br />
• identify and explain the nature, uses and limitations of the study of accounting history.<br />
• demonstrate an understanding of the success, or otherwise, of proposals put forward for<br />
reforming financial reporting practices to take account of changes in the value of money.<br />
• demonstrate understanding of the nature of different systems of record keeping and be able<br />
to evaluate views concerning their impact on economic development within a capitalist<br />
economy.<br />
• explain and analyse the differential effects of the market, regulatory bodies and<br />
environmental factors on the development of financial reporting practices.<br />
• display comprehension of the nature and purpose of the capital maintenance rule and its<br />
interrelationship with the calculation of distributable profit.<br />
• demonstrate through discussion and analysis of relevant case law and causes célèbre the<br />
significance of underlying conflict between the goals of preparers and users of accounting<br />
reports.<br />
• explain why and describe how the rate of accounting change varies in time and place to<br />
accommodate changing environmental and organisational circumstances.<br />
• account for the rise of the professional accountant as business manager and discriminate<br />
between the various routes through which (s)he has transferred skills from public practice to<br />
industry and commerce.<br />
D Transferable Skills:<br />
• show capacity for independent learning<br />
• demonstrate the development of communication skills and the ability to present quantitative<br />
and qualitative data<br />
• work in groups, and oral and written presentation skills<br />
-98-
MODULE DESCRIPTIONS MODULE CATALOGUE<br />
METHODS OF TEACHING AND LEARNING:<br />
The formal timetable components of this single module comprise 17 hours of lectures and 5 hours of<br />
classes. The development of accounting module is intended to stimulate students to think about the<br />
way in which the discipline of accounting has emerged and become transformed into its present<br />
state. Students are therefore provided with both basic and more demanding reading material for each<br />
topic so as to enable the development of the potential of students with inevitably different levels of<br />
ability. For classes, a distinctive learning environment is employed that involves the following:<br />
assignments are circulated at the start of the module; three ‘mini’ topics are identified for coverage at<br />
each class; each class is divided into three groups that are each allocated one of the three topics;<br />
identified reading material enables group members to prepare their topic prior to the class; the first<br />
ten minutes of the class is available for students to organise themselves into their groups, to choose a<br />
chairperson and to compare notes; each group then has approximately six minutes for its<br />
presentation which is made by the chairperson or, if they consider it appropriate, two or three<br />
members of the group; there follows a discussion. The purpose of this format is to help students<br />
develop a range of expertise that includes independent preparation of material, teamwork, and<br />
presentational skills. This approach I have developed proves to be an effective way of ‘breaking the<br />
ice’ and achieving fuller student participation in class activities. At the end of each module, students<br />
are supplied with ‘revision packs’ for self-testing during the exam preparation period. These contain,<br />
in the main, questions from past examinations together with suggested solution outlines.<br />
The course is based on research undertaken by the module tutor whose publications feature<br />
prominently in the recommended reading for the course, including the main text listed under<br />
‘indicative reading’.<br />
Indicative study hours: 80<br />
ASSESSMENT:<br />
Examination Component 100%<br />
One 2 hour examination at the end of the Autumn semester.<br />
The examination paper consists of six questions of which three are to be attempted. These are<br />
designed to cover the outcomes for the module and to test the development of knowledge over the<br />
module period. Questions set are designed to test students’ basic knowledge of accounting’s<br />
development and to be able to analyse the causes of accounting change, the possible implications of<br />
accounting change and to place their analyses within appropriate explanatory frameworks.<br />
SYLLABUS CONTENT:<br />
The nature and uses of accounting history. Record keeping systems and their economic significance.<br />
The development of asset valuation and profit measurement procedures. Management bias and the<br />
manipulation of accounting data. The regulation of company accounts. The influence of the market<br />
and pressure groups on financial reporting practice. Creditor protection: the capital maintenance rule,<br />
dividend cases and divisible profit. The increasing involvement of the professional accountant in<br />
business management.<br />
INDICATIVE READING LIST:<br />
Chatfield, M. (1977) A History of Accounting Thought, New York: Robert E. Krieger Publishing Co.,<br />
chapter 7.<br />
Edwards, J. R. (1989) A History of Financial Accounting, London: Routledge. [main text]<br />
Edwards, J. R. and Walker, S. P. (eds) (2008) Routledge Companion to Accounting History. London:<br />
Routledge<br />
Hopwood, A. G. (1987) ‘The archaeology of accounting systems’, Accounting, Organizations and<br />
Society, pp. 207-34.<br />
Matthews, D., Anderson, M., and Edwards, J. R. (1998) The Priesthood of Industry. The Rise of the<br />
Professional Accountant in British Management, Oxford: Oxford University Press, pp. 58-78.<br />
-99-
MODULE CATALOGUE MODULE DESCRIPTIONS<br />
ECONOMICS OF BANKING<br />
MODULE CODE: BS3571<br />
NUMBER OF CREDITS: 20<br />
SEMESTER: Autumn & Spring<br />
PROGRAMMES: BSc Econ Accounting & Economics, BSc Econ Accounting & Finance,<br />
BSc Econ Banking & Finance, BSc Econ Economics & Management<br />
Studies, BSc Econ Banking and Finance with a European Language.<br />
AIMS OF THE MODULE:<br />
This is a core module, which focuses on the role of banks and financial intermediaries in the<br />
economy.<br />
The aim of the module is to provide students with the economic, institutional and legal framework to<br />
understand the role and practice of financial intermediation in the global economy.<br />
LEARNING OUTCOMES OF THE MODULE<br />
On completion of the module a student should be able to<br />
A Knowledge and Understanding:<br />
• describe the process of liquidity creation and be aware of the major changes and trends in<br />
the UK and international banking sector in particular the implications of securitisation<br />
• describe the main risks relating to banking and be familiar with the main techniques of risk<br />
management<br />
• describe and interpret the UK and European regulatory framework relating to the banking<br />
system<br />
B Intellectual Skills:<br />
• evaluate the functions, performance and behaviour of banks and other financial<br />
intermediaries using basic microeconomic theory<br />
• use abstract reasoning with the aid of models to explain trends in banking<br />
• analyse implications of legislation for the workings of the banking system<br />
C Discipline Specific Skills:<br />
• analyse the workings of banks and other financial intermediaries and be conversant with the<br />
basic functions and structures of retail, wholesale and international banking<br />
• identify and differentiate between the various theories of the banking firm and theories of<br />
credit rationing and to interpret the trends in banking in relation to these theories<br />
• manipulate data and make simple calculations relating to Value-at-Risk and to interpret the<br />
results<br />
D Transferable Skills:<br />
• communication of argument and analysis by written and oral means<br />
• development of numerical and problem solving skills<br />
• development of teamworking and presentational skills<br />
METHODS OF TEACHING AND LEARNING:<br />
There will be approximately 36 hours of lectures and 8 hours of classes. Students will be required to<br />
prepare and present class exercises during the year. Within the class each student is assigned to a<br />
study group. Each student is assigned a specific exercise for the following class. In the case of<br />
absence, another member of the study group is expected to present the exercise. The exercises are<br />
designed to test the student’s comprehension of the lecture material and background reading by<br />
addressing both analytical and descriptive components of the course.<br />
Each study group is given a project that involves a 10-15000-word report and group and individual<br />
presentations at the end of the second semester. The project aims to develop written, oral and<br />
presentational skills within a team framework. The group project addresses a contemporary issue in<br />
-100-
MODULE DESCRIPTIONS MODULE CATALOGUE<br />
international banking (e.g. securitisation). The report will describe the mechanism and current trends,<br />
apply economic reasoning to explain the trends, provide an assessment of future developments, and<br />
discuss the wider implications. The subject matter is covered in the lectures and references are<br />
provided but given the topical nature of the subject students are expected to supplement the<br />
readings with material from their own research. The research and writing of the project give students<br />
practice in developing their skills in literature search including non-standard sources such as WWW,<br />
selecting relevant information, writing a report to a professional standard, organising data and<br />
working within a team framework.<br />
Indicative study hours: 160<br />
ASSESSMENT:<br />
Examination Component 60%<br />
One 3 hour examination at the end of the Spring Semester<br />
Continuous Assessment 40%<br />
One Group project to be presented in week 10 of the Spring<br />
Semester<br />
The hard-copy of the project is to be handed in at the time of the<br />
presentation.<br />
The joint written project counts for 15%. Individual presentation and individual written contribution<br />
counts for 7.5% each. The formal exam counts for 60%.<br />
The exam contains two sections and students are given 3 hours to complete the paper.<br />
The first section contains short answer questions testing knowledge and comprehension. Students<br />
have to attempt four questions from the first section. The second section requires students to answer<br />
2 essay type questions from a choice of 8. This part of the assessment tests the student’s knowledge<br />
and analytical skills.<br />
SYLLABUS CONTENT:<br />
Financial Intermediation and the Financial System, Banking Structures of Industrialised countries,<br />
Retail, Wholesale and International Banking, Models of the Banking Firm, Theories of Credit<br />
Rationing, Euromarkets and Eurocurrency banking, Securitisation, Theory of Regulation, Deregulation<br />
and Free Banking, Bank Efficiency and Structure Conduct Performance, Regulation of Banks, Risk<br />
Management in Banking, Economics of Central Banking.<br />
INDICATIVE READING LIST:<br />
Matthews, K & Thompson, J – The Economics of Banking, July 2005, John Wiley & Sons<br />
-101
MODULE CATALOGUE MODULE DESCRIPTIONS<br />
ECONOMETRICS<br />
MODULE CODE: BS3551<br />
NUMBER OF CREDITS: 20<br />
SEMESTER: Autumn & Spring<br />
PROGRAMMES: BSc Econ Accounting and Economics, BSc Econ Banking and Finance,<br />
BSc Econ <strong>Business</strong> Economics, BSc Econ Economics, BSc Econ<br />
Economics with a European Language, BSc Econ Economics and<br />
Finance, BSc Econ Economics and Management Studies, BSc Econ<br />
Economics & Politics, BSc Econ <strong>Business</strong> Economics with a European<br />
Language, BSc Econ Banking & Finance with a European Language.<br />
AIMS OF THE MODULE:<br />
This double module provides students pursuing the Economics and related schemes with the core<br />
techniques used in the analysis of both cross section and time series economic data. Study of the<br />
theory is reinforced with instruction in and use of modern econometric software.<br />
The aims of this module are firstly to enable students to acquire competence in the use of economic<br />
data for the analysis of issues and questions in economics and secondly to develop an awareness of<br />
the limitations of such uses.<br />
LEARNING OUTCOMES OF THE MODULE<br />
On completion of the module a student should be able to<br />
A Knowledge and Understanding:<br />
• explain and critically appraise the relevance to economic data of all the terms and concepts<br />
associated with the Classical Regression Model.<br />
• know how to select an appropriate functional form to represent an economic relationship.<br />
• explain and contrast principles of parameter estimation based on fit with those based on<br />
likelihood.<br />
• explain, compute and interpret statistical tests of composite hypotheses, omitted and<br />
irrelevant variables and of model stability.<br />
• describe how economic variables with limited values may be incorporated into regression<br />
models.<br />
• define the nature of and apply procedures for dealing with commonly occurring residual error<br />
structures.<br />
• explain the identification problem and apply procedures for the estimation of parameters in<br />
simultaneous equation models.<br />
• explain and contrast causal and ARIMA lag representations of mid-frequency time series data.<br />
• explain and apply valid procedures for the application of regression methods to time series<br />
data.<br />
B Intellectual Skills:<br />
• synthesise and evaluate the technical concepts of the syllabus<br />
• appraise theory and its relevance to different situations<br />
• plan, design and investigate a computer simulation<br />
• critically compare the results of data analysis with model expectations<br />
C Discipline Specific Skills:<br />
• compute and interpret estimates and inferential statistics associated with the two- and three-<br />
variable Classical Regression Model.<br />
• use Econometric software (Eviews) interactively to analyse supplied datasets in support of the<br />
learning outcomes identified above.<br />
• work together to program econometric software (Eviews) to carry out a Monte Carlo study of<br />
an econometric estimator.<br />
D Transferable Skills:<br />
-102-
MODULE DESCRIPTIONS MODULE CATALOGUE<br />
• working with others to develop a computer based investigation<br />
• prepare reports integrating textual and numerical material<br />
• develop personal management skills associated with working to a deadline<br />
• finding data using both traditional and ‘web’ sources<br />
METHODS OF TEACHING AND LEARNING:<br />
Teaching takes place in both the first and second semesters. In each semester there are 11 weekly<br />
50-minute lectures and 11 weekly 50-minute computer lab sessions. The lectures cover the<br />
methodology and techniques aspects of the syllabus whilst the lab sessions provide opportunities for<br />
application, discussion and reinforcement of the lecture material as well as giving experience using a<br />
‘state of the art’ econometrics computer package.<br />
Lectures are supported with detailed handouts, OHP slides and computer demonstrations where<br />
appropriate. Use of the dedicated software offers an appreciation of the advantages and<br />
disadvantages of interactive and programming interfaces for econometric research. The lab sessions<br />
are supported by offering each student networked access to the specialist econometric software,<br />
spreadsheet software for data management, word-processing software for report writing, E-mail for<br />
virtual learning environment and the Internet for data sources.<br />
Indicative study hours: 160<br />
ASSESSMENT:<br />
Examination Component 70%<br />
One 3 hour examination in the Spring Semester<br />
Continuous Assessment 30%<br />
Two projects to be submitted in week 12 of the Autumn Semester<br />
and in week 8 of the Spring Semester<br />
The examination paper is made up of two sections. In the first, a single compulsory question<br />
requires the student to write briefly demonstrating their understanding of the meaning and<br />
importance of three out of four nominated technical terms at the root of the econometrics syllabus.<br />
The second section requires the student to select three questions from those offered to show a<br />
deeper understanding of and ability to apply the topics covered in the module.<br />
The continuously assessed component comprises two projects each contributing 15% of the<br />
assessment. These projects offer the student a limited choice of topic and require analysis of a<br />
mixture of prescribed and self researched data. The first project, undertaken in the autumn<br />
semester, is a Monte Carlo analysis of an econometric estimator or test statistics. Students work in<br />
small groups to develop the necessary algorithm but then write up individually the results from their<br />
own application. The second project, undertaken in the spring semester comprises a forecasting<br />
exercise in which three competing forecasting methods are assessed for their perceived success in a<br />
chosen context.<br />
SYLLABUS CONTENT:<br />
(Sem1) The methodology of econometrics and basic matrix algebra form. Three methods to tackle<br />
the linear regression model: least squares, method of moments, maximum likelihood. Large<br />
sample statistical theory. Monte Carlo methods. Robust variance estimation. Omitted<br />
variable bias and proxy variable. Instrumental variable estimation and generalized method of<br />
moments.<br />
(Sem2) Linear probability models and limited dependent variable models. Simultaneous equations<br />
models. Stationary and trend stationary time series models. Analysis of nonstationary time<br />
series and unit root processes.<br />
-103-
MODULE CATALOGUE MODULE DESCRIPTIONS<br />
INDICATIVE READING LIST:<br />
J.M. Wooldridge “Introductory Econometrics: A Modern Approach” (4 th Edition) South Western,<br />
Cengage Learning, 2009<br />
J.H. Stock and M.W. Watson “Introduction to Econometrics” Pearson Addison Wesley, 2003<br />
R. Carter Hill et. al. “Principles of Econometrics” (3 rd Edition) Wiley, 2008<br />
G. S. Maddala, “Introduction to Econometrics” (3 rd edition) Wiley, 2001<br />
R. S. Pindyck & D. L. Rubinfeld “Econometric Models and Economics Forecasts” (4 th edition) McGraw-<br />
Hill, 1998<br />
-104-
MODULE DESCRIPTIONS MODULE CATALOGUE<br />
Please note that this module will not run in the 2011-12 session<br />
EMPIRICAL FINANCE AND ACCOUNTING LITERATURE<br />
MODULE CODE: BS3516<br />
NUMBER OF CREDITS: 10<br />
SEMESTER: Autumn<br />
PROGRAMMES: BSc Accounting & Finance<br />
AIMS OF THE MODULE:<br />
The module aims to facilitate students' ability to interpret the results of statistical and econometric<br />
analyses in the empirical finance and accounting literature.<br />
LEARNING OUTCOMES OF THE MODULE<br />
On completion of the module a student should be able to<br />
A Knowledge and Understanding of:<br />
• statistical properties of financial returns<br />
• random walk and empirical tests of the Efficient Market Hypothesis<br />
• tests of asset pricing models<br />
• recent developments in empirical finance<br />
• multivariate regression and qualitative methods in accounting research<br />
• econometric and statistical techniques applied in the finance and accounting literature<br />
B Intellectual Skills:<br />
• critically evaluate the statistical and econometric techniques used in empirical finance and<br />
accounting<br />
• interpret empirical results and draw inferences based on this information<br />
• synthesise and evaluate primary and secondary data<br />
• develop problem solving skills, including the ability to manipulate financial data<br />
• sustain a logical structure and critical argument in writing<br />
• exercise powers of inquiry, logic, and critical analysis and interpretation and evaluation of<br />
argument and evidence<br />
C Discipline Specific Skills:<br />
• identify the aims, importance, contribution and limitations of empirical finance and accounting<br />
academic papers<br />
• evaluate the important academic papers in the empirical finance and accounting literature<br />
with particular emphasis on the interpretation, meaning and importance of the empirical<br />
results<br />
• show a knowledge and understanding of econometric and statistical techniques applied in the<br />
finance and accounting literature<br />
• describe the application of time series and cross sectional data in academic research with the<br />
use of appropriate examples<br />
• explain appropriate techniques to test the distributional properties of financial returns<br />
• demonstrate the application and interpretation of regression techniques in finance and<br />
accounting<br />
• test and interpret the time series properties of financial and accounting data<br />
• show a knowledge, understanding and interpretation of non-linear and other regression<br />
techniques used in finance and accounting<br />
D Transferable Skills:<br />
• communicate ideas, concepts, principles and theories effectively through oral and written<br />
means<br />
• develop reference skills and conduct independent research using both traditional library<br />
based resources and internet based resources<br />
• exercise initiative, self-motivation and time management skills and work independently<br />
-105-
MODULE CATALOGUE MODULE DESCRIPTIONS<br />
METHODS OF TEACHING AND LEARNING:<br />
Teaching will consist of approximately 18 hours of lectures and 5 hours of classes. The lectures will<br />
outline a selection of econometric and statistical techniques and illustrate the use of these techniques<br />
through exemplary research from the finance and accounting literature. Discussion will focus on<br />
interpretation of findings from the application of these techniques as well as evaluation of their<br />
usefulness to finance and accounting.<br />
Indicative study hours: 80<br />
ASSESSMENT:<br />
Formal - one 2 hour examination at the end of the Autumn semester (100%).<br />
The examination is designed to allow students to demonstrate that they have achieved the learning<br />
outcomes established for this module as well as to test their skill development. The examination will<br />
comprise a number of essay questions which require students to demonstrate their ability to interpret<br />
the results of econometric and statistical material as presented in finance and accounting academic<br />
papers. Students are required to demonstrate that they have acquired intellectual, communication,<br />
evaluative and subject-specific skills from taking this module.<br />
Informal assessment takes place through tutorial sessions where students are required to prepare<br />
solutions to tutorial questions. The assessment involves students demonstrating that they have<br />
attempted all questions either by presenting the material to the class or through the medium of class<br />
debate and discussion. Tutorial questions focus principally on interpretation of statistical and<br />
econometric material as presented in finance papers. All questions require students to demonstrate<br />
theoretical and critical competence as well as the ability to apply knowledge to discussions and<br />
illustrations from the literature. Students are encouraged throughout the module to submit queries.<br />
SYLLABUS CONTENT:<br />
Illustrations and interpretation of the following econometric and statistical analyses applied in the<br />
finance and accounting literature: Normality tests; event study methodology; run tests; correlation;<br />
autocorrelation; univariate regression analysis; multivariate regression analysis; regression with<br />
dummy variables; non-linear regression analysis; factor analysis; time series analysis.<br />
INDICATIVE READING LIST:<br />
Introductory Econometrics for Finance, C. Brooks, Cambridge University Press, 2002.<br />
Analysis of Economic Data, G. Koop, Wiley, 2004.<br />
Essentials of Econometrics, D. Gujarati, McGraw Hill, 2005.<br />
An Introduction to Econometrics, G. S. Maddala, Wiley, 2001.<br />
The Econometrics of Financial Markets, J.Y. Campbell, A.W. Lo and A.C. McKinley,<br />
Princeton University Press, 1997.<br />
Modern Portfolio Theory and Investment Analysis, E. J. Elton, M. J. Gruber, S. J. Brown, and W. N.<br />
Goetzman, John Wiley & Sons, 2003.<br />
Reference will also be made to relevant articles from journals such as: Journal of Finance, Journal of<br />
Financial Economics, Journal of Financial and Quantitative Analysis, Financial Analysts Journal, Journal<br />
of Accounting and Economics and Journal of Accounting Research.<br />
-106-
MODULE DESCRIPTIONS MODULE CATALOGUE<br />
ENTREPRENEURSHIP AND SMALL BUSINESS<br />
DEVELOPMENT<br />
MODULE CODE: BS3727<br />
NUMBER OF CREDITS: 20<br />
SEMESTER: Autumn & Spring<br />
PROGRAMMES: BSc <strong>Business</strong> Management, <strong>Business</strong> Management (Human<br />
Resources), BSc <strong>Business</strong> Management (International Management),<br />
BSc <strong>Business</strong> Management (Logistics & Operations), BSc <strong>Business</strong><br />
Management (Marketing), BSc <strong>Business</strong> Management with a<br />
European Language, BSc Econ <strong>Business</strong> Economics, BSc Econ<br />
Economics and Management Studies.<br />
AIMS OF THE MODULE:<br />
The module is designed to introduce students to the process and challenges of successful<br />
entrepreneurship. In the first semester the module introduces theory and practice in small business<br />
management as well as the growing field of entrepreneurship. In the second semester the students<br />
will be introduced to the practical challenges of starting a new business venture and will be required<br />
to develop a new start-up idea that includes delivering a detailed report and formal presentation.<br />
LEARNING OUTCOMES OF THE MODULE<br />
On completion of the module a student should be able to<br />
A. Knowledge and Understanding<br />
• Display knowledge and understanding of theories of entrepreneurship and small business<br />
development developed in economics and other social science fields<br />
• Display knowledge and understanding of the primary functions of small business activity<br />
B. Intellectual Skills:<br />
• Display a capacity to critically assess and apply theories of small business to empirical cases<br />
• Display research, analytical and deliberative skills appropriate to a critical understanding of<br />
the academic field of small business development<br />
C. Discipline Specific Skills:<br />
• Display and apply in business simulation and other exercises the management and other<br />
relevant skills that are required in analysing small business activity and supporting small<br />
business decision-making.<br />
D Transferable Skills:<br />
• Display the ability to present business data and theoretical argument in a group format and in<br />
reports and other forms of extended prose.<br />
• Display research and analytical skills appropriate to managing in a small business context.<br />
METHODS OF TEACHING AND LEARNING:<br />
Teaching is conducted over two semesters. In the first semester, material is delivered through 16<br />
hours of lectures and 8 hours of tutorials. Theoretical concepts are introduced in the lectures and<br />
empirical evidence relating to small businesses and entrepreneurship is discussed. Tutorial classes<br />
provide students with the opportunity of asking questions and discussing theoretical and practical<br />
issues relating to the lecture material. In the second semester, the delivery of course material moves<br />
toward a focus on group activities. While the contact time is approximately the same, as in the first<br />
semester, students will be required to work in their business groups to develop their start-up ideas<br />
and presentation skills. The group work involves students working in groups of five or more,<br />
presenting their ideas to their peer group and assessing the practical implications and relevance of<br />
these ideas in the context of the small business environment. Students are required to submit a<br />
written plan and present their business ideas in a formal setting.<br />
Indicative study hours: 160<br />
-107-
MODULE CATALOGUE MODULE DESCRIPTIONS<br />
ASSESSMENT:<br />
Examination Component 60%<br />
One 2 hour examination at the end of the Autumn semester<br />
Continuous Assessment 40%<br />
A small group exercise involving a business start-up simulation,<br />
including an oral and written presentation of a business plan (3000<br />
words) to be submitted in week 9 of the Spring Semester<br />
Assessment comprises two elements: a two hour examination and a group assignment. The<br />
assignment focuses on a business start-up and requires students to work through a business<br />
simulation exercise. The focus is on developing applied business skills and team working and groups<br />
of students present their business plan in a formal examination setting and in written form. The<br />
examination at the end of the Autumn Semester provides an assessment of the material taught in<br />
Semester One.<br />
SYLLABUS CONTENT:<br />
A social science perspective of entrepreneurship; understanding entrepreneurial success; financing<br />
small business; financial management of small business; marketing in the small firm; the role of<br />
government and the regulation of small business development.<br />
INDICATIVE READING LIST:<br />
S. Carter and D. Jones-Evans (2000) Enterprise and Small <strong>Business</strong>: Principles, Practice and Policy,<br />
Financial Times/Prentice Hall<br />
M. Coulter (2001) Entrepreneurship in Action, Prentice Hall<br />
-108-
MODULE DESCRIPTIONS MODULE CATALOGUE<br />
ETHICS AND MORALITY OF BUSINESS<br />
MODULE CODE: BS3728<br />
NUMBER OF CREDITS: 20<br />
SEMESTER: Autumn & Spring<br />
PROGRAMMES: BSc Econ Accounting & Management, BSc Econ Banking and Finance,<br />
BSc <strong>Business</strong> Management, BSc <strong>Business</strong> Management (Human<br />
Resources), BSc <strong>Business</strong> Management (International Management),<br />
BSc <strong>Business</strong> Management (Logistics and Operations), BSc <strong>Business</strong><br />
Management (Marketing), BSc <strong>Business</strong> Management with a<br />
European Language, BSc Econ <strong>Business</strong> Economics, BSc <strong>Business</strong><br />
Studies with Japanese, BSc Econ Economics & Management Studies,<br />
BSc <strong>Business</strong> Management and Finance.<br />
AIMS OF THE MODULE:<br />
The module will examine ethical issues and dilemmas in business covering such key, controversial<br />
subjects as child labour, and ethical consumption. The main concepts and moral philosophical<br />
theories that have been used to understand and explain business ethics will be introduced. In this<br />
way it is intended that students will be able to gain an understanding of why ethical problems arise,<br />
what their significance might be, and how they might be attended to. Ultimately, the aim of the<br />
module is to enable students to reflect upon ethical questions with a view to enhancing their<br />
analytical and decision-making skills.<br />
LEARNING OUTCOMES OF THE MODULE<br />
On completion of the module a student should be able to<br />
Question the role of business in society, and explain how and why this role might change or be<br />
managed.<br />
Evaluate the responsibilities of, and relationships between, companies and their external and internal<br />
stakeholders.<br />
Conduct critical evaluation of the ethical rights and wrongs of a variety of business issues drawing on<br />
relevant moral philosophical theories.<br />
A. Knowledge and Understanding<br />
• Identify and critically analyse common ethical issues arising in business.<br />
• Develop a basic understanding of the moral philosophical theories which may be relevant to<br />
such critical analysis.<br />
• Diagnose ethical problems and suggest how they might be resolved or dealt with.<br />
B. Intellectual Skills:<br />
• Demonstrate the ability to analyse and debate ethical problems in business, and to develop,<br />
present and defend potential solutions.<br />
C. Discipline Specific Skills:<br />
• Skills of critical evaluation, the research process and the application of academic theory to<br />
professional practice<br />
D Transferable Skills:<br />
• Develop the ability to think critically and originally<br />
• An awareness of moral philosophy in business situations<br />
METHODS OF TEACHING AND LEARNING:<br />
A mixture of lectures, case studies, exercises, guest speakers, audio-visual materials and interactive<br />
podcasts. A strong emphasis is to be placed on student participation in class. There will be<br />
approximately 44 hours of classes, which will consist of a combination of formal lectures and tutorial<br />
sessions.<br />
Indicative study hours: 160<br />
ASSESSMENT:<br />
-109-
MODULE CATALOGUE MODULE DESCRIPTIONS<br />
Examination Component 60%<br />
One 3 hour examination at the end of the Spring Semester<br />
Continuous Assessment 40%<br />
One individual assignment of 2500 words to be submitted in week 12<br />
of the Autumn Semester.<br />
The exam will consist of two sections – A and B. The questions in section A are based on topics<br />
covered in the first semester that were not used for the assignment questions. Section B will include<br />
questions based on all the topics covered in the second semester. Students taking the exam will be<br />
required to complete ONE essay question from Section A and TWO essay questions from Section B.<br />
They will have three hours to complete these essays.<br />
SYLLABUS CONTENT:<br />
The module is structured around four themes. (1) <strong>Business</strong> Ethics in Philosophical Context: The first<br />
part of the module looks at business ethics in context, introducing key philosophical ideas and<br />
concepts. (2) Corporate Social Responsibility and Ethics: The second part of the module explores the<br />
rise of the corporation and how this reshaped the ethical and social priorities of corporations.<br />
Consideration is given to CSR or corporate social responsibility. (3) Deviant Ethics of Globalisation:<br />
This section will cover emerging issues faced by global businesses today, such as child labour, mobile<br />
capital, glocalisation and the anti-capitalist movement. (4) Contemporary Issues in <strong>Business</strong> Ethics:<br />
this section will focus on areas such as ethical investment, ethical consumerism, the fair trade<br />
phenomenon, shareholder activism, and the unethical behaviour of corporations.<br />
INDICATIVE READING LIST:<br />
Crane A. and Matten, D. (2004), <strong>Business</strong> Ethics (Oxford University Press)<br />
Fisher, C. and Lovell, A. (2006), <strong>Business</strong> Ethics and Values (Prentice Hall)<br />
Boatright, J. R. (2006), Ethics and the Conduct of <strong>Business</strong>, 5 th ed. (Prentice Hall)<br />
-110-
MODULE DESCRIPTIONS MODULE CATALOGUE<br />
EXPLORATORY DATA ANALYSIS<br />
MODULE CODE: BS3519<br />
NUMBER OF CREDITS: 10<br />
SEMESTER: Autumn<br />
PROGRAMMES: BSc <strong>Business</strong> Management, BSc <strong>Business</strong> Management (Human<br />
Resources), BSc <strong>Business</strong> Management (International Management),<br />
BSc <strong>Business</strong> Management (Logistics and Operations), BSc <strong>Business</strong><br />
Management (Marketing), BSc <strong>Business</strong> Management with a<br />
European Language, BSc Accounting & Finance<br />
AIMS OF THE MODULE:<br />
Exploratory Data Analysis (EDA) is a framework for analyzing data to seek hypotheses worthy of<br />
testing. It complements the tools of conventional statistics for testing hypotheses.<br />
The existence of vast quantities of data of all types, and our capacity to create even more, pose a<br />
severe challenge to managers, accountants and statisticians alike. Hence there is a need for data<br />
reduction or data mining methods which will cope with high dimensional data, large numbers of cases<br />
and/or a variety of data types. Data now occurs in many forms – text, images (static and moving),<br />
sound, numbers, etc. and conventional methods may not cope very well with these more unusual<br />
forms of data. This module is designed to give students experience in both new and established<br />
techniques for EDA.<br />
LEARNING OUTCOMES OF THE MODULE<br />
On completion of the module a student should be able to<br />
A Knowledge and Understanding:<br />
• Understand the scope and challenges of the modern data environment and newer methods of<br />
data exploration, acquisition and creation.<br />
• Develop an understanding of a range of analysis tools for data which may have qualitative or<br />
quantitative variables or a mixture of both.<br />
B Intellectual Skills:<br />
• Discuss the need for new techniques to cope with data sets which are extensive in terms of<br />
number of cases and/or variables.<br />
• Use these analysis tools to develop and test hypotheses about the data and the data<br />
generating process<br />
• Critically evaluate the suitability of a given technique to a particular analytical situation<br />
C Discipline Specific (including practical) Skills:<br />
• Use a variety of software tools and appreciate the criteria for their use in a varied selection of<br />
data analysis situations<br />
D Transferable Skills:<br />
• Acquire the ability to use a variety of standard software packages<br />
• Practise analytical problem solving skills through data analysis<br />
• Develop reporting skills through maintaining an electronic journal<br />
METHODS OF TEACHING AND LEARNING:<br />
The teaching will be based around a series of guided workshop and tutorial activities interspersed<br />
with inputs in the form of lectures on core topics. The pattern will be set around 11 lectures and 5<br />
fortnightly workshops interleaved with 5 software tutorial sessions based around, for example, casestudies<br />
including the use of software such as Minitab and Excel together with Open Source software<br />
packages such as R, GGobi, Gauguin and Mondrian. Each student will keep a data analysis journal<br />
completed in the IT lab sessions, some of which will be submitted in electronic form as part of their<br />
module assessment.<br />
-111-
MODULE CATALOGUE MODULE DESCRIPTIONS<br />
An invited lecturer will also provide some input on industrial practice in this area.<br />
Indicative study hours - 80<br />
ASSESSMENT:<br />
Examination Component 70%<br />
One 2 hour examination in the Autumn Semester.<br />
Continuous Assessment 30%<br />
One Data Analysis Assignment<br />
There will be an examination which will include examples of software output of the type used by<br />
students in the tutorial sessions.<br />
The production of a dataset analysis journal by individual students will concentrate on the material<br />
and datasets that they cover in the computer laboratory sessions. This will evidence their progress<br />
and include analysis of data unique to the individual student.<br />
SYLLABUS CONTENT:<br />
Theoretical Content<br />
1. Introduction – types of data and the information content of data – levels of measurement<br />
The concept of Knowledge Discovery – Data Mining and Exploratory Data Analysis (EDA)<br />
2. The concept of perspective – viewpoint, foreground/background and data and dimensional<br />
reduction<br />
The histogram and allied plots as prototypical data analysis tools for univariate data<br />
3. Extensions to 2 and 3 dimensions<br />
Simple visualization tools – scatter plots, matrix scatter plots, brushing, and 3-D scatter plot<br />
Coping with nominal, ordinal and mixed data<br />
4. High dimensional data<br />
Plotting methods for ‘high-D’ data<br />
Outliers, clusters, nonlinearity and distance measures<br />
Perspective and data reduction revisited - Projection methods<br />
5. Cluster analysis<br />
6. Analysis of textual and nominal data. Mosaic plots<br />
7. Regression and time series methods – examination of residuals for model refinement<br />
8. Acquiring and verifying large data sets and the missing data problem<br />
9. Commonly-used multivariate methods - including Multidimensional Scaling (MDS) - from a<br />
software user’s perspective and including a discussion of the scope and pitfalls of such methods<br />
10. Validating models<br />
Practical and Software Content<br />
1. Input and creation of data through such media as the WWW, Data Reformatting, Table and Data<br />
handling aspects of spreadsheet, word processor and database programs<br />
2. Univariate and Bivariate analyses using simple charting techniques on a standard dataset and<br />
testing the results<br />
3. Examining data through data visualization methods implemented in Ggobi – exploring a variety of<br />
plotting methods including matrix scatter plots, parallel coordinate plots and the use of brushing<br />
to link plots and highlight clusters and outliers<br />
4. Using cluster analysis techniques on a standard dataset with statistical validation (using external<br />
variables, etc.)<br />
5. Analysis of textual and qualitative data using such software as Mondrian and R<br />
6. Use of a variety of multivariate software tools such as Minitab and Excel and Open Source<br />
software applications and environments such as R, GGobi, Gaugion and Mondrian<br />
7. Exposition of some standard data sets.<br />
-112-
MODULE DESCRIPTIONS MODULE CATALOGUE<br />
INDICATIVE READING LIST:<br />
Selected Sections from:<br />
John W. Tukey, (1977) ‘Exploratory Data Analysis’ Addison-Wesley<br />
Brian S. Everitt, Sabine Landau, and Morven Leese (2001) ‘Cluster Analysis’, Hodder Arnold<br />
Usama M. Fayyad, Georges G. Grinstein and Andreas Wierse, (2001) ‘Information Visualization in<br />
Data Mining and Knowledge Discovery’, Morgan Kaufmann<br />
William G. Jacoby (1998) ‘Statistical Graphics for Visualizing Multivariate Data’, Sage Publications<br />
Unwin, A., Theus, M. and Hoffman, H. (2006) ‘The Graphics of Large Data Sets: Visualizing a Million’,<br />
Springer-Verlag, NY ( http://stats.math.uni-augsburg.de/GOLD/ )<br />
http://www.ggobi.org/ A powerful Open Source software tool for Data Visualization<br />
-113-
MODULE CATALOGUE MODULE DESCRIPTIONS<br />
Please note that this module will not run in the 2011-12 session<br />
FINANCE INVESTIGATION<br />
MODULE CODE: BS3616<br />
NUMBER OF CREDITS: 10<br />
SEMESTER: Spring<br />
PROGRAMMES: BSc Accounting and Finance<br />
AIMS OF THE MODULE:<br />
This module aims to enable students to integrate the areas of IT and finance in individual<br />
assignments based on independent learning.<br />
LEARNING OUTCOMES OF THE MODULE<br />
On completion of the module a student should be able to<br />
A Knowledge and Understanding:<br />
• demonstrate an in-depth understanding of their chosen area of research<br />
• demonstrate an understanding of the theoretical and practical aspects of the finance research<br />
process<br />
• demonstrate an understanding of the alternative methodological approaches to finance<br />
research and show an awareness of the limitations of various finance research methods<br />
B Intellectual Skills:<br />
• identify, evaluate and draw upon relevant finance theory and research for the topic of<br />
investigation chosen<br />
• test hypotheses and/or solve problems, including the ability to collect, manipulate and<br />
interpret financial and other numerical data<br />
• exercise powers of inquiry, logic, and critical analysis in the interpretation and evaluation of<br />
arguments and evidence<br />
• sustain a critical argument in writing<br />
C Discipline Specific Skills:<br />
• the capacity to identify a finance research topic and search for relevant information to<br />
investigate this topic<br />
• apply theoretical and/or empirical analysis to the topic chosen<br />
• select and apply appropriate software to investigate a finance topic<br />
D Transferable Skills:<br />
• undertake independent research<br />
• communicate ideas, principles and theories effectively by oral and written means<br />
• exercise initiative, self reliance and time management skills and work independently<br />
• appreciate alternative viewpoints<br />
• exercise numeracy, problem solving and IT skills<br />
• access and utilise information in a variety of research resources, both traditional (e.g. library)<br />
and IT (e.g. the Internet and electronic journals).<br />
METHODS OF TEACHING AND LEARNING:<br />
The module comprises 4 hours of lectures and approximately 15 hours of student/supervisor contact.<br />
The remainder of the time is taken up by students working independently, which constitutes the core<br />
method of learning. The lectures are conducted at the beginning of the semester, and introduce<br />
students to the structure of the module. The lectures therefore include a discussion of finance<br />
research methods available, and also provide examples of suitable finance topics. The lectures are<br />
supported by handouts and published articles as exemplars of empirical and theoretical analysis.<br />
Following the lectures, students are required to select a topic, in consultation with the module coordinator.<br />
After the topic is selected, students work independently to research the topic. During this<br />
-114-
MODULE DESCRIPTIONS MODULE CATALOGUE<br />
period, the module co-ordinator is available at designated periods each week for support and advice<br />
on the accounting investigation. Furthermore, students are encouraged to utilise IT to correspond<br />
with the module co-ordinator to make enquiries relating to their investigation. Correspondence<br />
between students and supervisor is thus ongoing throughout the investigation to ensure that any<br />
problems in the investigation are resolved promptly and effectively.<br />
Indicative study hours: 80<br />
ASSESSMENT:<br />
Continuous Assessment: 100%<br />
One 500 word report to be submitted in week 4 of the Spring<br />
Semester<br />
One 4500 word report to be submitted in week 10 of the Spring<br />
Semester<br />
Formal assessment of this module is of a continuous nature, and comprises two elements. The first is<br />
a 500 word report which outlines the aims and objectives of the investigation, describes the methods<br />
to be employed in the investigation, and outlines any data to be collected. This preliminary report<br />
represents 25% of the total assessment and is designed to ensure that students devote the necessary<br />
attention to the selection of a suitable topic for investigation. This also allows students to identify<br />
and evaluate relevant prior research on the topic they have chosen, and to give due consideration to<br />
the application of suitable technology to the topic.<br />
The second and more substantive component of the formal assessment is the preparation of a 4500<br />
word report which describes the investigation and discusses the findings of the investigation in light<br />
of prior research. In conducting the investigation and preparing the report, students must<br />
demonstrate proficiency with suitable IT software. This may be demonstrated through the<br />
application of IT to collect and/or analyse empirical data, or through a theoretical and/or analytical<br />
modelling of a finance topic. Students must also demonstrate an understanding of the finance issue<br />
under investigation.<br />
SYLLABUS CONTENT:<br />
Students are required to investigate and prepare a report on a topic which has been selected in<br />
conjunction with the module co-ordinator. The topic must involve the application of IT to investigate<br />
a finance issue. The module co-ordinator provides study guidance according to the topic chosen.<br />
INDICATIVE READING LIST:<br />
Brealey, R. and Myers, S. (2003) Principles of Corporate Finance, 7 th ed. New York: McGraw-Hill.<br />
Coakes, S., (2005) SPSS: Analysis Without Anguish: Using SPSS V12, Wiley<br />
Hussey, R. and Hussey, J. (1997) <strong>Business</strong> Research Macmillan.<br />
Megginson, W., (1997) Corporate Finance Theory, Addison Wesley<br />
Pallant, J. (2007) SPSS Survival Manual: Step-by-Step Guide to Data Analysis Using SPSS for<br />
Windows, Maidenhead: Open University Press.<br />
Ryan, B., Scapens, R. and Theobald, M. (2002) Research Method and Methodology in Finance and<br />
Accounting, Third Edition, Academic Press<br />
Saunders, M., Lewis, P. and Thornhill, A. (2003) Research Methods for <strong>Business</strong> Students, FT<br />
Prentice Hall, 3 rd edition<br />
Silver, M., (1997) <strong>Business</strong> Statistics, 2 nd edition, McGraw-Hill<br />
-115
MODULE CATALOGUE MODULE DESCRIPTIONS<br />
FINANCIAL ACCOUNTING<br />
MODULE CODE: BS3504<br />
NUMBER OF CREDITS: 20<br />
SEMESTER: Autumn & Spring<br />
PROGRAMMES: BSc Accounting, BSc Econ Accounting & Management, BSc Econ<br />
Accounting & Economics, BSc Accounting with a European Language,<br />
BSc Accounting & Finance<br />
AIMS OF THE MODULE:<br />
The aim of this module is to present a critical review of major developments in the theory and<br />
practice of financial accounting.<br />
LEARNING OUTCOMES OF THE MODULE<br />
On completion of the module a student should be able to<br />
A Knowledge and Understanding:<br />
• identify holding companies, associated companies, joint ventures, subsidiary companies and<br />
simple investments;<br />
• display knowledge of different theoretical and practical conventions for the preparation of<br />
financial statements and the effect on income measurement of the application of each<br />
convention<br />
• demonstrate familiarity with the system for setting accounting standards and understand how<br />
the process influences the regulatory outcomes.<br />
• comprehend the fundamentals of professional ethics<br />
• be aware of current issues in financial reporting<br />
B Intellectual Skills:<br />
• identify and search for relevant information<br />
• systematically obtain, verify and retrieve information from a variety of sources<br />
• analyse and draw reasoned conclusion from a set of data<br />
C Discipline Specific Skills:<br />
• gather and construct financial information and build a narrative around it;<br />
• account for holding companies, associated companies, joint ventures, subsidiary companies<br />
and simple investments, including the preparation of group accounts;<br />
• describe and implement the consequences of corporate evolution as reflected in accounting<br />
statements: formation; reconstruction and liquidation;<br />
• examine and critically evaluate current topics in financial accounting and reporting;<br />
• prepare accounts that comply with their requirements of selected accounting standards,<br />
analyse alternative accounting policies and critically examine the standard setters’ preferred<br />
treatments;<br />
• identify, compare and contrast the application of various capital maintenance concepts to<br />
financial reporting;<br />
• demonstrate a theoretical and practical understanding of: uniform system of cash flow<br />
reporting; accounting for price level changes; foreign currency transactions and translation.<br />
D Transferable Skills:<br />
• communicate ideas, principles and theories effectively by written examination<br />
• exercise initiative, self-reliance and time management skills and work independently<br />
• appreciate alternative viewpoints<br />
• exercise numeracy, problem-solving and IT skills<br />
• access and utilise information in a variety of research resources both traditional and IT<br />
METHODS OF TEACHING AND LEARNING:<br />
The formal timetabled components of the module comprise 34 hours of lectures and 10 hours of<br />
classes. However, as students need to assimilate an advanced knowledge of financial accounting and<br />
-116-
MODULE DESCRIPTIONS MODULE CATALOGUE<br />
possess proficiency in the application of this knowledge to a range of questions, an effective teaching<br />
strategy and learning support structure is imperative. Detailed handouts and a structured reading list<br />
are given to students in order to encourage the completion of class questions, which build upon the<br />
material covered in lectures. Student support is given through class feedback, revision sessions and<br />
e-mail student–lecturer contact.<br />
Indicative study hours: 160<br />
ASSESSMENT:<br />
Examination Component 70%<br />
One 3 hour examination at the end of the Spring Semester<br />
Continuous Assessment 30%<br />
One assignment of 2000 words or the equivalent to be submitted in<br />
week 11 of the Autumn Semester<br />
The purpose of the coursework is to test understanding of key advanced financial accounting<br />
concepts and practices. The assignment must be word-processed so therefore tests CIT skills.<br />
The examination contains a range of questions designed to cover the learning outcomes for the<br />
module and to test skill development. It aims to test knowledge and comprehension of topics in the<br />
syllabus as well as testing students’ ability to apply such knowledge in particular contexts. Questions<br />
require written answers and test students’ development of intellectual, communication, numeric and<br />
reasoning skills, as well as subject-specific knowledge.<br />
Informal assessment is provided through class questions which stimulate independent learning,<br />
develop students’ analytical skills and provide an ongoing mechanism for assessing the extent to<br />
which students are meeting the module’s learning outcomes. Student problems are dealt with by the<br />
lecturer/tutor in classes or on a one-to one basis and all students are encouraged to submit queries<br />
either in the class or afterwards.<br />
SYLLABUS CONTENT:<br />
A critical examination of the following aspects of accounting theory and practice: cost or value; the<br />
conceptual framework for accounting; creative accounting; the substance over form debate;<br />
retirement benefits; foreign currency transactions and translations; uniform system of cash flow<br />
reporting. Accounting for company evolution and failure. Accounting for groups of companies;<br />
definitions; identification; valuation; goodwill; accounting for associates. Aspects of professional<br />
ethics; current issues in financial reporting.<br />
INDICATIVE READING LIST:<br />
Alfredson, K. et al (2009) Applying International Reporting Standards, Milton: Wylie.<br />
Clendon, T. (2009) A Student’s Guide to Group Accounts, Wokingham: Kaplan.<br />
Edwards, J. R. (2008) Financial Accounting. ICSA Professional Development Series, 6 th edition,<br />
London: Institute of Chartered Secretaries and Administrators.<br />
Elliott, B. and Elliott, J. (2010) Financial Accounting and Reporting, 14 th edition, Pearson Education<br />
Ltd.<br />
Ernst & Young (2006), International GAAP 2007. Generally Accepted Accounting Practice under<br />
International Financial Reporting Standards, London: LexisNexis.<br />
-117
MODULE CATALOGUE MODULE DESCRIPTIONS<br />
FINANCIAL DERIVATIVES<br />
MODULE CODE: BS3515<br />
NUMBER OF CREDITS: 10<br />
SEMESTER: Autumn<br />
PROGRAMMES: BSc Accounting & Finance, BSc Econ Economics & Finance and<br />
<strong>Business</strong> Management & Finance.<br />
AIMS OF THE MODULE:<br />
The Financial Derivatives module is designed to provide students with an understanding of financial<br />
derivatives, their valuation and applications, and of the markets on which they are traded.<br />
LEARNING OUTCOMES OF THE MODULE<br />
On completion of the module a student should be able to<br />
A Knowledge and Understanding:<br />
• show a systematic knowledge of the concepts underlying the analysis of derivative securities.<br />
• show a systematic knowledge of a range of different types of derivative security including<br />
forwards and futures contracts, options and swaps and of the operations of the markets on<br />
which they are traded.<br />
• show a systematic knowledge of, and critically evaluate, pricing models for a range of<br />
derivative securities including forwards and futures contracts, options and swaps.<br />
• show a systematic knowledge of, and critically evaluate, a range of investment strategies<br />
using derivatives including arbitrage, hedging and speculation.<br />
B Intellectual Skills:<br />
• synthesise and evaluate primary and secondary data.<br />
• solve problems, including the ability to manipulate financial and other numerical data and to<br />
apply statistical concepts at an appropriate level.<br />
• exercise powers of inquiry, logic, and critical analysis, interpretation and evaluation of<br />
arguments and evidence.<br />
• sustain a critical argument in writing.<br />
C Discipline Specific Skills:<br />
• measure and evaluate the returns on, and risks of, different types of derivative security<br />
including forwards and futures contracts, options and swaps.<br />
• price a range of derivative securities including forwards and futures contracts, options and<br />
swaps, using a range of appropriate pricing models.<br />
• apply examples of investment strategies using derivative securities including arbitrage,<br />
speculation and hedging strategies.<br />
D Transferable Skills:<br />
• communicate ideas, principles and theories effectively by oral and written means.<br />
• exercise initiative, self reliance and time management skills and work independently.<br />
• appreciate alternative viewpoints.<br />
• exercise numeracy, problem solving and IT skills.<br />
• access and utilise information in a variety of research resources both traditional (e.g. library)<br />
and IT (e.g. the Internet, databases).<br />
METHODS OF TEACHING AND LEARNING:<br />
The formal timetabled component of the module comprises approximately sixteen lectures and six<br />
classes. The lecture programme, which is supported by detailed handouts, is used to introduce<br />
material to students, to direct them (through the use of recommended reading and web sites<br />
included in the handouts) to sources which will enable them, during the private study time they<br />
devote to the module (fifty eight hours), to increase their knowledge and understanding of that<br />
material, and to empower them to attempt the problems which are set for classes. Classes are<br />
closely integrated to the lecture programme and are designed to enable students to apply the<br />
material covered in that programme to solve problems and to discuss and evaluate those solutions.<br />
Students are supported throughout the module through consultation with the module coordinator.<br />
-118-
MODULE DESCRIPTIONS MODULE CATALOGUE<br />
Indicative study hours: 80<br />
ASSESSMENT:<br />
Examination Component: 100%<br />
One 2 hour examination at the end of the autumn semester<br />
The examination paper is designed to enable students to demonstrate their intellectual skills of<br />
analysis, synthesis and evaluation and the extent to which they have met the module learning<br />
outcomes.<br />
Informal assessment is provided through the class problems (for which solutions are provided) which<br />
enable students to self assess the extent to which they are meeting the module learning outcomes.<br />
In addition the module coordinator is available throughout the module to answer queries and discuss<br />
progress with students.<br />
SYLLABUS CONTENT:<br />
Introduction: the nature of financial derivatives; types of financial derivative; applications of<br />
derivatives; basic concepts – market efficiency, arbitrage and fair price. Forwards & Futures:<br />
distinction between forwards and futures; futures markets; types of future; pricing futures and<br />
forwards; applications of futures and forwards – speculation and hedging. Options: options markets;<br />
types of option; option payoffs and strategies; option valuation; option sensitivities and hedging;<br />
applications of options – speculation and hedging. Swaps: swaps markets; types of swap; motives<br />
for swaps; pricing swaps; applications of swaps. Other financial derivatives.<br />
INDICATIVE READING LIST:<br />
Cuthbertson & Nitzsche, Financial Engineering: Derivatives and Risk Management, Wiley, 2001<br />
Hull, Fundamentals of Futures and Options Markets, 7 th Edition, Pearson Prentice Hall, 2011<br />
Hull, Options, Futures & Other Derivatives, 7 th Edition, Prentice Hall International, 2008<br />
Kolb, Futures, Options & Swaps, 5 th Edition, Blackwell 2007<br />
-119-
MODULE CATALOGUE MODULE DESCRIPTIONS<br />
FINANCIAL ECONOMICS<br />
MODULE CODE: BS3554<br />
NUMBER OF CREDITS: 20<br />
SEMESTER: Autumn & Spring<br />
PROGRAMMES: BSc Econ Accounting & Economics, BSc Econ Banking & Finance, BSc<br />
Econ Economics, BSc Econ Economics and Finance, BSc Econ<br />
Economics and Management Studies, BSc Econ Economics with a<br />
European Language, BSc Econ Economics and Politics, BA Economics<br />
with a Humanities Subject, BSc Econ Banking & Finance with a<br />
European Language.<br />
AIMS OF THE MODULE:<br />
The role of this module is to apply concepts and techniques learnt in the year 2 Microeconomics<br />
Analysis and Money Banking & Finance modules to real world issues affecting financial markets. It<br />
provides students with an introduction to financial economics and complements the work they do in<br />
the year 3 International Finance module.<br />
The aim of the Financial Economics module is to provide students with a broad background to<br />
financial economics with the emphasis on financial asset valuation and risk management.<br />
LEARNING OUTCOMES OF THE MODULE<br />
On completion of the module a student should be able to<br />
A Knowledge and Understanding:<br />
• Understand and learn the microfoundations of and the dynamic general equilibrium approach<br />
to financial economics, and in particular, learn the fundamental techniques used in<br />
intertemporal financial decision making under uncertainty.<br />
• Understand and implement the concept of risk and risk management, therefore explain how<br />
mean, standard deviation, correlation and distributions play an important role in risk<br />
management.<br />
• value and understand the characteristics of financial assets such as bonds, equities,<br />
perpetuities, discuss the assumptions made for each category of assets, discuss the strength<br />
and weakness of the valuation approaches.<br />
• understand utility theory, understand the differences between risk averse, risk neutral and<br />
risk loving investors, define and calculate measures of risk<br />
• understand the different notions of market efficiency, discuss the conflicting empirical<br />
evidence available, express their own views and link the notions of market efficiency with the<br />
theorems in finance.<br />
• Understand and learn the applications of three key models of financial economics, namely,<br />
the mean variance model, the capital asset pricing model, and the arbitrage pricing model.<br />
• understand the fundamental nature of derivatives, how they are traded in the market, explain<br />
their dramatic growth, develop simple trading strategies, discuss, explain and apply the putcall<br />
parity theorem.<br />
• be familiar with derivative valuation techniques such as the Black-Scholes equation and the<br />
binomial tree approach, value common stock options using the Black-Scholes equation, value<br />
American type options using the lattice.<br />
• be aware of recent derivative disasters, appreciate lessons learnt from such events,<br />
understand the notion behind VaR, apply VaR to simple cases.<br />
B Intellectual Skills:<br />
• be able to apply mathematical and financial analysis to finance and risk management.<br />
• be able to evaluate main financial and risk management issues facing modern firms.<br />
C Discipline Specific Skills:<br />
• be familiar and competent to research statistical, textual, and internet sources relating to<br />
modern financial institutions.<br />
• be able to analyse the economic basis of financial strategy as it relates to areas such as<br />
asset valuation, risk management, financial market strategy.<br />
-120-
MODULE DESCRIPTIONS MODULE CATALOGUE<br />
D Transferable Skills:<br />
• be read extensively, and be able to collect, organise and analyse data.<br />
• be familiar with key IT resources for research purposes and to inform classes and assignment<br />
work.<br />
• be confident in developing individual ideas, setting personal course goals and schedules.<br />
METHODS OF TEACHING AND LEARNING:<br />
The formal timetabled component of the module is approximately 36 hours of lectures and 8 hours of<br />
classes. The lecture programme is supported by detailed handouts, problem sets and structured<br />
reading (recommended reading is detailed in the handout provided at the beginning of the lecture<br />
programme). Class questions attempt to force students to challenge, interpret and understanding the<br />
subjects covered. Students are supported throughout the module through the provision of regular<br />
surgeries (approximately 15-20 hours per year), held approximately every week, student lecturer<br />
private consultation sessions, revision sessions and email student-lecturer contact.<br />
Indicative study hours: 160<br />
ASSESSMENT:<br />
Examination Component 70%<br />
One 3 hour examination at the end of the Spring Semester<br />
Continuous Assessment 30%<br />
One 2 hour examination at the end of Autumn Semester.<br />
The exam at the end of the Spring semester contains two sections, with 5 questions in each section.<br />
First section contains mainly materials from the Autumn semester and the second section contains<br />
materials from the Spring semester. Students have to attempt 6 questions, at least two from each<br />
section. All questions carry the same number of marks.<br />
The exam at the end of the Autumn semester contains 6 questions. Students have to attempt 4<br />
questions. Students are provided with a wide range of class questions, which are designed to<br />
stimulate independent learning and to provide an ongoing mechanism for assessing the extent to<br />
which students are meeting the module’s learning outcomes. Students are encouraged throughout<br />
the module to submit queries to the module co-ordinator for discussion.<br />
SYLLABUS CONTENT:<br />
Present value calculations; time value of money; annuities; internal rate of return; valuation of bonds;<br />
statistics review; general equilibrium approach, intertemporal financial decisions; arbitrage; statepreference<br />
approach; contingent claims & arrow securities; risk; optimal portfolio problem; equity<br />
premium puzzle; mean variance approach; capital asset pricing model; arbitrage pricing model.<br />
INDICATIVE READING LIST:<br />
R.E. Bailey (2005), The Economics of Financial Markets, Cambridge University Press.<br />
Yvan Lengwiler (2004), Microfoundations of Financial Economics, Princeton University Press.<br />
-121-
MODULE CATALOGUE MODULE DESCRIPTIONS<br />
INDUSTRIAL ECONOMICS<br />
MODULE CODE: BS3572<br />
NUMBER OF CREDITS: 20<br />
SEMESTER: Autumn & Spring<br />
PROGRAMMES: BSc. Econ Accounting & Economics, BSc. Econ Banking & Finance, BSc.<br />
Econ <strong>Business</strong> Economics, BSc. Econ Economics, BSc. Econ Economics &<br />
Management Studies, BSc. Econ Economics with Politics, BA Economics<br />
with Humanities.<br />
AIMS OF THE MODULE:<br />
Provide students with an up-to-date understanding of industrial economics, including the areas of industrial<br />
organisation and regulation, at a third year undergraduate level.<br />
Make students aware of the relevant theory in these areas.<br />
Make students aware of empirical work that has been undertaken in some areas relating to the operation<br />
and performance of UK markets.<br />
Make students aware of key policy issues and the way in which economic analysis can be used to approach<br />
these issues.<br />
Provide students with subject specific and core skills which will be of use in further education and their<br />
future careers.<br />
LEARNING OUTCOMES OF THE MODULE<br />
On completion of the module a student should be able to<br />
A Knowledge and Understanding:<br />
• understand modern issues in the theory of industrial organisation<br />
• understand recent UK Competition Policy and natural monopoly regulation<br />
• understand the role of empirical research in testing economic theory and in assessing economic policy<br />
B Intellectual Skills:<br />
• recognise the importance of economic theory to the analysis of the industrial economy and be able<br />
to apply theory to applied economic problems.<br />
• appreciate the main causes of market failure and distortion in the context of industry, and be able to<br />
indicate their welfare consequences<br />
• analyse economic policy in this area and identify the merits of individual policy measures<br />
C Discipline Specific Skills:<br />
• employ deductive reasoning to analyse economic problems<br />
• analyse data and interpret statistical information<br />
• understand and evaluate the role of incentives and strategic thinking in determining firm and<br />
government behaviour and therefore market outcomes and policy<br />
D Transferable Skills:<br />
• work individually and independently on lecture and tutorial material<br />
• develop reading skills in specific subject areas<br />
METHODS OF TEACHING AND LEARNING:<br />
Teaching takes place in the Autumn and Spring semesters. There are approximately 36 hours of lectures<br />
and 8 hours of classes.<br />
The purpose of lectures is to set out the main points of each topic covered and indicate a structure for<br />
learning. They identify the key features of the topics covered and focus particularly on material new to<br />
students, and on the technically more difficult elements. They aim to improve student learning by identifying<br />
the principal theoretical and empirical aspects on each topic, and by providing guidance on reading. Lecture<br />
handouts provide the students with mathematical material, statistical data and diagrams.<br />
Classes provide students with an opportunity to discuss module material. Theoretical ideas introduced in the<br />
lecture are identified and therefore consolidated with the help of numerical and essay style problems.<br />
Statistical data, diagrams and quantitative material may also be reviewed. The reading material and<br />
-122-
MODULE DESCRIPTIONS MODULE CATALOGUE<br />
associated tasks introduce empirical material and policy debates.<br />
Students are provided with text references and handouts but are required to supplement these by consulting<br />
articles available in the library.<br />
Indicative study hours: 160<br />
ASSESSMENT:<br />
Examination Component : 70%<br />
One 3 hour examination at the end of the Spring semester<br />
Continuous Assessment: 30%<br />
One 2 hour examination at the end of the Autumns semester<br />
The summer examination is divided into three sections: Section A covers the first half (first semester) of the<br />
module and Sections B and C the second. The questions take a variety of forms enabling the student to<br />
demonstrate their knowledge and skills across theoretical, quantitative, diagrammatic, empirical and policy<br />
material.<br />
SYLLABUS CONTENT:<br />
Monopoly: non-linear pricing and price discrimination, product quality; Oligopoly pricing: static and dynamic<br />
models of oligopoly, product differentiation, measuring market power; Strategic behavior: entry deterrence,<br />
advertising, research and development; Issues in antitrust economics: exclusionary strategies, vertical<br />
integration and vertical restraints, horizontal mergers; Issues in regulatory economics: optimal pricing for<br />
natural monopoly.<br />
INDICATIVE READING LIST:<br />
L. Cabral, Introduction to Industrial Organization, MIT Press, 2000.<br />
D. Carlton and J. Perloff, Modern Industrial Organization, Pearson Addison Wesley, 2005.<br />
J. Church and R. Ware, Industrial Organization: A Strategic Approach, McGraw-Hill, 2000.<br />
M. Motta, Competition Policy: Theory and Practise, Cambridge University Press, 2004.<br />
L. Pepall, D. Richards, and G. Norman, Industrial Organization: Contemporary Theory and Empirical<br />
Applications, 4th ed., Blackwell Publishing, 2008.<br />
-123
MODULE CATALOGUE MODULE DESCRIPTIONS<br />
INTERNATIONAL ACCOUNTING<br />
MODULE CODE: BS3506<br />
NUMBER OF CREDITS: 10<br />
SEMESTER: Autumn<br />
PROGRAMMES: BSc Accounting, BSc Accounting & Finance, BSc Accounting with a<br />
European Language<br />
AIMS OF THE MODULE:<br />
The aim of the module is to expose students to a variety of international issues so that they will be<br />
able to evaluate and assess UK financial reporting in a wider context.<br />
LEARNING OUTCOMES OF THE MODULE<br />
On completion of the module a student should be able to<br />
A Knowledge and Understanding:<br />
• show a knowledge and understanding of the divergent forces which cause international<br />
differences;<br />
• be aware of different accounting practices in different countries;<br />
• understand the problems faced by multinational corporations;<br />
• understand the issues relating to regional and international harmonisation.<br />
B Intellectual Skills:<br />
• synthesise and evaluate secondary data<br />
• exercise powers of inquiry, logic, and critical analysis, interpretation and evaluation of<br />
arguments and evidence.<br />
• sustain a critical argument in writing.<br />
C Discipline Specific Skills:<br />
• critically evaluate the divergent forces which cause international differences;<br />
• compare and contrast different accounting practices in different countries;<br />
• develop a critical understanding of selected problems faced by multinational corporations;<br />
• critically evaluate progress towards regional and international harmonisation.<br />
D Transferable Skills:<br />
• communicate ideas, principles and theories effectively by written means<br />
• exercise initiative, self reliance and time management skills and work independently<br />
• appreciate alternative viewpoints<br />
• access and utilise information in a variety of research resources both traditional (e.g. library)<br />
and IT (e.g. the Internet, databases).<br />
METHODS OF TEACHING AND LEARNING:<br />
The formal timetabled components of the module comprise 17 hours of lectures and 5 hours of<br />
tutorials. However, as students need to attain a broad knowledge of international accounting issues,<br />
an effective teaching strategy and learning support structure is imperative. Detailed handouts and a<br />
structured reading list are given to students in order to encourage the completion of tutorial<br />
questions, which build upon the material covered in lectures. Student support is given through the<br />
formal contact of 5 hours tutorials, informally through private consultation with the lecturer and also<br />
through e-mail student – lecturer contact.<br />
Indicative study hours: 80<br />
ASSESSMENT:<br />
Examination Component 100%<br />
One two hour examination at the end of the Autumn semester.<br />
-124-
MODULE DESCRIPTIONS MODULE CATALOGUE<br />
The examination will test student’s knowledge, understanding and analytical skills. In particular, this<br />
third year course will aim to test the student’s ability to put forward reasoned, analytically evidencebased<br />
arguments.<br />
SYLLABUS CONTENT:<br />
Accounting and its international environment; financial reporting worldwide focusing in particular on<br />
selected countries of the developed and developing world; selected international issues; regional<br />
harmonisation; international standardisation; financial reporting by multinationals; classification of<br />
accounting systems.<br />
INDICATIVE READING LIST:<br />
Core Books – latest editions<br />
C.W. Nobes and R.H. Parker, Comparative International Accounting, Prentice Hall International.<br />
Roberts, C., Weetman, P. and Gordon, P., International Financial Accounting, Financial Times/Pitman.<br />
Choi, F. D. & Meek, G., International Accounting, Prentice Hall.<br />
www.JASPlus.com<br />
KEY OVERVIEW ARTICLES<br />
Alexander, D. and Archer, S. (2000), On the myth of “Anglo-Saxon” financial accounting, The<br />
International Journal of Accounting, 35(4): 539-557.<br />
Haller, A and Linz, J. (2002) “Financial accounting developments in the European Union: past events<br />
and future prospects”, European Accounting Review, Vol. 11, No. 1.<br />
Nobes, C. W. (1998), “Towards a General Model of the Reasons for International Differences in<br />
Financial Reporting”, Abacus, Vol. 34, No. 2, pp. 162-187.<br />
Schipper, K. (2005), “The introduction of international accounting standards in Europe: implications<br />
for international convergence”, European Accounting Review, Vol. 14, No. 1.<br />
Whittington, G. (2005), “The adoption of international accounting standards in the European Union”,<br />
The European Accounting Review, Vol. 14, No. 1.<br />
Zeff, S. (2003), “How the US accounting profession got where it is today”, Accounting Horizons, Vol.<br />
17, No.3.<br />
-125-
MODULE CATALOGUE MODULE DESCRIPTIONS<br />
INTERNATIONAL BUSINESS LOGISTICS<br />
MODULE CODE: BS3589<br />
NUMBER OF CREDITS: 20<br />
SEMESTER: Autumn & Spring<br />
PROGRAMMES: BSc <strong>Business</strong> Management (International Management), BSc <strong>Business</strong><br />
Management (Logistics & Operations), BSc <strong>Business</strong> Management, BSc<br />
<strong>Business</strong> Management (Marketing).<br />
AIMS OF THE MODULE:<br />
The aim of this module is to familiarise students with the different components of an international<br />
distribution channel and enable them to understand how it is structured. Emphasis will be on the<br />
relationships between business management and logistics process. The module, in particular, will<br />
encourage an awareness of the significance of customer service in logistics and an appreciation of<br />
logistics as a strategic management tool as well as developing analytical skills in logistics in areas such<br />
as trade-offs or service optimisation.<br />
LEARNING OUTCOMES OF THE MODULE<br />
On completion of the module a student should be able to:<br />
A. Knowledge and Understanding<br />
• Define and explain international supply chain management. Identify business opportunities<br />
linked to the international movement of goods.<br />
B. Intellectual Skills:<br />
• Demonstrate an appreciation of logistics as a strategic management tool. Analyse the trade-offs<br />
inherent in efficient supply chain management. Demonstrate analytical and written<br />
communication skills in the form of logical structured argument for presentation in assessed<br />
Coursework and in response to examination questions.<br />
C. Discipline Specific Skills:<br />
• Evaluate the methods used in international logistics to effect trade-offs and consider the<br />
implications of such trade-offs.<br />
D. Transferable Skills:<br />
• Develop analytical, communication and learning skills through workshops and seminars.<br />
• Develop critical ability in the interpretation of empirical evidence.<br />
METHODS OF TEACHING AND LEARNING:<br />
The module comprises 44 hours of lectures and seminars spread over two semesters and shared<br />
between two members of staff. Each timetable slot will be for two hours allowing for development of<br />
material and presentations in seminar groups. Occasional guest lectures from industry will be invited to<br />
contribute to the programme.<br />
ASSESSMENT:<br />
Examination Component 60%<br />
One 3 hour examination at the end of the Spring Semester<br />
Continuous Assessment 40%<br />
Two individual assessed essays of 2000 words (both 20%) to be<br />
submitted in week 3 and 8 of the Spring semester.<br />
Assessment consists of two primary elements: an examination of 3 hours (60%) in Semester 2 and two<br />
pieces of coursework (20% each), both of 2000 words. There is one piece of coursework in each<br />
semester.<br />
The examination and assignments contain a range of questions designed to cover the learning outcomes<br />
of the module. They are designed to test the student’s critical knowledge and comprehension of the<br />
material taught. Answers require the application of theories or models when appropriate. Questions<br />
are designed to assess critical analytical ability and provide a means to “stretch” good students.<br />
-126-
MODULE DESCRIPTIONS MODULE CATALOGUE<br />
SYLLABUS CONTENT:<br />
Supply chain management; international channels of distribution; benchmarking; demand forecasting;<br />
customer service and bench marking; cargo flows; transport operations; inbound and outbound;<br />
international logistics, cargo routeing and modal choice; volatile and fragile supply chains; risk<br />
management; flexibility; power in supply chains<br />
INDICATIVE READING LIST:<br />
A. Rushton, P. Croucher & P Baker (2006), Handbook of Logistics & Distribution Management. Third<br />
Edition, Kogan Page.<br />
A. Harrison & R. Van Hoek (2008), Logistics Management and Strategy, Financial Times, Third Edition,<br />
Prentice Hall.<br />
M. Christopher (2005), Logistics and Supply Chain Management, Financial Times, Prentice Hall.<br />
D. Waters (ed) (2007), Global Logistics, Kogan Page.<br />
S. New & R. Westbrook (2004) Understanding Supply Chains, Oxford University Press.<br />
Students are also expected to use relevant journals:<br />
International Journal of Physical Distribution and Logistics Management<br />
Transportation Research Part E: Logistics and Transportation Review<br />
Journal of <strong>Business</strong> Logistics<br />
International Journal of Logistics: Research and Applications<br />
Supply Chain Management: An International Journal<br />
-127-
MODULE CATALOGUE MODULE DESCRIPTIONS<br />
INTERNATIONAL BUSINESS AND MARKETING<br />
<strong>Module</strong> Code: BS3730<br />
Number of Credits: 20<br />
Semester: Autumn and Spring<br />
Programmes: BSc Econ Accounting and Management, BSc <strong>Business</strong> Management,<br />
BSc <strong>Business</strong> Management (International Management), BSc <strong>Business</strong><br />
Management (Logistics and Operations), BSc <strong>Business</strong> Management<br />
(Marketing), BSc <strong>Business</strong> Management with a European Language,<br />
BSc <strong>Business</strong> Studies and Japanese.<br />
AIMS OF THE MODULE:<br />
To develop an understanding of the role of international firms in the world economy and their influence<br />
on the economic development of host countries. To facilitate understanding and application of methods<br />
of assessing international markets, entering them and developing, implementing and evaluating<br />
international marketing programmes.<br />
LEARNING OUTCOMES OF THE MODULE<br />
On completion of the module a student should be able to:<br />
A. Knowledge and Understanding<br />
• Demonstrate an in-depth understanding of the role of multinationals in the world economy<br />
• Identify and assess the international marketing issues facing firms.<br />
• Contrast the evolution of multinationals in North America, Western Europe, Japan and the newly<br />
industrialising countries<br />
B. Intellectual Skills:<br />
• Contrast the evolution of multinationals in North America, Western Europe, Japan and the newly<br />
industrialising countries<br />
• Diagnose the fundamental issues involved in the internationalisation of business activity<br />
• Appreciate the impact of culture in international business and marketing.<br />
C. Discipline Specific Skills:<br />
• Explore the application of alternative international marketing strategies.<br />
• Develop international marketing strategies<br />
• Synthesise theories of corporate internationalisation and question the future of the<br />
multinational.<br />
D. Transferable Skills:<br />
• Demonstrate ability to analyse concepts and theories and to apply these to different<br />
international contexts and then to evaluate applicability and implications within both a business<br />
and societal context and across cultures.<br />
METHODS OF TEACHING AND LEARNING:<br />
44 hours of lectures will include a variety of approaches such as staff presentations, guest speakers, use<br />
of case study and video material. Students will be encouraged to explore issues in international business<br />
and marketing in their own study time as well as for the assessments<br />
ASSESSMENT:<br />
Examination Component 60%<br />
One 3 hour examination at the end of the Spring Semester<br />
Continuous Assessment 40%<br />
Individual assessed assignment of 2500 – 3000 words to be submitted<br />
in week 1 of the Spring Semester.<br />
Assessment will be via an individual assignment and an examination.<br />
The assignment will be designed to explore students’ understanding of and ability to apply and evaluate<br />
concepts and approaches to International <strong>Business</strong>.<br />
-128-
MODULE DESCRIPTIONS MODULE CATALOGUE<br />
The examination assesses student understanding of, and ability to use and apply, a range of approaches<br />
needed within international contexts of business and marketing.<br />
SYLLABUS CONTENT:<br />
The International <strong>Business</strong> Environment<br />
Globalisation. International trade: Trade theories and the development of the world trading system.<br />
International Trade Groups<br />
Economic and political risk analysis: Political and economic risks – government intervention –<br />
operational and management problems – sourcing – implications for business – benefits and costs –<br />
ethical issues<br />
Foreign Direct Investment<br />
Investing in less developed and transition economies: Korea, Malaysia, Thailand, Eastern Europe,<br />
Russia, China and Southern Africa<br />
The Japanese model<br />
The international technological environment. Technology transfer: Technology transfer to LDCs –<br />
Research and Development – Dualistic economic structure – appropriate technology – LDC factor<br />
endowment.<br />
Multinationals and governments: Codes of conduct – voluntary disclosure – the future of the<br />
multinational – regionalisation of trade and investment.<br />
The context and challenge of international marketing<br />
Researching international markets<br />
Modes of entry: Exporting – turnkey projects – licensing – franchising – joint ventures – wholly owned<br />
subsidiaries – greenfields – takeovers – strategic alliances.<br />
Developing effective international competitive strategies: achievement and sustainability of positional<br />
advantage in foreign markets<br />
Product and service decisions in international marketing operations, pricing and logistics, international<br />
marketing communications, organising and controlling international marketing activities<br />
INDICATIVE READING LIST:<br />
P. Artisien (2001) Multinationals in Eastern Europe, Macmillan-Palgrave.<br />
C.W.L. Hill (2005) International <strong>Business</strong>: Competing in the Global Marketplace, Irwin McGraw-Hill,<br />
Boston.<br />
M. Wolf (2005) Why Globalisation Works, Yale University Press, London.<br />
Cateora P and Ghauri P (2002) International Marketing. McGraw Hill.<br />
Keegan W and Schlegelmilch B (2001) Global Marketing Management, Prentice Hall.<br />
-129-
MODULE CATALOGUE MODULE DESCRIPTIONS<br />
INTERNATIONAL CORPORATE FINANCE<br />
MODULE CODE: BS3514<br />
NUMBER OF CREDITS: 20<br />
SEMESTER: Autumn & Spring<br />
PROGRAMMES: BSc Accounting & Finance, BSc Econ Economics & Finance, BSc<br />
<strong>Business</strong> Management and Finance<br />
AIMS OF THE MODULE:<br />
The aim of this module is to analyze corporate finance issues in a global context by studying the<br />
economic, fiscal, currency and political environments in which international companies operate and<br />
the methods and techniques they use to manage their operations.<br />
LEARNING OUTCOMES OF THE MODULE<br />
On completion of the module a student should be able to:<br />
(A Knowledge and Understanding)<br />
• Describe and evaluate the different types of currency regimes operating throughout the<br />
world.<br />
• Demonstrate an understanding of the functions of the foreign exchange market.<br />
• Show a systematic knowledge and understanding of, and critically evaluate the international<br />
parity relationships.<br />
• Evaluate the motives underlying foreign direct investment (FDI) and assess the strategies<br />
used to manage the financial risks arising from FDI.<br />
• Understand the problems introduced by national boundaries in corporate finance and show a<br />
systematic understanding of the ways in which international companies may overcome some<br />
of these problems.<br />
• Understand the issues involved in the estimation of the cost of capital for foreign projects.<br />
• Understand the effects of political risk in international financial decisions and demonstrate<br />
knowledge of political risk measurement and management strategies.<br />
• Define, measure and distinguish between the different types of foreign exchange risk and<br />
evaluate the different ways of managing the risks.<br />
• Evaluate the different motives underpinning foreign exchange risk management.<br />
• Assess the aims and functions of international financing and cash management.<br />
• Analyse the relevance of different corporate governance systems to international corporate<br />
finance.<br />
(B Intellectual Skills)<br />
• Collect, synthesise and evaluate primary and secondary data.<br />
• Solve problems, including the ability to manipulate financial and other numerical data and to<br />
apply statistical and economic concepts at an appropriate level.<br />
• Exercise powers of inquiry, logic, and critical analysis, interpretation and evaluation of<br />
arguments and evidence.<br />
• Undertake independent research and reading.<br />
• Sustain a critical argument in writing.<br />
(C Discipline Specific Skills)<br />
• Use the international parity relationships to assist in forecasting appropriate forward and spot<br />
foreign exchange rates.<br />
• Apply appropriate techniques to evaluate overseas short term and long term investment and<br />
financial decisions.<br />
• Apply appropriate numerical techniques to identify, measure and manage translation<br />
exposure, transaction exposure and economic exposure.<br />
• Assess the role of derivatives in managing foreign exchange risk.<br />
• Use appropriate information to measure the cost of capital for international companies when<br />
international financial markets are involved.<br />
(D Transferable Skills)<br />
• Communicate ideas, principles and theories effectively by oral and written means.<br />
• Exercise initiative, self reliance and time management skills and work independently.<br />
-130-
MODULE DESCRIPTIONS MODULE CATALOGUE<br />
• Appreciate alternative viewpoints.<br />
• Exercise numeracy, problem solving and IT skills.<br />
• Access and utilise information in a variety of research resources both traditional (e.g. library)<br />
and IT (e.g. the Internet, databases).<br />
METHODS OF TEACHING AND LEARNING:<br />
Teaching takes place throughout the academic year. The formal timetabled components of this<br />
module comprise approximately 34 hours of lectures and 10 hours of classes. Theoretical concepts<br />
and practical problems are introduced in the lectures, along with illustrations. The classes form the<br />
basis for students to apply the respective numerical techniques and to discuss the theoretical and<br />
practical issues relating to the topics covered. A research-based approach is emphasised by referring<br />
students to empirical evaluations of both the theoretical and practical material covered in the lectures.<br />
In addition, students are referred to text books written by authors with substantial research<br />
experience in the field of international corporate finance; these texts also contain numerous<br />
references which students are encouraged to read. Both lectures and classes are designed to provide<br />
students with the tools and knowledge to fulfil the requirements for the learning outcomes for this<br />
module. Students should develop technical, evaluative, discursive and presentation skills in classes.<br />
Indicative study hours: 80<br />
ASSESSMENT:<br />
Examination Component: One 3 hour examination in the spring semester (70%).<br />
Continuous Assessment: One assignment of 2500 words or equivalent to be submitted at the end of<br />
the autumn semester (30%).<br />
The formal assessment for this module comprises individual coursework and a written examination.<br />
The coursework constitutes 30% of the overall mark for the module. There will also be one 3 hour<br />
examination at the end of the spring semester, constituting 70% of the overall module mark.<br />
The coursework and examination are designed to allow students to demonstrate that they have<br />
achieved the learning outcomes established for this module. The coursework will be in the form of an<br />
individual essay. Students are required to demonstrate the ability to pursue individual research and<br />
to read widely. The report also aims to test analytical and writing skills.<br />
The examination paper is designed to enable students to demonstrate their intellectual skills of<br />
analysis, synthesis and evaluation and the extent to which they have met the module learning<br />
outcomes. The paper will include questions of two types: first, problem questions requiring students<br />
to use the theoretical and technical material from the module to solve problems and to evaluate their<br />
solutions; second, essay questions designed to enable students to demonstrate their understanding of<br />
the theoretical and discursive material covered on the module.<br />
Informal assessment is provided through the class problems (for which solutions are provided) which<br />
enable students to self assess the extent to which they are meeting the module learning outcomes.<br />
In addition the module coordinator is available at advertised times to answer queries and discuss<br />
progress with students.<br />
SYLLABUS CONTENT:<br />
Introduction to exchange rates and their relevance to multinational companies; currency systems<br />
around the world; currency crises; international parity relationships, purchasing power parity (PPP),<br />
interest rate parity, international Fisher effect; foreign exchange exposure measurement and<br />
management, transaction, translation and economic exposure; motives for hedging currency risk;<br />
foreign direct investment (FDI); international working capital management; international investment<br />
appraisal; political risk management; international corporate governance.<br />
-131-
MODULE CATALOGUE MODULE DESCRIPTIONS<br />
INDICATIVE READING LIST:<br />
Shapiro, A., Multinational Financial Management, 9th edition, John Wiley & Sons.<br />
Eiteman, D.K., Stonehill, A.I. and Moffett, M.H., Multinational <strong>Business</strong> Finance, 12th edition, Addison-<br />
Wesley.<br />
Buckley, A., Multinational Finance, 5th edition, FT Prentice Hall.<br />
Copeland, L. S., Exchange Rates and International Finance, 4th edition, FT Prentice Hall.<br />
Madura, J. and R. Fox, International Financial Management, Thomson.<br />
-132-
MODULE DESCRIPTIONS MODULE CATALOGUE<br />
INTERNATIONAL ECONOMIC HISTORY<br />
MODULE CODE: BS3556<br />
NUMBER OF CREDITS: 20<br />
SEMESTER: Autumn & Spring<br />
PROGRAMMES: BSc Accounting and Economics, BSc Econ Banking and Finance, BSc<br />
Econ <strong>Business</strong> Economics, BSc Econ Economics, BSc Economics and<br />
Management Studies, BSc Econ Economics and Politics, Economics<br />
and Humanities, BSc Econ Economics with a European Language,<br />
BSc Econ Banking & Finance with a European Language, BSc Econ<br />
<strong>Business</strong> Economics with a European Language.<br />
AIMS OF THE MODULE:<br />
The role of this optional module is to provide students with the historical background to their studies<br />
on other economics courses and to prepare them for post-graduate study in the discipline.<br />
The aim of the module is to analyse the historical development of different economic system since<br />
the mid nineteenth-century as exemplified by USA, Russia and the Soviet Union and Japan.<br />
LEARNING OUTCOMES OF THE MODULE<br />
On completion of the module a student should be able to<br />
A Knowledge and Understanding:<br />
• demonstrate a command of the main methodological tools used in the study of economic<br />
history<br />
• make use of the main secondary sources of historical data employed in the subject<br />
• demonstrate an overall knowledge and understanding of recent international economic<br />
history<br />
• undertake post-graduate study in economic history<br />
B Intellectual Skills:<br />
• synthesise and evaluate secondary data.<br />
• solve problems in the historical context.<br />
• exercise powers of inquiry, logic, critical analysis, interpretation and evaluation of arguments<br />
and evidence.<br />
• sustain a critical argument in writing.<br />
C Discipline Specific Skills:<br />
• apply theoretical concepts to explain the development of the modern economies of USA,<br />
Russia and Japan.<br />
D Transferable Skills:<br />
• to be able to seek out from libraries, databases or the Internet data of a statistical or<br />
documentary nature relevant to a particular topic of study.<br />
• to organise and formulate arguments based on this statistical and documentary data in<br />
answer to specific questions.<br />
• to make oral answers to specific questions and handle questioning from members of the<br />
group.<br />
• write assignments in a structured and well argued fashion.<br />
METHODS OF TEACHING AND LEARNING:<br />
Teaching will take place in the Autumn and Spring semesters. There will be approximately 33 hours<br />
of lectures and 9 hours of classes both divided equally between the three countries studied.<br />
-133-
MODULE CATALOGUE MODULE DESCRIPTIONS<br />
Students are provided with relevant data and other handouts (maps, glossaries, timelines, etc) and<br />
are encouraged to take notes during the lecture, and to ask questions while the lecture is in progress.<br />
Lecture summaries and powerpoint slides are posted on the internet Blackboard database to<br />
download.<br />
For each class, students are provided with reading material and a series of questions on a particular<br />
topic to which answers will be prepared in advance for discussion.<br />
Indicative study hours: 160<br />
ASSESSMENT:<br />
Examination Component 70%<br />
One 3 hour examination at the end of the Spring Semester<br />
Continuous Assessment 30%<br />
Three essays of 1500 words to be submitted in week 12 of the<br />
Autumn Semester, week 8 of the Spring Semester and week 11 of<br />
the Spring Semester<br />
Formal Assessment:<br />
The three assignments each count for 10% of the final mark. The assignments (one on each of the<br />
countries) require a thorough understanding of the topic derived from secondary reading. At this level<br />
the students are expected to include in their reading, recent research published in the leading<br />
journals.<br />
Summer Examination:<br />
The examination paper consists of one compulsory section (A) of 25 short answer questions, and a<br />
series of 12 questions divided into three sections (Sections B, C, D) based on the three countries<br />
studied, with four questions in each section. The exam is three hours long and is designed to test<br />
student’s understanding of underlying concepts, factual knowledge of the subject and the ability to<br />
order their thoughts, answer questions directly and relevantly and demonstrate their skill at written<br />
presentation.<br />
Informal Assessment:<br />
Informal assessment is provided through the class programme. Classes consist of a wide variety of<br />
questions/problems, based on lecture material but requiring further reading. The class questions are<br />
designed to get students to order their material and their own thoughts in order to answer specific<br />
questions in a focused and relevant manner.<br />
SYLLABUS CONTENT:<br />
The module sets out to describe and explain the economic developments experienced by USA, Russia<br />
and Japan since the mid nineteenth-century. For the USA, topics include the causes of economic<br />
growth; slavery; the importance of the railroads; the development of the banking system; the impact<br />
of the world wars; the Great Slump of the interwar period; the New Deal and the post-1945 era. For<br />
Russia, topics include the geographical and institutional restraints on economic development; the<br />
emancipation of the serfs; the role of the Tsarist state; war communism and the New Economic<br />
Policy; the collectivisation of agriculture; Stalin’s Five <strong>Year</strong> Plans; the impact of the first and second<br />
world wars and the failure of the reforms under Khrushchev and Gorbachev. For Japan, topics include<br />
the Tokugawa Shogunate; the Meiji reforms; the zaibatsu and big business; the role of the state; the<br />
colonial programme; the labour market; women’s economic roles; the war economy 1937-1945 and<br />
the post-1945 economic ‘miracle’.<br />
-134-
MODULE DESCRIPTIONS MODULE CATALOGUE<br />
INDICATIVE READING LIST:<br />
J. Hughes, American Economic History (Scott, Foreman, 1994).<br />
M.E. Falkus, The Industrialisation of Russia 1700-1914 (Macmillan, 1972).<br />
R.W. Davies, Soviet Economic Development from Lenin to Khrushchev (CUP, 1998).<br />
W.J. Macpherson, The Economic Development of Japan, c1868-1941 (Cambridge,<br />
1995).<br />
Robert C. Allen, Farm to Factory (Princeton, 2003)<br />
-135-
MODULE CATALOGUE MODULE DESCRIPTIONS<br />
INTERNATIONAL FINANCE<br />
MODULE CODE: BS3555<br />
NUMBER OF CREDITS: 20<br />
SEMESTER: Autumn & Spring<br />
PROGRAMMES: BSc Econ Banking and Finance, BSc Econ Accounting and Economics,<br />
BSc Econ Economics and Management Studies, BSc Econ Banking &<br />
Finance with a European Language, BSc Econ Economics.<br />
AIMS OF THE MODULE:<br />
The International Finance module aims to:<br />
• Describe, discuss and where appropriate perform numerical calculations relevant to, the use<br />
of currency derivatives for hedging, speculation and market pricing purposes.<br />
• Describe and discuss mainstream theories of international macroeconomics, exchange rate<br />
determination and market efficiency; and, where appropriate, comment upon their relevance<br />
to actual (observed) exchange rate movements.<br />
LEARNING OUTCOMES OF THE MODULE<br />
On completion of the module a student should be able to<br />
A Knowledge and Understanding:<br />
• understand the characteristics of international financial assets such as currency forward<br />
contracts, futures and currency options<br />
• be familiar with the concepts of risk, risk management, arbitrage and speculation.<br />
• understand the concepts of hedging and assets replication<br />
• have a thorough understanding of the main theories of pricing currency derivatives (forward<br />
contracts, futures and options).<br />
• have a thorough understanding of key concepts in exchange rate theory such as purchasing<br />
power parity and interest rate parity<br />
• appreciate the different theories of international macroeconomics and exchange rate<br />
determination (and their applications)<br />
• understand the efficient market hypothesis in the context of the foreign currency market and<br />
the main hypotheses explaining deviations from it.<br />
B Intellectual Skills:<br />
• Apply and evaluate different concepts of exchange rate risk and risk management<br />
• Analyse and evaluate different theories of international macroeconomics, exchange rate<br />
determination and market efficiency.<br />
C Discipline Specific Skills:<br />
• Apply models of exchange rate risk management to decision making in international finance<br />
• Compare the effects of monetary and real shocks under different exchange rate regimes<br />
• Illustrate and compare different theories of international macroeconomics and exchange rate<br />
determination<br />
• Apply the theory of market efficiency, as well as the hypotheses explaining deviations from it,<br />
to decision making in international finance.<br />
D Transferable Skills:<br />
• demonstrate an ability to undertake mathematical analysis of international financial issues<br />
• develop problem solving skills<br />
• develop analytical and learning skills through class work exercises<br />
• interpret real world international finance data<br />
METHODS OF TEACHING AND LEARNING:<br />
Teaching will take place in the Autumn and Spring semesters. There will be approximately 36 hours<br />
of lectures and 10 hours of classes. Students will be required to prepare and present class exercises<br />
-136-
MODULE DESCRIPTIONS MODULE CATALOGUE<br />
during the year.<br />
Students are expected to participate in classes. Class questions based on the material covered in<br />
lectures will be distributed to students in advance during lectures. Students will be expected to<br />
prepare answers in advance, and will also be expected to explain their answers during the classes.<br />
Questions will be asked in a variety of formats, mirroring those that the students can expect in the<br />
examinations, and will involve a mixture of theoretical and mathematical questions. These will<br />
generally require short answers, and will also involve examining the validity of statements, doing<br />
numerical calculations, and also providing a structure for answers to essay-type questions.<br />
Indicative study hours: 160<br />
ASSESSMENT:<br />
Continuous assessment: 30%<br />
2 class tests (15% each). One in week 7 of the Autumn semester and<br />
and one in week 4 of the Spring semester.<br />
Examination: 70%<br />
One 3 hour examination at the end of the Spring semester (70%)<br />
The class test in week 7 of the Autumn semester is designed to test students on their understanding<br />
of spot currency markets, exchange rate risk, the various ways through which this affects the pricing<br />
of foreign exchange derivative contracts (forward and futures); and the latter’s use for applications<br />
such as hedging, arbitrage and speculation. There are 4 questions in total; 2 questions in Section A<br />
and 2 questions in Section B. Students are asked to answer both questions from Section A and 1<br />
question from Section B. Section A, which comprises of computational questions, counts for 60 per<br />
cent of the examination mark. Section B, which includes questions involving applied and theoretical<br />
sub-questions, counts for 40 per cent.<br />
The class test in week 4 of the Spring semester is designed to test students on their understanding of<br />
currency option contracts, their pricing, and their use for the purposes of hedging, arbitrage and<br />
speculation. There are 3 questions in total; question 1 is compulsory; students are also asked to<br />
answer one question from questions 2 and 3. All questions carry equal marks.<br />
The examination at the end of the Spring semester is designed to test students on their<br />
understanding of spot currency markets and currency derivates (futures, forward and option<br />
contracts) taught in the Autumn Semester; and the theories of international macroeconomics,<br />
exchange rate determination and market efficiency taught during the Spring Semester. There are 7<br />
questions in total; 3 questions in Section A and 4 questions in Section B. Section A includes questions<br />
from the material taught in the Autumn Semester; section B includes questions from the material<br />
taught in the Spring Semester. Students are asked to answer 2 question from Section A and 3<br />
questions from Section B. Each question carries equal marks.<br />
SYLLABUS CONTENT:<br />
Autumn Semester<br />
Spot exchange markets, arbitrage and least cost dealing; forward contracts in perfect markets and<br />
imperfect markets; currency futures contracts; introduction to currency options; pricing currency<br />
options using the binomial and log-normal model.<br />
Spring Semester<br />
Exchange rate parity conditions (Uncovered Interest Parity and Purchasing Power Parity);<br />
Fundamentals’-based models of the exchange rate and the current account (Mundell-Fleming, the<br />
flexible price monetary model, the sticky-price monetary model and the portfolio balance model);<br />
Foreign exchange market efficiency.<br />
-137
MODULE CATALOGUE MODULE DESCRIPTIONS<br />
INDICATIVE READING LIST:<br />
Autumn Semester<br />
Sercu, P. (2009), International Finance: Theory into Practice, Princeton University Press<br />
Spring Semester<br />
Copeland L.S. (2008), Exchange Rates and International Finance, fifth edition, Addison-Wesley.<br />
Krugman P.R., Obstfeld M. And Melitz, M. (2011), International Economics: Theory and Policy, ninth<br />
edition, Pearson Education.<br />
-138-
MODULE DESCRIPTIONS MODULE CATALOGUE<br />
INTERNATIONAL HUMAN RESOURCE MANAGEMENT<br />
MODULE CODE: BS3740<br />
NUMBER OF CREDITS: 20<br />
SEMESTER: Autumn & Spring<br />
PROGRAMMES: BSc <strong>Business</strong> Management, BSc <strong>Business</strong> Management (Human<br />
Resources), BSc <strong>Business</strong> Management (International Management),<br />
BSc <strong>Business</strong> Management (Logistics & Operations), BSc <strong>Business</strong><br />
Management (Marketing), BSc <strong>Business</strong> Management with a<br />
European Language, BSc Econ Accounting and Management, BSc<br />
<strong>Business</strong> Studies with Japanese, BSc <strong>Business</strong> Management &<br />
Finance.<br />
AIMS OF THE MODULE:<br />
The module explores with students how the management of people has an international dimension<br />
and seeks to develop knowledge and understanding of HR practices within international employing<br />
organisations. The module also makes evident to students that HRM practices must be regarded<br />
within an international political economy, focusing on how nation states, civic organisations, global<br />
business activities and transnational bodies shape contemporary HRM practices.<br />
LEARNING OUTCOMES OF THE MODULE<br />
On completion of the module a student should be able to<br />
A. Knowledge and Understanding<br />
• Demonstrate knowledge and understanding of the process of managing human resources in<br />
international organisations<br />
• Demonstrate knowledge and understanding of the context that shapes international HRM,<br />
including the strategies and structures of firms, the institutions and cultures of host countries,<br />
the international regulatory environment, and international trade unionism and the new social<br />
movements<br />
B. Intellectual Skills:<br />
• This module will encourage students to develop a critical approach to ideas and evidence<br />
encountered in the module of study.<br />
• The assessed essay and examination require students to demonstrate a knowledge of, and an<br />
ability to synthesise and evaluate the relative merits of different arguments in each of the<br />
main areas of the syllabus.<br />
C. Discipline Specific Skills:<br />
• Students taking the module will be required to communicate effectively and read and<br />
interpret theoretical and research-based literature on aspects of international HRM and<br />
international employment relations.<br />
• Students will also acquire an ability to evaluate and formulate policies relating to the<br />
management of workforces in international organisations, including conformance to<br />
international labour standards.<br />
D. Transferable Skills:<br />
• Students taking the module will develop a series of advanced learning skills.<br />
• There is an emphasis on good oral communication within tutorials and a particular stress is<br />
placed on the development of effective writing skills.<br />
• Students will work in groups to complete tutorial exercises, allowing team-working skills to be<br />
nurtured and there is an emphasis on developing research skills through the use of internet<br />
and other electronic sources in tutorial exercises.<br />
• General study skills will be developed through the use of lectures, tutorials and reading lists<br />
and through the preparation of an assignment and completion of the examination.<br />
• Students will refine word-processing skills by submitting an assignment with an accent on<br />
imaginative presentation.<br />
-139-
MODULE CATALOGUE MODULE DESCRIPTIONS<br />
METHODS OF TEACHING AND LEARNING:<br />
This module will rely upon a student-centred and active learning approach to teaching. Students<br />
develop the necessary insights and skills to allow them to become independent learners. Tutorial and<br />
lecture activities are planned carefully so that they not only impart necessary information and<br />
knowledge but allow students to participate in the learning process and develop their competencies.<br />
High expectations will be communicated to students in order to build esteem and promote effective<br />
performance. The module will employ a diverse range of teaching methodologies and techniques and<br />
there will be a deliberate effort to avoid lectures and tutorials becoming formulaic and predictable.<br />
The module will consist of 40 hours of lectures and 10 hours of tutorials.<br />
Indicative study hours: 160<br />
ASSESSMENT:<br />
Examination Component 60%<br />
One 3 hour examination at the end of the Spring Semester<br />
Continuous Assessment 40%<br />
One essay/report of 3000 words in length completed in the first<br />
semester to be submitted in week 11 of the autumn semester.<br />
The extent of student reading and knowledge of the subject is formally assessed in the examination<br />
and assessed essay/report components of the module. Oral communication is informally assessed via<br />
comments given to students on presentations and discussions in tutorials. Comments are made on<br />
the presentation and content of word-processed assessed work, using agreed criteria and there is<br />
overall feedback on the assignment given to the group. Both mechanisms allow for formative<br />
assessment. Informal assessment is made of the depth and quality of the material gathered for<br />
tutorial work and individual and group activities are informally assessed with comments relating to the<br />
strengths and weaknesses of student performance.<br />
The examination will be of three hours in length and will require students to answer three questions,<br />
at least one of which will relate to the first semester’s work. The assignment will consist of a<br />
substantial individual piece of work (essay or report) of 3000 words in length<br />
SYLLABUS CONTENT:<br />
Globalisation, international competition and employment; International HRM and the HR manager in a<br />
global economy; International labour standards; European social models and HRM; Varieties of<br />
capitalism; National systems of employment and HRM (Japan, USA, Spain and Asian models); Beyond<br />
national models – pressures for change of IHRM; Industrial patterns of HRM (civil aviation and auto<br />
manufacturing); The convergence of IHRM; Training and education of employees; Corporate social<br />
responsibility; Work organization; Expatriation: Staffing the multinational companies; International<br />
management development<br />
INDICATIVE READING LIST:<br />
Edwards, T. and C. Rees (2006) International Human Resource Management: Globalisation, National<br />
Systems and Multinational Companies, Prentice Hall.<br />
Harzing, A-W. and H. Van Ruysseveldt (eds.) (2004) International Human Resource Management,<br />
Sage.<br />
General Reading<br />
Bamber, G. et al (2004) International and Comparative Industrial Relations, Sage.<br />
Boyer, R. et al (eds.) (1998) Between Imitation and Innovation: The Transfer and Hybridization of<br />
Productive Models in the International Automobile Industry,<br />
Oxford University Press.<br />
Brewster, C. et al (2007) International Human Resource Management, CIPD.<br />
Briscoe, D. et al (2009) International Human Resource Management: Policies and Practices for the<br />
Global Enterprise, Routledge.<br />
Brown, P. et al (2001) High Skills: Globalisation, Competitiveness and Skill Formation, Oxford<br />
-140-
MODULE DESCRIPTIONS MODULE CATALOGUE<br />
University Press.<br />
Budhwar, P. (ed.) (2004) Managing Human Resources in Asia-Pacific, Routledge.<br />
Dowling, P. and D. E. Welch (2004) International Human Resource Management: Managing People in<br />
a Multinational Context, Thomson Learning.<br />
Dowling, P. et al (2008) International Human Resource Management, Thomson.<br />
Eaton, J. (2000) Comparative Employment Relations: An Introduction, Polity Press.<br />
Ferner, A. and R. Hyman (eds.) (1998) Changing Industrial Relations in the New Europe, Blackwell.<br />
Hall, P. and D. Soskice (eds.) (2001) Varieties of Capitalism, Oxford University Press.<br />
Hyman, R. (2001) Understanding European Trade Unionism, Sage.<br />
Lucas, R. et al (2006) Human Resource Management in an International Context, CIPD.<br />
Morley, M.J. et al (eds.) (2006) Global Industrial Relations, Routledge.<br />
Ozbilgin, M. (2005) International Human Resource Management, Palgrave.<br />
Parker, B. (1998) Globalization and <strong>Business</strong> Practice: Managing Across Boundaries, Sage.<br />
Roozendahl, G. (2002) Trade Unions and Global Governance, Continuum.<br />
Scullion, H. et al (2005) International Human Resource Management, Palgrave.<br />
Scullion, H. (2006) Global Staffing, Routledge.<br />
Tayeb, M. (2005) International Human Resource Management: A Multinational Company Perspective,<br />
Oxford University Press.<br />
Students will be expected to make use of relevant journals including:<br />
British Journal of Industrial Relations<br />
Bulletin of Comparative Labour Relations<br />
European Journal of Industrial Relations<br />
International Journal of Human Resource Management<br />
Politics and Society<br />
-141-
MODULE CATALOGUE MODULE DESCRIPTIONS<br />
INTERNATIONAL TRADE<br />
MODULE CODE: BS3568<br />
NUMBER OF CREDITS: 20<br />
SEMESTER: Autumn & Spring<br />
PROGRAMMES: BSc Econ Accounting & Economics, BSc Econ Banking & Finance, BSc<br />
Econ <strong>Business</strong> Economics, BSc Econ Economics, BSc Economics with<br />
a European Language, BSc Econ Economics and Management<br />
Studies, BSc Econ Economics & Sociology, BSc Econ Economics &<br />
Politics, BSc Econ Economics & Humanities, BSc Econ Banking and<br />
Finance, BSc Econ Banking and Finance with A European Language,<br />
BSc Econ <strong>Business</strong> Economics with a European Language.<br />
AIMS OF THE MODULE:<br />
The International Trade module aims to provide students with a sound understanding of the method,<br />
content and scope of International Trade, a basic knowledge of the world trading system, and an<br />
appreciation of current trade policy issues.<br />
LEARNING OUTCOMES OF THE MODULE<br />
On completion of the module a student should be able to<br />
A Knowledge and Understanding:<br />
• understand the pattern of world trade, and the institutions and rules of the world trading<br />
system<br />
• understand the main models of international trade and how they can be applied to the analysis<br />
of trade policy<br />
• understand and know about current trade policy issues<br />
• understand the implications of empirical tests of international trade models<br />
B Intellectual Skills:<br />
• apply general equilibrium analysis from microeconomics to the analysis of international trade<br />
problems<br />
• use models of imperfect competition and basic game theory to analyse international trade<br />
• compare different models of international trade and assess their validity in terms of coherence<br />
of the theory and the empirical evidence<br />
C Discipline Specific Skills:<br />
• derive the key results of the main international trade models and use them to analyse trade<br />
policy issues<br />
• analyse and assess the positive and normative implications of trade policy<br />
• assess the arguments about free trade and protectionism<br />
D Transferable Skills:<br />
• listen to and read the economic literature, from journal articles to newspaper commentaries<br />
• write coherently on major economic issues<br />
• work independently on economic problems, managing their time and resources efficiently<br />
• operate in small groups, sharing ideas and reaching collective views<br />
• develop logical arguments and make sensible decision as to their value<br />
• deliver lucid presentations on economic research and current policy<br />
METHODS OF TEACHING AND LEARNING:<br />
Teaching will consist of 36 hours of lectures and 9 hours of tutorials. Lectures are used to identify the<br />
main issues and to present the analytical models of international trade and trade policy. Tutorials are<br />
used for students to apply the models to the solution of analytical problems in international trade,<br />
and to discuss policy issues and empirical research.<br />
Indicative study hours: 160<br />
-142-
MODULE DESCRIPTIONS MODULE CATALOGUE<br />
ASSESSMENT:<br />
Examination Component: 100%<br />
One 2 hour examination at the end of the Autumn semester (30%)<br />
and a 3 hour examination at the end of the Spring semester (70%)<br />
SYLLABUS CONTENT:<br />
Introduction to International Trade: overview of international trade. Conventional Trade Theories:<br />
mercantilism; absolute advantage; comparative advantage and the gains from trade; the neoclassical<br />
model, offer curves and the terms of trade; the Heckscher-Ohlin-Samuelson model (Heckscher-Ohlin,<br />
Rybczynski, Stolper-Samuelson and factor-price equalisation theorems). Imperfect Competition and<br />
International Trade: intra-industry trade; international trade under oligopoly; product differentiation,<br />
economies of scale and monopolisitic competition. Empirical testing of trade theories. Trade policy:<br />
history and principles of the GATT and the WTO. Analysis of Trade policy: tariffs, export taxes and<br />
subsidies in a small country; tariffs in a large country and the optimum tariff argument; domestic<br />
distortions and the theory of second-best; quotas and voluntary export restraints; dumping and antidumping<br />
duties. Strategic Trade Policy: rent-extracting tariffs and profit-shifting export subsidies.<br />
Economic Integration: the theory of customs unions; the Kemp-Wan proposition; trade blocs and<br />
regionalism. Growth and Trade: economic growth and the terms of trade. International Factor<br />
Movements: capital mobility and the migration of labour. Multinationals and Foreign Direct<br />
Investment: Ownership, Location and Internalization; oligopoly models of multinationals and FDI.<br />
INDICATIVE READING LIST:<br />
D.R. Appleyard, A.J. Field and S.L. Cobb, International Economics, 7th<br />
Edition, McGraw-Hill, 2009<br />
J.R. Markusen, J.R. Melvin, W.H. Kaempfer and K.E. Maskus, International Trade: Theory and<br />
Evidence, McGraw-Hill, 1995.<br />
-143-
MODULE CATALOGUE MODULE DESCRIPTIONS<br />
JAPANESE MANAGEMENT SYSTEMS<br />
MODULE CODE: BS3530<br />
NUMBER OF CREDITS: 20<br />
SEMESTER: Autumn & Spring<br />
PROGRAMMES: BSc <strong>Business</strong> Studies with Japanese, BSc <strong>Business</strong> Management, BSc<br />
<strong>Business</strong> Management (Human Resources), BSc <strong>Business</strong><br />
Management (International Management), BSc <strong>Business</strong><br />
Management (Logistics and Operations).<br />
AIMS OF THE MODULE:<br />
This module is designed to provide students with an understanding of a variety of concepts and<br />
issues that are related to Japanese Management systems, as applied to their development in Japan<br />
and in an international context. The aim of the module is to develop understanding of theories that<br />
have been developed to examine Japanese Management systems and knowledge of their primary<br />
elements.<br />
LEARNING OUTCOMES OF THE MODULE<br />
On completion of the module a student should be able to<br />
A. Knowledge and Understanding<br />
• Identify the particular political, economic and social forces that underline the development of<br />
Japanese management systems;<br />
• Display an understanding of the historical development of the Japanese economy;<br />
• Assess the role of the state in the industrial development of Japan;<br />
• Critically analyse the industrial relations and HRM practices in Japan;<br />
• Evaluate how Japanese Management systems have been transferred abroad;<br />
• Identify organisational features associated with Japanese Management systems<br />
• Assess the dynamics of change in the Japanese Management system<br />
B. Transferable Skills:<br />
• Apply relevant theories to Japanese Management systems<br />
• Critically analyse empirical material<br />
C. Intellectual Skills:<br />
• To critically explore contemporary Japanese Management from a range of contrasting<br />
frameworks<br />
D. Transferable Skills:<br />
• Have a range of written and oral skills to help in future career development in management<br />
• Work effectively in groups<br />
• Apply key tenets of reflective practice to problem solving<br />
• Effective use of a range of methods of communication in analysing contemporary Japanese<br />
Management<br />
• Develop a range of analytical skills in examining Japanese Management<br />
METHODS OF TEACHING AND LEARNING:<br />
The formal timetable comprises of 35 hours of lectures and 10 hours of classes. The lecture<br />
programme is supported by photocopied handouts based on Powerpoint lecture slides and<br />
recommended reading for each subject. Students are supported throughout the module programme<br />
through advertised weekly consultation sessions with the programme lecturers. Additional one-to-one<br />
sessions between the lecturer and student(s) are accommodated following the delivery of the weekly<br />
lecture and by means of email correspondence.<br />
Indicative study hours: 160<br />
-144-
MODULE DESCRIPTIONS MODULE CATALOGUE<br />
ASSESSMENT:<br />
Examination Component 60%<br />
Continuous Assessment 40%<br />
One 3 hour examination at the end of the Spring Semester<br />
One essay of 3000 words to be submitted in week 10 of the Autumn<br />
Semester<br />
Summative assessment is based on an essay assignment and end-of-module examination. Both are<br />
designed to assess the extent to which students have achieved the module’s learning outcomes.<br />
Principally, the assessments are designed to determine whether students can critically evaluate the<br />
theoretical models and identify the key empirical issues facing managers and policy makers in Japan.<br />
Students’ ability to develop a coherent argument based on empirical evidence is also assessed<br />
through the written essay assignment.<br />
Verbal presentation skills are evaluated during the class sessions when individual and collective<br />
presentations are prepared and delivered before class members. During these sessions the lecturer<br />
provides students with constructive feedback on their delivery style and presentation structure.<br />
Informal feedback and formative assessment is provided to all students requesting advice with<br />
regards to essay structure and the revision programme.<br />
SYLLABUS CONTENT:<br />
The themes covered include:<br />
The political economy of Japan; Japan’s economic and industrial history; the role of the state in<br />
Japanese economic growth; the role of financial capital; globalisation of Japanese industry; Japanese<br />
trade and foreign direct investment; Japanese manufacturing systems; total quality management and<br />
just-in-time production; interorganisational relationships; Japanese HRM and industrial relations<br />
systems; the transfer of Japanese Management systems.<br />
INDICATIVE READING LIST:<br />
Harukiyo H and Hook G (1998) Japanese <strong>Business</strong> Management, London: Routledge<br />
Berggren C and Nomura M (1997) The Resilience of Corporate Japan, London: PCP<br />
Kono T and Clegg S (2001) Trends in Japanese Management, London: Palgrave<br />
Preston PW (2000) Understanding Modern Japan, London: Sage<br />
Morris-Suzuki T (1998) Re-inventing Japan, London: M E Sharpe<br />
Flath D (2000) The Japanese Economy, Oxford: Oxford University Press<br />
Yamamura K and Streeck W (eds) (2003) The End of Diversity? Prospects for German and Japanese<br />
Capitalism, Ithica: Cornell University Press<br />
Bailey D, Coffe D and Tomlinson P (2007) Crisis or Recovery in Japan: State and Industrial Economy,<br />
Cheltenham: Edward Elgar<br />
-145-
MODULE CATALOGUE MODULE DESCRIPTIONS<br />
LABOUR ECONOMICS<br />
MODULE CODE: BS3558<br />
NUMBER OF CREDITS: 20<br />
SEMESTER: Autumn & Spring<br />
PROGRAMMES: BSc Econ Accounting and Economics, BSc Econ Banking and Finance,<br />
BSc Econ Banking & Finance with a European Language, BSc Econ<br />
Economics, BSc Econ <strong>Business</strong> Economics, BSc Econ <strong>Business</strong><br />
Economics with a European Language, BSc Econ Economics with a<br />
European Language, BSc Econ Economics & Politics, BA Economics<br />
with Humanities.<br />
AIMS OF THE MODULE:<br />
The Labour Economics module provides students with the opportunity to build on the theoretical<br />
analysis and the quantitative techniques introduced in the <strong>Year</strong> 2 modules by applying what they<br />
have learnt to examining the workings of the UK labour market. Specifically, its role is to develop<br />
intermediate microeconomic and macroeconomic analysis to investigate the nature, causes and<br />
implications of unemployment and wage differentials. The module introduces the results of empirical<br />
work in order to evaluate both economists’ explanations of labour market behaviour and alternative<br />
policy options for improving performance.<br />
The Labour Economics module aims to provide students with a sound understanding of the method,<br />
content and scope of Labour Economics, a basic knowledge of the workings of the UK Labour Market,<br />
and an appreciation of current problems and policies.<br />
LEARNING OUTCOMES OF THE MODULE<br />
On completion of the module a student should be able to<br />
A Knowledge and Understanding:<br />
• identify the main structural changes taking place in the UK Labour Market, and to outline the<br />
trends in the central Labour Market outcomes<br />
• recognise the contribution of economic theory to Labour Market analysis, and to relate the<br />
models they encounter to observed outcomes<br />
• access the main forms and sources of data on the Labour Market, and to apply UK data to<br />
topics they have covered<br />
• outline the main sources of Labour Market distortions and failures, and to demonstrate their<br />
importance<br />
B Intellectual Skills:<br />
• report and explain the main findings of Labour Economics empirical research on topics they<br />
have covered<br />
• understand the role of empirical evidence in Labour Economics in elucidating specific debates<br />
• grasp the distinction between alternative explanations of Labour Markets outcomes, but be<br />
able to bring together their insights to improve understanding<br />
• appreciate the main policy initiatives to improve Labour Market performance, and to evaluate<br />
the options<br />
C Discipline Specific Skills:<br />
• apply basic labour economics concepts and ideas to a range of labour market issues<br />
• use theoretical analysis to identify the key issues raised by problematic market outcomes<br />
• work out how best to rigorously investigate specific aspects of labour market behaviour<br />
D Transferable Skills:<br />
• listen to and read effectively economic literature, from journal articles to newspaper<br />
commentaries<br />
• write coherently on major economic issues<br />
• introduce statistical results into economic discussions<br />
• work independently on economic problems, managing their time and resources efficiently<br />
• operate in small groups, sharing ideas and reaching collective views<br />
-146-
MODULE DESCRIPTIONS MODULE CATALOGUE<br />
• develop logical arguments and make sensible decision as to their value<br />
• deliver lucid presentations on economic research and current policy<br />
METHODS OF TEACHING AND LEARNING:<br />
Teaching takes place in the Autumn and Spring semesters. There are approximately 34 hours of<br />
lectures and 12 hours of classes covering 8 core topics.<br />
Staff have produced a series of background papers which cover the theoretical and technical material<br />
relating to some of the topics covered. Students are advised to work on these first and foremost.<br />
Thereafter students are encouraged to move on to journal articles and in particular to articles from<br />
the empirical literature.<br />
Lectures are used to identify the structure of each topic, cover the more difficult technical material<br />
and introduce relevant interesting extensions and applications. The classes are a combination of<br />
workshops and seminars. In the workshops students work in small groups on set problems related to<br />
the lecture theoretical material. The students have the opportunity to get to know one another and<br />
to develop their group/communication skills. The seminars cover the empirical work associated with<br />
each topic. Students prepare and deliver oral presentations with overheads and handouts of their<br />
(individual and group) work on set readings from the empirical literature. They thus have the<br />
opportunity to develop their presentation/communication skills as well as their understanding of the<br />
applied elements of labour economics.<br />
Indicative study hours: 160<br />
ASSESSMENT:<br />
Examination Component 70%<br />
One 3 hour examination in the Spring Semester<br />
Continuous Assessment 30%<br />
Two assignments to be submitted in week 12 of the Autumn<br />
Semester and week 11 of the Spring Semester<br />
In terms of informal assessment, working with small groups within the workshops and seminars,<br />
enables staff the opportunity to gauge the abilities, work and character of each student on the<br />
module. The module encourages a variety of discipline specific and core skills. Much of the work on<br />
the module is student driven, so students have ample opportunity to demonstrate their skills.<br />
The assignments require the integration and assessment of economic theory and empirical material.<br />
The examination paper requires the student to solve problems using the theoretical and technical<br />
material they have met. This allows students to demonstrate their intellectual skills in synthesis. The<br />
questions require the application of labour economics to specific aspects of unemployment and wage<br />
differentials. This encourages/allows students to demonstrate their intellectual skills in evaluation.<br />
Together the informal and formal assessment activities allow staff to identify whether the module’s<br />
learning outcomes are being realised.<br />
SYLLABUS CONTENT:<br />
The Labour Market and Trade Unions; modelling & estimating the union mark up and the effects of<br />
unions on productivity, profits etc. The Labour Market and Structural Change: mismatch, structural<br />
change and labour market flexibility. The Internal Labour Market; productivity and efficiency wages,<br />
structured internal labour markets. Labour Market Dynamics; flows, duration, hysterisis, long term<br />
unemployment, & Insider/Outsider analysis. The Distribution of Earnings; compensating wage<br />
differentials, Human Capital theory. Explaining Male/Female Earnings Differentials; discrimination,<br />
segmentation and the UK wage differential. Personnel Economics; Human Resource Management,<br />
high performance work systems, performance related pay as an incentive system.<br />
INDICATIVE READING LIST:<br />
T Boeri and J Van Ours The Economics of Imperfect Labour Markets Princeton University Press<br />
S Polachek & W S Siebert The Economics of Earnings Cambridge University Press<br />
-147-
MODULE CATALOGUE MODULE DESCRIPTIONS<br />
LANGUAGE SKILLS FOR PROFESSIONALS - FRENCH<br />
MODULE CODE: BS3701<br />
NUMBER OF CREDITS: 20<br />
SEMESTER: Autumn & Spring<br />
PROGRAMMES: BSc Accounting with a European Language, BSc <strong>Business</strong><br />
Management with a European Language and BSc Econ Economics<br />
with a European Language<br />
AIMS OF THE MODULE:<br />
The aim of this module is to equip students with the necessary language employability skills, together<br />
with an understanding of employment issues in the EU context to be able to work in French speaking<br />
countries.<br />
LEARNING OUTCOMES OF THE MODULE<br />
On completion of the module a student should be able to<br />
A Knowledge and Understanding:<br />
• show their ability to apply for jobs in French speaking countries by participating in simulated<br />
situations and producing written work with a near native linguistic competence,<br />
• demonstrate their understanding of employment organisations in the EU context,<br />
• demonstrate their ability to read and comprehend official documents by commenting<br />
intelligently on their contents, both orally and in writing,<br />
• demonstrate their presentational skills in French by giving business presentations and<br />
participating.<br />
B Intellectual Skills:<br />
• extract and synthesise key information from written and spoken sources,<br />
• engage in constructive and critical assessment of ideas and arguments.<br />
C Discipline Specific Skills:<br />
• demonstrate their ability to express themselves creatively and fluently on a wide range of<br />
topics business related within the framework of a structured and reasoned argument,<br />
• demonstrate their ability to communicate in writing by effectively applying analytical and<br />
problem solving skills,<br />
• demonstrate their ability to extract and analyse detailed information from spoken sources,<br />
• make effective use of language reference materials, to refine knowledge and understanding<br />
of register, nuances of meaning and language use.<br />
D Transferable Skills:<br />
• show an ability to work creatively and flexibly with other as part of a team,<br />
• show effective use of mediating skills and qualities of empathy.<br />
METHODS OF TEACHING AND LEARNING:<br />
There will be 48 hours of language workshops during which students will work in small groups using<br />
authentic documents published by the European Union.<br />
Indicative study hours: 160<br />
ASSESSMENT:<br />
Examination component 50%<br />
One 2 hour written examination at the end of the Spring Semester<br />
Continuous assessment 50%<br />
One oral presentation 20%<br />
One 20-minute oral presentation 15%<br />
One 30-minute aural test 15%<br />
-148-
MODULE DESCRIPTIONS MODULE CATALOGUE<br />
SYLLABUS CONTENT:<br />
Extensive use of the Internet to obtain EU documentation; documentation from French business<br />
magazines and textbooks; intensive practise of translation and interpreting skills; legal documentation<br />
on the French job market; case studies.<br />
INDICATIVE READING LIST:<br />
Les Notices – L’Union Européenne, La documentation Française, Paris 1999.<br />
Access to a selection of French newspapers and magazines:<br />
www.cardiff.ac.uk/learn/languages/french<br />
-149-
MODULE CATALOGUE MODULE DESCRIPTIONS<br />
LANGUAGE SKILLS FOR PROFESSIONALS - SPANISH<br />
MODULE CODE: BS3711<br />
NUMBER OF CREDITS: 20<br />
SEMESTER: Autumn & Spring<br />
PROGRAMMES: BSc Accounting with a European Language, BSc <strong>Business</strong><br />
Management with a European Language and BSc Economics with a<br />
European Language<br />
AIMS OF THE MODULE:<br />
The aim of this module is to equip students with the necessary language employability skills, together<br />
with an understanding of employment issues in the EU context to be able to work in Spanish speaking<br />
countries.<br />
LEARNING OUTCOMES OF THE MODULE<br />
On completion of the module a student should be able to<br />
A Knowledge and Understanding:<br />
• show their ability to apply for jobs in Spanish speaking countries by participating in simulated<br />
situations and producing written work with a near native linguistic competence.<br />
• demonstrate their understanding of employment organisations in the EU context.<br />
• demonstrate their ability to read and comprehend official documents by commenting<br />
intelligently on their contents, both orally and in writing.<br />
• demonstrate their presentational skills in Spanish by giving business<br />
B Intellectual Skills:<br />
• extract and synthesise key information from written and spoken sources,<br />
• engage in constructive and critical assessment of ideas and arguments.<br />
C Discipline Specific Skills:<br />
• demonstrate their ability to express themselves creatively and fluently on a wide range of<br />
topics business related within the framework of a structured and reasoned argument,<br />
• demonstrate their ability to communicate in writing by effectively applying analytical and<br />
problem solving skills,<br />
• demonstrate their ability to extract and analyse detailed information from spoken sources,<br />
• make effective use of language reference materials, to refine knowledge and understanding<br />
of register, nuances of meaning and language use.<br />
D Transferable Skills:<br />
• show an ability to work creatively and flexibly with other as part of a team,<br />
• show effective use of mediating skills and qualities of empathy.<br />
METHODS OF TEACHING AND LEARNING:<br />
There will be 48 hours of language workshops during which students will work in small groups using<br />
authentic documents published by the European Union.<br />
Indicative study hours: 160<br />
ASSESSMENT:<br />
Examination component 50%<br />
One 2 hour written examination at the end of the Spring Semester<br />
Continuous assessment 50%<br />
One oral presentation 20%<br />
One 20-minute oral presentation 15%<br />
One 30-minute aural test 15%<br />
-150-
MODULE DESCRIPTIONS MODULE CATALOGUE<br />
SYLLABUS CONTENT:<br />
Extensive use of the Internet to obtain EU documentation; documentation from Spanish business<br />
magazines and textbooks; intensive practise of translation and interpreting skills; legal documentation<br />
on the Spanish job market; case studies.<br />
INDICATIVE READING LIST:<br />
Aguirre Beltran B, 1998, El Espanol por profesiones, 1 La Empresa, S.A.<br />
1993, Dictionary of <strong>Business</strong>, English-Spanish, Spanish-English, Peter Collin Publishing<br />
Journals:<br />
Emprendedores, Muy Interesante, Puerto del Sol<br />
Access to a selection of Spanish newspapers and magazines:<br />
www.cardiff.ac.uk/learn/languages/spanish<br />
-151-
MODULE CATALOGUE MODULE DESCRIPTIONS<br />
LANGUAGE SKILLS FOR PROFESSIONALS - GERMAN<br />
MODULE CODE: BS3721<br />
NUMBER OF CREDITS: 20<br />
SEMESTER: Autumn & Spring<br />
PROGRAMMES: BSc Accounting with a European Language, BSc <strong>Business</strong><br />
Management with a European Language and BSc Economics with a<br />
European Language<br />
AIMS OF THE MODULE:<br />
The aim of this module is to equip students with the necessary language employability skills, together<br />
with an understanding of employment issues in the EU context to be able to work in German<br />
speaking countries.<br />
LEARNING OUTCOMES OF THE MODULE<br />
On completion of the module a student should be able to<br />
A Knowledge and Understanding:<br />
• show their ability to apply for jobs in German speaking countries by participating in simulated<br />
situations and producing written work with a near native linguistic competence.<br />
• demonstrate their understanding of employment organisations in the EU context.<br />
• demonstrate their ability to read and comprehend official documents by commenting<br />
intelligently on their contents, both orally and in writing.<br />
• demonstrate their presentational skills in German by giving business presentation.<br />
B Intellectual Skills:<br />
• extract and synthesise key information from written and spoken sources,<br />
• engage in constructive and critical assessment of ideas and arguments.<br />
C Discipline Specific Skills:<br />
• demonstrate their ability to express themselves creatively and fluently on a wide range of<br />
topics business related within the framework of a structured and reasoned argument,<br />
• demonstrate their ability to communicate in writing by effectively applying analytical and<br />
problem solving skills,<br />
• demonstrate their ability to extract and analyse detailed information from spoken sources,<br />
• make effective use of language reference materials, to refine knowledge and understanding<br />
of register, nuances of meaning and language use.<br />
D Transferable Skills:<br />
• show an ability to work creatively and flexibly with other as part of a team,<br />
• show effective use of mediating skills and qualities of empathy.<br />
METHODS OF TEACHING AND LEARNING:<br />
There will be 48 hours of language workshops during which students will work in small groups using<br />
authentic documents published by the European Union.<br />
Indicative study hours: 160<br />
ASSESSMENT:<br />
Examination component 50%<br />
One 2 hour written examination at the end of the Spring Semester<br />
Continuous assessment 50%<br />
One oral test 20%<br />
One 20-minute oral 15%<br />
One 30-minute aural test 15%<br />
-152-
MODULE DESCRIPTIONS MODULE CATALOGUE<br />
SYLLABUS CONTENT:<br />
Extensive use of the Internet to obtain EU documentation; documentation from German business<br />
magazines and textbooks; intensive practise of translation and interpreting skills; legal documentation<br />
on the German job market; case studies.<br />
INDICATIVE READING LIST:<br />
Renner Sachs, 1987, Economic Terminology, Hueber<br />
Seel H, 1999, Deutschland in Europa-Europa in Deutschland, Inter Nationes<br />
Access to a selection of German newspapers and magazines:<br />
www.cardiff.ac.uk/learn/languages/german<br />
-153-
MODULE CATALOGUE MODULE DESCRIPTIONS<br />
MACROECONOMIC ANALYSIS<br />
MODULE CODE: BS3565<br />
NUMBER OF CREDITS: 20<br />
SEMESTER: Autumn & Spring<br />
PROGRAMMES: BSc Econ Accounting & Economics, BSc Econ Economics, BSc Econ<br />
Economics with a European Language, BSc Econ Economics and<br />
Finance, BSc Econ Economics and Management Studies, BSc Econ<br />
Economics & Politics<br />
AIMS OF THE MODULE:<br />
The Macroeconomic Theory module aims to:<br />
• provide students with a thorough understanding of the method, content and scope of<br />
macroeconomic analysis.<br />
• stimulate students to appreciate the value of economic analysis in understanding the behaviour of<br />
the economy.<br />
• give students a firm foundation of knowledge about the policy issues facing the UK and other<br />
governments in respect of monetary and fiscal affairs.<br />
• encourage, through the study, teaching and learning of the module, a range of transferable<br />
subject-specific and core skills that will be of value to students in future education and in their<br />
subsequent careers.<br />
• progress students’ intellectual development, through teaching and learning, beyond<br />
comprehension and application to analysis.<br />
LEARNING OUTCOMES OF THE MODULE<br />
On completion of the module a student should be able to<br />
A Knowledge and Understanding:<br />
• understand models of the economy and the theoretical and empirical work that has led to<br />
their evolution.<br />
• be familiar with the policy debates about monetary and fiscal stabilisation - ineffectiveness,<br />
time-inconsistency, and the Lucas Critique.<br />
B Intellectual Skills:<br />
• be aware of the various macroeconomic theories that have been held by economists since<br />
classical times.<br />
C Discipline Specific Skills:<br />
• be able to solve models and carry out simulation of shocks on them, using algebra and<br />
diagrams.<br />
• understand how to integrate macroeconomic theories into the open economy and solve a<br />
basic open economy macro model.<br />
D Transferable Skills:<br />
• be able to solve models and carry out simulation of shocks on them, using algebra and<br />
diagrams.<br />
• be familiar with the policy debates about monetary and fiscal stabilisation - ineffectiveness,<br />
time-inconsistency, and the Lucas Critique.<br />
METHODS OF TEACHING AND LEARNING:<br />
This is a double module consisting of 2 lectures and 1 class per week. Total contact hours 60 approx<br />
Study requirement per week in addition estimated at 10 hours per week for an average student.<br />
This course requires mastery of diagrammatic and algebraic analysis of macroeconomic models of the<br />
economy in a simplified form. For this reason the students must spend a great deal of time practising<br />
these techniques both before and in class. During lectures they have to assimilate the methods as<br />
well as absorbing general information about the subject.<br />
-154-
MODULE DESCRIPTIONS MODULE CATALOGUE<br />
Indicative study hours: 160<br />
ASSESSMENT:<br />
Examination Component 100%<br />
One 2 hour examination at the end of the Autumn Semester<br />
One 3 hour examination at the end of the Spring Semester<br />
The 2-hour exam is designed to test the ability to solve models of adaptive and rational expectations.<br />
It consists of two problems, each being a simple model of the economy which must be solved and its<br />
implications commented upon much of the first semester’s effort is devoted to learning these<br />
techniques so that the students can themselves apply analysis of policy to models. The final<br />
examination (3 hours, 4 essays) tests their ability to evaluate the role of policy in the economy and to<br />
analyse the effects of shocks on the economy.<br />
SYLLABUS CONTENT:<br />
Foundations of macro-the Classical Model<br />
Aggregate demand and supply and the workings of the Classical system.<br />
The Keynesian model and the Neo-Classical Synthesis<br />
The development of the IS/LM model; the expectations-augmented Phillips Curve and the<br />
Accelerationist Hypothesis; adaptive expectations and monetarism.<br />
Rational expectations and the New Classical macroeconomics<br />
The RE Hypothesis and the New Classical model. The New Keynesian model.<br />
Policy implications and market efficiency<br />
The policy ineffectiveness debate and the Lucas Critique. Time-inconsistency and its resolution.<br />
Implications of RE for the behaviour of financial markets and relation to market efficiency.<br />
Open economy macroeconomics<br />
The Mundell-Fleming model, integrated with New Classical/Keynesian theory to build a complete open<br />
economy model for applied work. Brief review of models of the UK.<br />
INDICATIVE READING LIST:<br />
P. Minford and D. Peel, ‘Advanced Macroeconomics: A Primer ‘<br />
M. Parkin and R. Bade, ‘Modern macroeconomics’<br />
Chiang ‘Fundamental Methods of Mathematical Economics’<br />
D. Begg, ‘The Rational Expectations Revolution in Macroeconomics’<br />
R.E. Lucas and T.J. Sargent ‘Rational Expectations and Econometric Practice’<br />
-155-
MODULE CATALOGUE MODULE DESCRIPTIONS<br />
MANAGEMENT ACCOUNTING AND CONTROL<br />
MODULE CODE: BS3517<br />
NUMBER OF CREDITS: 20<br />
SEMESTER: Autumn & Spring<br />
PROGRAMMES: BSc Accounting, BSc Econ Accounting & Economics, BSc Econ<br />
Accounting & Management, BSc Accounting & Finance, BSc<br />
Accounting with a European Language<br />
AIMS OF THE MODULE:<br />
The aim of the module is to provide specialist accounting students with a level 3 course that builds on<br />
and complements previous management accounting courses. The module introduces a number of key<br />
issues relating to the role of management accounting in the control of managerial and organizational<br />
performance. The module locates management accounting firmly within its organizational context.<br />
LEARNING OUTCOMES OF THE MODULE<br />
On completion of the module a student should be able to<br />
A Knowledge and Understanding:<br />
• have knowledge and understanding of the concept of management control and the<br />
contribution of management accounting to this organizationally based phenomenon<br />
• have knowledge and understanding of a range of management accounting and control<br />
systems<br />
• have knowledge and understanding of key features of management accounting control<br />
systems design and implementation<br />
• have knowledge and understanding of developments in management accounting and control,<br />
including concepts such as beliefs systems, interactive control systems and the balanced<br />
scorecard<br />
• have knowledge and understanding of enduring issues in management accounting and<br />
control, including budgeting, capital budgeting, responsibility accounting, pricing, and transfer<br />
pricing<br />
• have knowledge and understanding of the impact of organizational design on management<br />
accounting control systems<br />
• have knowledge and understanding of various concepts and theories informing the analysis of<br />
management accounting control systems<br />
B Intellectual Skills:<br />
• capacity to identify relevant data and theoretical approaches<br />
• application of discursive and numerical analysis skills<br />
• use of theoretical models to critique existing systems<br />
• critical analysis capabilities<br />
C Discipline Specific Skills:<br />
• be able to identify relevant management accounting control issues in a range of situations<br />
• be able to apply techniques to enable management accounting to contribute to organizational<br />
strategy<br />
• be able to apply a range of theoretical models to identify potential solutions to practical<br />
management accounting problems<br />
D Transferable Skills:<br />
• ability to use theory to perform critical analysis<br />
• ability to develop reasoned arguments based on existing knowledge<br />
• ability to apply conceptual and numerical analysis in a problem solving context<br />
• ability to communicate complex ideas with clarity<br />
-156-
MODULE DESCRIPTIONS MODULE CATALOGUE<br />
METHODS OF TEACHING AND LEARNING:<br />
Teaching is through approximately 36 lectures and 8 seminar classes. Lectures present the theory<br />
behind topics and will discuss the interplay between theory and practice. Classes reinforce this<br />
material through discussion of theoretical aspects and more extensive case illustrations. Class<br />
assignments are distributed in advance of tutorials and the questions set are expected to be prepared<br />
by students prior to the class. Lectures incorporate appropriate research that is expected to be<br />
referred to in class discussions.<br />
Indicative study hours: 160 (based on <strong>School</strong> norm)<br />
ASSESSMENT:<br />
Examination Component 70%<br />
One 3 hour examination at the end of the Spring Semester<br />
Continuous Assessment 30%<br />
One 2,500 word assessment to be submitted in week 8 of the Spring<br />
Semester<br />
Students will be able to demonstrate knowledge of management accounting and control systems in<br />
the examination. This will also allow them to demonstrate their critical appreciation of the topics.<br />
Use of theoretical models will be demonstrated in both the examination and coursework components.<br />
Discipline specific skills will be demonstrated in all aspects of assessment.<br />
SYLLABUS CONTENT:<br />
The notion of management control; The role of management accounting in management control; The<br />
development of management accounting; Accounting implications of organisational design;<br />
Motivational implications of management accounting and control systems; Developments in<br />
management accounting and management control, including activity based cost management, cost<br />
based decision making, the notion of beliefs systems and interactive control systems, and the<br />
balanced scorecard; Control issues in centralised and decentralised operations; The theory and<br />
practice of the pricing of transfers between divisions; Issues in performance appraisal including<br />
agency and behavioural approaches; Organisational and behavioural insights into management<br />
accounting control systems; Strategic management accounting approaches.<br />
INDICATIVE READING LIST:<br />
The reading for BS3517 is journal based.<br />
Topic by topic reading lists will be distributed in advance of lectures.<br />
-157-
MODULE CATALOGUE MODULE DESCRIPTIONS<br />
MANAGEMENT & PUBLIC POLICY IN THE EUROPEAN<br />
UNION<br />
MODULE CODE: BS3544<br />
NUMBER OF CREDITS: 20<br />
SEMESTER: Autumn & Spring<br />
PROGRAMMES: BSc <strong>Business</strong> Management, BSc <strong>Business</strong> Management (Human<br />
Resources), BSc <strong>Business</strong> Management (International Management),<br />
BSc <strong>Business</strong> Management (Logistics and Operations), BSc <strong>Business</strong><br />
Management (Marketing), BSc in <strong>Business</strong> Management with a<br />
European Language<br />
AIMS OF THE MODULE:<br />
The aim of this third level module is to develop the student’s awareness of those aspects of the<br />
operation of the European Union which are of most relevance to the environment in which European<br />
businesses operate on a day to day basis. Initially students will be introduced to the overall vision,<br />
political philosophy and ultimate objectives of the European Union and to the European social model<br />
and surrounding controversies. The European Union policy-making process will be outlined together<br />
with the role and character of key institutions and actors in the formulation of social, economic and<br />
employment policies. This will be followed by an evaluation in detail, of a range of specific policies<br />
which are of particular relevance to business actors<br />
The ultimate aim is for students to develop a critical awareness enabling them to evaluate a range of<br />
issues surrounding the EU and its future.<br />
LEARNING OUTCOMES OF THE MODULE<br />
On completion of the module a student should be able to<br />
A Knowledge and Understanding:<br />
• critically assess the importance and relevance of some of the main contemporary issues<br />
facing the Union such as its accountability, perceived democratic deficit and bureaucratic<br />
centralisation.<br />
• have an appreciation of key social ,economic and employment policies of the EU and the<br />
policy making process<br />
• understand the issues raised by enlargement in respect of labour markets and labour mobility<br />
• understand the ultimate vision of the integration process and debates surrounding that vision<br />
• understand how key actors (e.g. trade unions and employers) help shape European regional<br />
and social policy<br />
B. Intellectual Skills<br />
• analytical (analysing literature and constructing a case)<br />
• communication (presenting information effectively<br />
• learning (reflecting on personal and group perspectives)<br />
C Transferable Skills:<br />
• develop a range of academic and intellective skills through presentations, workshops and<br />
seminars<br />
METHODS OF TEACHING AND LEARNING:<br />
The module provides some 34 hours of lectures and 10 hours of classes/seminars spread across the<br />
two semesters. The programme covers all the main areas identified in the syllabus and, in addition, a<br />
variety of expert visiting or guest lecturers are invited to contribute to the programme.<br />
Indicative study hours: 160<br />
ASSESSMENT:<br />
Examination Component 60%<br />
One 3 hour examination at the end of the Spring Semester<br />
-158-
MODULE DESCRIPTIONS MODULE CATALOGUE<br />
Continuous Assessment 40%<br />
One assessed essay of 3000 words to be submitted in week 7 of the<br />
Spring semester<br />
The assessed essay will enable students to undertake research into a topic from either the first or<br />
second semester and the examination will test student knowledge of subjects taught in both the first<br />
and the second semesters.<br />
SYLLABUS CONTENT:<br />
Key Issues and Concepts<br />
Including an exploration of different ‘visions’ or political philosophies regarding the nature and role of<br />
the European Union. For some the E.U is viewed in narrow economic terms and concerns are<br />
focused on the single market. For others the E.U. embodies a distinct set of social values reflected in<br />
the development of policies for example, on energy, transport and employment. The development of<br />
an ‘espace social’ (Delors) or ‘European Social Model’ is, according to some commentators (e.g.<br />
Hutton), increasingly important as a bulwark against globalisation and ‘Americanisation’. Lying behind<br />
all of this discussion is the contrast between an intergovernmental adversarial approach to economic<br />
and political integration and a supranationalist co-operative approach. Such interpretations of<br />
Europe’s role will be explored and the implications of policy for employers, trade unions, employees<br />
and citizens assessed. The influence of enlargement on conceptions of the E.U. will form an<br />
important area of analysis.<br />
Primary Institutions<br />
An evaluation of the role and nature of the primary institutions constituting the core of the EU’s<br />
administrative and political systems; what they are for and how they operate. An examination of the<br />
arguments for and against federal versus a confederal future for the EU. The issue of the so-called<br />
democratic deficit in the manner of operation of the institutions; the role of Parliament now and in the<br />
future. .<br />
Major Policy Initiatives<br />
An examination of such issues as the impact of EU industrial, commercial and social policies upon the<br />
activities of companies, in areas such as training and worker rights, employment policy, equality,<br />
equal pay, the regulation of working time, European Works Councils, and other workplace initiatives.<br />
Economic and Monetary Union and its policy implications. Competition Policy; Regional Policy and the<br />
significance of enlargement.<br />
INDICATIVE READING LIST:<br />
Gold, M (ed), 2009, Employment Policy in the EU: Origin, Themes and Prospects, Palgrave<br />
Scholz, C & Bohm, H (eds), 2008, Human Resource Management in Europe: Comparative Analysis<br />
and Contextual Understanding, Routledge.<br />
Nugent, The Government and Politics of the European Union (Macmillan) 5 th edition 2003<br />
Nicoll & Salmon, Understanding the European Union (Longman) 2001<br />
Hantrais, Social Policy in the EU (Macmillan) 2000<br />
Foster, D & Scott, P (eds),2003, Trade Unions in Europe: Meeting the Challenge (P.I.E, Peter Lang)<br />
Adnett, N and Hardy, S, The European Social Model, (Edward Elgar), 2005.<br />
-159-
MODULE CATALOGUE MODULE DESCRIPTIONS<br />
MANAGERIAL ECONOMICS<br />
MODULE CODE: BS3560<br />
NUMBER OF CREDITS: 20<br />
SEMESTER: Autumn & Spring<br />
PROGRAMMES: BSc Econ <strong>Business</strong> Economics with a European Language<br />
AIMS OF THE MODULE:<br />
The Managerial Economics module examines a series of specific decision problems facing managers in<br />
modern firms. These problems include the appropriate use of economic information to inform<br />
strategic decisions, decision-making under conditions of uncertainty, the management of risk, and<br />
then the use of price and non-price decisions as strategic choices within a game theoretic framework.<br />
The module aims to develop and enhance the skills and materials obtained in the year 2<br />
Microeconomic Theory and Industrial Economics modules. The module supports year 3 modules<br />
including Modern <strong>Business</strong> Enterprise, <strong>Business</strong> Applications, and Applied Macroeconomics and<br />
Finance.<br />
The module develops scientific decision frameworks and evaluation techniques to help solve a range<br />
of managerial problems, and explores the practical limitations of applying economic logic to business<br />
decision-making.<br />
The module aims to develop, through teaching and learning, subject-specific and transferable skills,<br />
including technical, analytical and research skills.<br />
LEARNING OUTCOMES OF THE MODULE<br />
On completion of the module a student should be able to<br />
A Knowledge and Understanding:<br />
• students will understand the key strategic economic problems facing modern business firms<br />
and be able to apply economic principles to a range of long term and short term business<br />
decisions.<br />
• recognise the potential and limits of economic principles as an aid to business decisionmaking<br />
and in analysis of business decisions.<br />
• understand the role of game theoretic approaches in making strategic choices.<br />
B Intellectual Skills:<br />
• analytical skills: Students are expected to apply logical analysis to business economic<br />
problems.<br />
• evaluative skills: Be able to accurately classify decision problems, and apply appropriate<br />
methods in seeking solutions to business problems.<br />
C Discipline Specific Skills:<br />
• appreciate the usefulness and limitations of economic theory to decision-making<br />
• recognise the significance of limitations and constraints on decision-makers in the business<br />
world, and to develop methods to deal with these problems in decision-making<br />
• accurately report solutions to decision-making problems, highlighting key data, assumptions<br />
and environmental contexts<br />
D Transferable Skills:<br />
• work individually, setting goals and developing ideas.<br />
• problem solve using a range of quantitative methodologies<br />
• develop logical and concise solutions to specific decision-type problems.<br />
• respond accurately to questioning on researched topic areas<br />
• collect, organise and analyse data on defined topics<br />
• use a variety of information and technology resources, including electronic data sources and<br />
the internet.<br />
-160-
MODULE DESCRIPTIONS MODULE CATALOGUE<br />
METHODS OF TEACHING AND LEARNING:<br />
Teaching occurs in the Autumn and Spring semesters. There are approximately 44 hours of contact<br />
comprising 34 hours of lectures and 10 hours of classes. Lectures provide students with an outline of<br />
the course material. Students are encouraged to read around the module topics through a series of<br />
key reading from a core text, and with supporting information from satellite texts. Classes<br />
concentrate on set numerical and essay style problems allied to the core lecture material. Students<br />
prepare answers to problems, deliver brief presentations of solutions, and participate in class<br />
discussions.<br />
Classes explore particular decision situations in more detail. Class questions typically require a mix of<br />
qualitative and qualitative solutions.<br />
Indicative study hours: 160<br />
ASSESSMENT:<br />
Examination Component: 100%<br />
One 1 hour exam at the end of the Autumn semester. (20%)<br />
One 3 hour examination at the end of the Spring semester based on<br />
material covered in both semesters. (80%)<br />
The one hour examination at the end of the Autumn semester involves students answering 2 essaystyle<br />
questions from a choice of 4. These questions will examine students understanding of key<br />
concepts and theories relating to semester one topics.<br />
The examination at the end of the Spring Semester is based on material covered in both Semesters.<br />
Section A contains questions relating to semester 1 material with section B relating to Semester 2.<br />
Students are required to answer at least 1 question from each section, and any further 2 questions<br />
from either section. This examination requires students to provide longer and more detailed answers<br />
than are required in the Autumn semester exam, on a range of question types, including essay<br />
questions and multi-part quantitative/discussion mix questions. Students will demonstrate that they<br />
understand the theoretical foundations of the module, provide critiques of ideas and methodologies<br />
where necessary, and be able to apply logical, scientific approaches to decision-making in a range of<br />
decision situations.<br />
SYLLABUS CONTENT:<br />
• How do businesses use economic information? This includes business forecasting, methods<br />
and analytical cases, use of economic models and input and output analysis.<br />
• Estimating and using cost information in a competitive environment. Emphasis here is<br />
on topics such as relevant costs for decision-making, cost estimation techniques, including<br />
statistical analysis, survivor analysis and engineering cost techniques.<br />
• How do firms make investment decisions in the presence of uncertainty? This includes<br />
cost of capital estimation, Modigliani and Miller ideas, Capital Asset Pricing Model and the<br />
Weighted Average Cost of Capital, financing of investments and capital structure optimisation;<br />
when firms should lease rather than buy assets.<br />
• Location decisions as strategic economic choices. Topics include agglomeration economies,<br />
increasing returns, central place theory, industrial districts, and analysis of competition through<br />
geographical space.<br />
• How do managers deal with risk? Topics include the use of insurance, trading risks, hedging,<br />
options and foreign exchange.<br />
• Strategic commitment We discuss how firms through strategic commitment can change the<br />
nature of competition in an industry in their favour. Includes analysis of entry and exit decisions<br />
and with emphasis on strategies, including pricing that a firm can use to deter entry or to<br />
promote exit of rival firms.<br />
• Why and when do businesses outsource? Strategic issues in business outsourcing and<br />
facilities management; theoretical perspectives on the make or buy decision.<br />
• Bidding and auction design: This topic explores various types of auctions, optimal bidding<br />
strategies for buyers, the winner’s curse, and optimal auction design.<br />
• Entry and Exit: Emphasis here is on strategies that a firm can use to deter entry or to promote<br />
-161-
MODULE CATALOGUE MODULE DESCRIPTIONS<br />
exit of rival firms.<br />
• <strong>Business</strong> decisions and sustainable economic development: This includes the importance<br />
of understanding sustainability in context of corporate economic decision making; understanding<br />
policy frameworks and their ramifications for business decisions; understanding the<br />
environmental implications of business decisions; practical cases.<br />
INDICATIVE READING LIST:<br />
J R McGuigan, R Moyer, and F H Harris, Economics for Managers, 11th Edition (Thomson South-<br />
Western, 2008)<br />
H.C. Petersen and W.C. Lewis, Managerial Economics, 4th Edition (Prentice-Hall International 1999)<br />
Philip McCann, Urban and Regional Economics, Oxford University Press, 2001.<br />
D. Besanko, D. Dranove, M. Shanley, S. Schaefer, Economics of Strategy, 3rd Edition, (Wiley, 2004).<br />
-162
MODULE DESCRIPTIONS MODULE CATALOGUE<br />
MARKETING DECISION MAKING<br />
MODULE CODE: BS3741<br />
NUMBER OF CREDITS: 20<br />
SEMESTER: Autumn & Spring<br />
PROGRAMMES: BSc Econ Accounting and Management, BSc Econ Banking and<br />
Finance, BSc Econ <strong>Business</strong> Economics, BSc <strong>Business</strong> Management,<br />
BSc <strong>Business</strong> Management (Human Resources), BSc <strong>Business</strong><br />
Management (International Management), BSc <strong>Business</strong> Management<br />
(Logistics and Operations), BSc <strong>Business</strong> Management (Marketing),<br />
BSc <strong>Business</strong> Management with a European Language, BSc <strong>Business</strong><br />
Studies and Japanese, BSc Econ Economics & Management Studies.<br />
AIMS OF THE MODULE:<br />
The module presents the context, concepts, methods and applications of decision modelling, covering<br />
marketing decision areas such as segmentation, positioning, new product design, forecasting,<br />
advertising and promotion planning, pricing and product strategies. This course will help students<br />
develop skills and learn techniques necessary for translating conceptual understanding into specific<br />
operational plans and marketing decisions.<br />
LEARNING OUTCOMES OF THE MODULE<br />
On completion of the module a student should be able to:<br />
A. Knowledge and Understanding:<br />
• Understand how analytical techniques and computer models can enhance marketing decision<br />
making.<br />
• Understand how to apply specific analytical techniques to address market problems in a variety<br />
of contexts.<br />
• Critically appraise marketing phenomena and processes for their usefulness in decision-making<br />
• Evaluate the components of marketing strategies and programmes for relevance and outcomes.<br />
• Assess the implementation barriers facing specific marketing initiatives and develop a logical<br />
approach to problem-solving.<br />
B Intellectual Skills:<br />
• Exercise powers of inquiry, logic and critical analysis<br />
• Interpret and evaluate arguments and evidence<br />
• Translate findings into actionable activities.<br />
C. Discipline Specific Skills:<br />
• To discriminate and critically evaluate different marketing actions in terms of relevance,<br />
efficiency and results.<br />
• Ability to apply software tools to real marketing decision problems<br />
• Appreciate the processes and impediments to developing and implementing a strategic<br />
marketing plan<br />
D Transferable Skills:<br />
• To access and critically appraise from a variety of research resources<br />
• To identify alternative options in a decision-making context.<br />
-163-
MODULE CATALOGUE MODULE DESCRIPTIONS<br />
METHODS OF TEACHING AND LEARNING:<br />
The formal timetabled components of the module consist of approximately 44 hours of lectures and 12<br />
hours of labs. The lecture programme is supported by detailed handouts and structured reading of core<br />
texts and additional readings. The labs will focus on developing analytical skills and will be supported<br />
with handouts, instructions, and readings.<br />
ASSESSMENT:<br />
Continuous Assessment 100%<br />
Assignment : 2500 words, due end of semester 1 50%<br />
Written Examination: Held at the end of semester 2 50%<br />
A single in course assignment and a written examination are designed to cover the learning outcomes of<br />
the module and to test skill development. The assignment will focus on strategic marketing decisions,<br />
such as the segmentation, targeting and positioning, for a given company. This assignment will be due<br />
at then end of term 1. The written examination will address the main marketing decision making<br />
concepts and context (such as NPD, advertising, pricing, etc) and will be held at the end of the spring<br />
term. Each assessment element will be equally weighted.<br />
Formative assessment arises from the lab sessions where a range of tutor and peer-driven informal<br />
assessment provides students with feedback on critical analysis, the application of theory and the<br />
development of a range of transferable skills.<br />
SYLLABUS CONTENT:<br />
The module presents the concepts, methods and applications of decision modelling to address<br />
marketing issues such as segmentation, positioning, new product design, development and forecasting,<br />
advertising and promotion planning, pricing and product strategies. The course content will categorize<br />
decision support systems into two main areas, those that help with strategic dimensions and those that<br />
assist the development of marketing programmes. Indicative syllabus is as follows:<br />
Introduction to Marketing decision models<br />
Segmentation and Targeting process and methods<br />
Positioning using Perceptual Mapping Techniques<br />
Tools for Strategic Marketing Decisions<br />
New Product Decisions<br />
Advertising and Communications decisions<br />
Sales force and channel decisions<br />
Price and Sales promotion decisions<br />
INDICATIVE READING LIST:<br />
Best, R. (2005) Market-based Management, International edition, Prentice Hall<br />
Lilien, G.L. and Rangaswamy, A. (2003) Marketing Engineering, Prentice Hall<br />
Mullins, J., Walker Jr., O. and Boyd Jr., H. (2009) Marketing Management, A Decision-Making Approach,<br />
7 th edition, McGraw-Hill Irwin.<br />
-164-
MODULE DESCRIPTIONS MODULE CATALOGUE<br />
MICROECONOMIC ANALYSIS<br />
MODULE CODE: BS3566<br />
NUMBER OF CREDITS: 20<br />
SEMESTER: Autumn & Spring<br />
PROGRAMMES: BSc Econ Accounting and Economics, BSc Econ Economics, BSc Econ<br />
Economics with a European Language, BSc Economics and Finance,<br />
BSc Economics and Management Studies, BSc Econ Economics and<br />
Politics<br />
AIMS OF THE MODULE:<br />
The Microeconomic Analysis module aims to:<br />
• Provide students with an up-to-date understanding of microeconomic analysis at a third year<br />
undergraduate level<br />
• Make students aware of the use of microeconomic analysis in understanding the behaviour of<br />
consumers and producers, and the operation of the economy as a whole<br />
• Make students aware of more recent microeconomic theory in particular in the areas of game<br />
theory and uncertainty<br />
• Give students a firm understanding of issues in dealing with microeconomic policy analysis<br />
• Enable students to obtain subject specific and core skills which will be of use in further<br />
education and their future careers<br />
LEARNING OUTCOMES OF THE MODULE<br />
On completion of the module a student should be able to<br />
A Knowledge and Understanding:<br />
• be aware of advanced undergraduate microeconomic theory in relation to producers and<br />
consumers, duality, general equilibrium, game theory, asymmetric information and<br />
uncertainty<br />
• be aware of the use of economic analysis to solve economic problems arising in the micro<br />
economy<br />
• be aware of the techniques that economists use to solve microeconomic problems<br />
• have covered sufficient micro theory to proceed to an MSc. course in Economics should they<br />
wish to do so<br />
B Intellectual Skills:<br />
• be able to apply logical analysis to the treatment of microeconomic issues<br />
• be able to read and understand key articles in journals in the microeconomics area<br />
C Discipline Specific Skills:<br />
• be able to understand and analyse some of the key issues in the micro literature<br />
• be able to use analytical techniques including mathematical and diagrammatic analysis to<br />
solve specific microeconomic problems<br />
D Transferable Skills:<br />
• be able to read extensively and to write and present short reports<br />
• be able to indicate to non-economists what economic thinking would suggest in dealing with<br />
real economic problems<br />
METHODS OF TEACHING AND LEARNING:<br />
Teaching takes place in the Autumn and Spring Semester. There are approximately 36 hours of<br />
lectures and 16 hours of classes (although extra classes may be put on to deal with more technical<br />
aspects of the course).<br />
Indicative study hours: 160<br />
-165-
MODULE CATALOGUE MODULE DESCRIPTIONS<br />
ASSESSMENT:<br />
Examination Component 100%<br />
One 2 hour examination at the end of the Autumn Semester<br />
One 3 hour examination at the end of the Spring Semester<br />
The two hour exam (30% of the course mark) is designed to test students’ ability in dealing with<br />
microeconomic problems and covers the first part of the course (see below). Students will be asked to<br />
answer a number of questions of a problem-type nature in this exam. The three hour exam (70% of<br />
the course mark) is then focused on the second and third parts of the course.<br />
SYLLABUS CONTENT:<br />
The syllabus is divided into three parts. The first develops students’ understanding of analysis and<br />
includes the following topics: consumer theory and producer theory using duality, partial equilibrium<br />
and general equilibrium, welfare economics. The second part covers developments in game theory<br />
and includes treatment of static and dynamic games, games of complete and incomplete information,<br />
and provides appropriate solution concepts: Nash equilibrium, Bayesian Nash equilibrium and<br />
subgame perfect Nash equilibrium. The third part covers the economics of uncertainty and<br />
information. It will cover expected utility theory, moral hazard and adverse selection, focusing on<br />
equilibria in signalling, screening and principal agent models.<br />
INDICATIVE READING LIST:<br />
Gravelle, H. and R. Rees, Microeconomics, Pearson Education, 2004.<br />
Jehle, G. A. and P. J. Reny, Advanced Microeconomic Theory, Pearson Education, 2011.<br />
Osborne, M. J., An Introduction to Game Theory, Oxford University Press, 2004.<br />
Macho-Stadler, I. and D. Perez-Castrillo, A Introduction to the Economics of Information,<br />
Oxford University Press, 2001.<br />
Watson, J., Strategy: An Introduction to Game Theory, Norton, 2002 (2008, 2 nd edition).<br />
-166-
MODULE DESCRIPTIONS MODULE CATALOGUE<br />
MODELLING IN MANAGEMENT SCIENCE<br />
MODULE CODE: BS3619<br />
NUMBER OF CREDITS: 10<br />
SEMESTER: Spring<br />
PROGRAMMES: BSc <strong>Business</strong> Management, BSc <strong>Business</strong> Management (Human Resources),<br />
BSc <strong>Business</strong> Management (International Management), BSc <strong>Business</strong><br />
Management (Logistics and Operations), BSc <strong>Business</strong> Management<br />
(Marketing), BSc Accounting and Finance<br />
AIMS OF THE MODULE:<br />
The aim of this third-level module is to provide students with a range of predominantly<br />
probability/statistical based approaches for understanding and modelling real life problems of interest<br />
to managers, accountants and others concerned with business and commerce. Within the general<br />
area of management science, the considered problem will include queuing and inventory<br />
management.<br />
The intended understanding is to range from the mathematical rudiments of the problems and<br />
subsequent approaches to model them and the managerial, economic, accounting and/or logistic<br />
impact any results may have.<br />
LEARNING OUTCOMES OF THE MODULE<br />
On completion of the module a student should be able to<br />
A Knowledge and Understanding:<br />
• Construct formal models for a variety of business/management problems.<br />
• Appreciate how software can pertinently be used in simulation modelling.<br />
B Intellectual Skills:<br />
• Understanding the underlying mathematics/statistics employed in the modelling processes of<br />
business/management problems.<br />
• Be able to construct a model based solutions to business/management problems.<br />
C Discipline Specific (including practical) Skills:<br />
• Practical understanding of the role of simulation modelling for business/management<br />
problems.<br />
• Theoretical understanding of the mathematical construction of models.<br />
D Transferable Skills:<br />
• Understanding of the progression from problem formulation to solution identification.<br />
METHODS OF TEACHING AND LEARNING:<br />
The formal timetabled components of the module comprise 16 hours of lectures and 5 hours of<br />
classes. The lecture program is supported by detailed handouts and subsequent structured reading,<br />
which strives to challenge and empower students to attempt class questions (closely connected to the<br />
lecture material). The class work also includes a component of work that utilises software.<br />
Students are supported through advertised weekly student-lecturer private consultation and e-mail<br />
student-lecturer contact.<br />
Indicative study hours - 80<br />
ASSESSMENT:<br />
Examination Component 100%<br />
2 hour exam in Spring Semester<br />
-167-
MODULE CATALOGUE MODULE DESCRIPTIONS<br />
SYLLABUS CONTENT:<br />
Models Using Probability<br />
Queuing Theory<br />
Introduction to Stochastic Processes<br />
Markov Chain based models (using matrices).<br />
Applications: Customer loyalty, Brand switching<br />
Introduction to Waiting Line Models<br />
Generalised Poisson Model, Single and Multi channel waiting line models<br />
Applications: Shop queuing etc.<br />
Simulation Modelling (Including excel spreadsheets)<br />
Simulation Model Building (Advantages and Disadvantages)<br />
Monte Carlo Methods, Managerial Implications.<br />
Applications: Queuing and Inventory Management Simulations<br />
Inventory Management (Small use of differentiation)<br />
Deterministic Models: Economic Order Quantity, Production Lot Size and Backorder<br />
Models,<br />
Stochastic Models: Theoretical and Simulation based Models<br />
INDICATIVE READING LIST<br />
Anderson, D. R., Sweeney D. J. and Williams T. A., An Introduction to Management Science:<br />
Quantitative Approaches to Decision Making, Thomson Learning<br />
-168-
MODULE DESCRIPTIONS MODULE CATALOGUE<br />
MODERN BUSINESS ENTERPRISE<br />
MODULE CODE: BS3561<br />
NUMBER OF CREDITS: 20<br />
SEMESTER: Autumn & Spring<br />
PROGRAMMES: BSc Econ <strong>Business</strong> Economics, BSc Econ <strong>Business</strong> Economics with a<br />
European Lanaguage, BSc Econ Economics and Management Studies,<br />
BSc Econ Accounting & Economics.<br />
AIMS OF THE MODULE:<br />
The Modern <strong>Business</strong> Enterprise module aims to:<br />
1. provide students with a sound understanding of modern economic approaches to corporate<br />
organisation and behaviour.<br />
2. build upon the year 2 modules in Microeconomics and Industrial Economics and explore modern<br />
explanations of firm behaviour.<br />
3. introduce students to the information and decision problems facing modern business enterprise,<br />
and to examine possible solutions.<br />
4. familiarise students with various elements of corporate economic strategy particularly relating to<br />
mergers, vertical integration, joint ventures, franchising, and internationalisation and the role of<br />
these elements in meeting business objectives.<br />
5. give students an understanding of theoretical and practical perspectives on both the process of<br />
business growth and the constraints on growth.<br />
6. encourage through teaching and learning student transferable skills in areas such as data<br />
collection, analysis and reporting.<br />
LEARNING OUTCOMES OF THE MODULE<br />
On completion of the module a student should be able to<br />
A Knowledge and Understanding:<br />
• be aware of the economic theory appertaining to the nature and behaviour of stakeholders<br />
within modern business enterprise, and be able to analyse and describe the information<br />
asymmetries occurring between conflicting groups.<br />
• be familiar with different forms of corporate organisation, and be able to describe how<br />
different organisational structures come into being and evolve.<br />
• be able to demonstrate how different information and decision problems in a modern firm<br />
affect corporate structures.<br />
• recognise the potential and limits of economic principles as an aid to understanding the<br />
behaviour of modern business enterprise.<br />
B Intellectual Skills:<br />
• be able to apply logical analysis to business economic problems.<br />
• be able to evaluate strategic economic issues facing modern business enterprise.<br />
C Discipline Specific Skills:<br />
• be familiar and competent to research statistical, textual, and internet sources relating to<br />
modern industries and their development through time.<br />
• be able to analyse the economic basis of corporate economic strategy as it relates to areas<br />
such as internationalisation, restructuring, rationalisation, and general business growth.<br />
D Transferable Skills:<br />
• be read extensively, and be able to collect, organise and analyse data.<br />
• be familiar with key IT resources for research purposes and to inform classes and assignment<br />
work.<br />
• be confident in developing individual ideas, setting personal course goals and schedules.<br />
-169-
MODULE CATALOGUE MODULE DESCRIPTIONS<br />
METHODS OF TEACHING AND LEARNING:<br />
Teaching occurs in the Autumn and Spring semesters. There are approximately 34 hours of lectures<br />
and 10 hours of classes. Lectures are designed to give students an outline of the core module<br />
material. Students are encouraged to read around the module topics through a series of key<br />
readings from texts and journal articles. Classes will focus upon set problems allied to the core<br />
lecture material. In each class delegated students prepare answers to problems, and deliver an oral<br />
presentation, with slide support if necessary. Students then answer questions on their topic/problem.<br />
Indicative study hours: 160<br />
ASSESSMENT:<br />
Examination Component 70%<br />
One 3 hour examination at the end of the Spring semester based on<br />
material covered in both semesters<br />
Continuous Assessment: 30%<br />
Comprising 2 essays of 1200-1500 words to be submitted in week 12<br />
of the Autumn semester and week 9 of the Spring semester<br />
Successful completion of the continuous assessed work requires students to write up answers to<br />
essay questions which are based on lectures and class material. Students will demonstrate<br />
understanding of the theoretical foundations of the course, and they must demonstrate that they<br />
have researched the topics extensively. A list of core readings appertaining to assignments is<br />
provided to students at the start of the module. However, students are also encouraged to find their<br />
own literature sources and develop them, hence developing transferable research skills. The essay<br />
questions require students to focus and organise their material in a concise piece of work (less than<br />
1500 words).<br />
The examination component is a single section, with ten questions. The examination has essay<br />
questions that cover the whole of the course material. Students choose four questions. The exam is<br />
designed to test knowledge acquired by students over both the semesters.<br />
SYLLABUS CONTENT:<br />
The Modern <strong>Business</strong> Enterprise module examines modern economic approaches to corporate<br />
organisation and behaviour.<br />
The Nature of Modern <strong>Business</strong> Enterprise and Key Perspectives<br />
Modern approaches to business organisations in the context of problems with neo-classical<br />
assumptions. Alternative business objectives and managerial theories of the firm. Neoclassical model<br />
and theories of economic organisation, factors contributing to market failure, transactions costs<br />
analysis and alternatives, the price mechanism and coordination within the firm and the market,<br />
bounded rationality and private information.<br />
Moral hazard problems, controlling these problems in firms and markets, incentive contracts, and<br />
organisational design. The control of managerial discretion and the market for corporate control.<br />
The Structure of Modern <strong>Business</strong> Enterprise<br />
The boundaries and structure of modern business enterprise; information problems and links to<br />
internal structures, U form. M form and hybrid structures, advantages and disadvantages of different<br />
forms.<br />
Modern <strong>Business</strong> Enterprise Structures and Cases<br />
Multinational enterprise – theoretical perspectives on international firms focusing on transactions<br />
costs, product cycle and product portfolio approaches.<br />
Franchising, growth and theoretical perspectives, factors in success and failure of franchising<br />
agreements.<br />
Profit sharing firms, worker –owned firms and management buyouts.<br />
Mergers, takeovers and firm boundaries, competing hypotheses and the market for corporate control,<br />
corporate governance systems.<br />
Evolutionary Approaches to Modern <strong>Business</strong> Enterprise<br />
-170-
MODULE DESCRIPTIONS MODULE CATALOGUE<br />
Darwinian and Lamarkian perspectives, organisational ecology, evolutionary theory of economic<br />
change. Social networks and economic performance.<br />
The Role of the Entrepreneur<br />
Contrasting perspectives following the classical tradition. Small firms, enterprise, and policy.<br />
INDICATIVE READING LIST:<br />
Milgrom P and Roberts J, (1992) Economics, Organisation and Management, Prentice-Hall Intl.<br />
Douma S and Schreuder H, (1998) Economic Approaches to Organisations, 2 nd Ed , Prentice Hall.<br />
Ricketts, M. The Economics Of <strong>Business</strong> Enterprise 2 nd Edition. Harvester Wheatsheaf.<br />
McGuigan, Moyer and Harris. Managerial Economics 9 th edition, South Western<br />
Storey D (1992), Understanding the Small <strong>Business</strong> Sector.<br />
Dunning, J. (1993), Multinational Enterprises and the Global Economy. Addison Wesley<br />
-171-
MODULE CATALOGUE MODULE DESCRIPTIONS<br />
ORGANISATIONAL ANALYSIS AND CHANGE<br />
MODULE CODE: BS3735<br />
NUMBER OF CREDITS: 20<br />
SEMESTER: Autumn & Spring<br />
PROGRAMMES: BSc Econ Accounting and Management, BSc <strong>Business</strong> Management,<br />
BSc <strong>Business</strong> Management (Human Resources), BSc <strong>Business</strong><br />
Management (International Management), BSc <strong>Business</strong><br />
Management (Logistics & Operations), BSc <strong>Business</strong> Management<br />
(Marketing), BSc <strong>Business</strong> Management with a European Language,<br />
BSc <strong>Business</strong> Studies and Japanese, BSc <strong>Business</strong> Management &<br />
Finance.<br />
AIMS OF THE MODULE:<br />
The aim of this third year module is to enable students to develop a critical understanding of key<br />
approaches to analysing organisations and change. The module will introduce students to a range of<br />
theoretical perspectives and analytical skills to undertake a critical analysis of contemporary issues in<br />
organisations.<br />
LEARNING OUTCOMES OF THE MODULE<br />
On completion of the module a student should be able to<br />
A. Knowledge and Understanding<br />
• Understand the perspective-based nature of theories of organisation and assess the<br />
implications for organisational analysis<br />
• Demonstrate a critical understanding of the main theories used in the management literature<br />
to analyse and explain organizational processes.<br />
• Use this knowledge to examine organizations and the events that occur within them.<br />
• Critically evaluate the ‘usefulness’ of various theories for management and/or other groups in<br />
organizations.<br />
• Critically assess a number of theoretical approaches to analysing organisations, using the<br />
cultural organisational perspective.<br />
• Consider the usefulness of the cultural organisation perspective in effective organisational<br />
change<br />
• Synthesise different theoretical perspectives on culture to analyse issues of gender and<br />
diversity<br />
• Apply a range of theoretical frameworks to explain the use of management fads and fashions<br />
in contemporary organisations<br />
• Critically examine the relationship between organisational change and workplace identities<br />
• Critically assess the emergence of new forms of organisations and post-hierarchical<br />
organisations<br />
• Evaluate the competing theories of organisation-environment relations<br />
• Critically evaluate the interactions between ‘home’ and ‘work’ and the implications for<br />
work/life balance<br />
• Analyse the role of jokes, irony and humour within organisations.<br />
• Develop understanding of critical issues in the management of knowledge, including the<br />
changing roles of professionals and consultants, inter-subjectivity, the process of innovation<br />
and the contribution of information and communications technology.<br />
B. Intellectual Skills:<br />
• Apply a range of epistemological and ontological approaches to the analysis of contemporary<br />
organisational issues<br />
• Appreciate the implications of contrasting approaches for the analysis of organisations and<br />
the management of change<br />
• Present advanced level critical analysis in assessed work and examination answers<br />
C. Discipline Specific Skills:<br />
• Demonstrate the ability to undertake critical reflection in the selection and use of various<br />
perspectives on organisational analysis and change.<br />
-172-
MODULE DESCRIPTIONS MODULE CATALOGUE<br />
D. Transferable Skills:<br />
• Develop and effectively utilise a range of transferable skills in the critical analysis of<br />
organisations.<br />
• Develop the skills of critical reflection, creative thinking, effective communication, and the<br />
giving and receiving of feedback through a range of individual and group based exercises and<br />
case studies<br />
METHODS OF TEACHING AND LEARNING:<br />
The module is formally assessed by one 3000 word essay, submitted at the end of the first semester<br />
and a three hour exam to be held at the end of the second (final) semester. In the examination,<br />
students are required to answer three questions, one from the first semester and two from the<br />
second semester.<br />
ASSESSMENT:<br />
Examination Component 60%<br />
One 3 hour examination at the end of the Spring semester<br />
Continuous Assessment 40%<br />
One essay of 3,000 words to be submitted in week 12 of the Autumn<br />
Semester<br />
In addition, informal forms of assessment are made use of in the tutorials. Here a range of tutor and<br />
peer-driven informal assessment provides students with feedback on critical analysis, the application<br />
of theory, and the development of a range of transferable skills.<br />
The teaching and learning approaches are designed to focus on three areas: content (knowledge),<br />
context (applying knowledge to ‘real life’ situations) and capability (developing transferable skills).<br />
Overall, the aim is on challenging assumptions, developing an awareness of context and seeking<br />
alternative ways of understanding a situation or problem. A number of different learning and teaching<br />
methods will be used. Formal two-hour lectures will be supplemented by small group (tutorial)<br />
sessions of two hours duration. The tutorials are designed to be highly participative, drawing on case<br />
study material, experiential exercises and ‘realistic’ learning situations. The tutorials will provide the<br />
main arena for critical debate and for the development of critical self-reflexive techniques and other<br />
transferable skills.<br />
SYLLABUS CONTENT:<br />
Ways of knowing, post-modern organisations, professions and organisations, identities, working and<br />
living, organisation-environment relations, understanding, analysing and implementing change,<br />
knowledge work and expert work; network organisations; markets, networks and hierarchies;<br />
professional organisations and change; knowledge work and ICT; innovation and knowledge creation;<br />
middle management and change, fads and fashions, culture, gendered cultures, humour.<br />
INDICATIVE READING LIST:<br />
Alvesson, M. (2002) Understanding Organizational Culture, Sage.<br />
Grey, C. (2009) A Very Short, Fairly Interesting and Reasonably Cheap Book About Studying<br />
Organisations, Second Edition, Sage.<br />
Hancock, P. and Tyler, M. (2001) Work, Postmodernism and Organization, Sage.<br />
Hatch, M. J. (with Cunliffe, A. L.) (2006) Organization Theory: Modern, Symbolic, and Postmodern<br />
Perspectives, Oxford.<br />
Kipping, M. and Engwall, L. (eds) (2002) Management Consulting, Oxford University Press.<br />
McAuley, J., Duberley, J. and Johnson, P. (2007) Organization Theory: Challenges and Perspectives,<br />
Prentice Hall.<br />
Newell, S., Robertson, M. and Scarborough, H. (2002) Managing Knowledge Work, Palgrave.<br />
Thompson, P. and McHugh, D. (2002) Work Organizations: A Critical Introduction, Macmillan.<br />
-173-
MODULE CATALOGUE MODULE DESCRIPTIONS<br />
Please note that this module will not run in the 2011-12 session<br />
PUBLIC FINANCE<br />
MODULE CODE: BS3562<br />
NUMBER OF CREDITS: 20<br />
SEMESTER: Autumn & Spring<br />
PROGRAMMES: BSc Econ Accounting & Economics, BSc Econ Banking & Finance, BSc<br />
Econ <strong>Business</strong> Economics, BSc Econ <strong>Business</strong> Economics with a<br />
European Language, BSc Econ Economics, BSc Econ Economics with<br />
a European Language, BSc Econ Economics and Management<br />
Studies, BSc Econ Economics & Politics, BA Economics with<br />
Humanities, BSc Econ Banking & Finance with a European Language,<br />
AIMS OF THE MODULE:<br />
To examine the principles and influences underlying policies on public spending, borrowing and<br />
taxation and their economic consequences of these policies.<br />
LEARNING OUTCOMES OF THE MODULE<br />
On completion of the module a student should be able to<br />
A Knowledge and Understanding:<br />
• understand the economic rationale for the public provision of goods and services and the<br />
conditions under which these will be efficiently supplied.<br />
• be able to analyse the static and dynamic effects of various types of taxation and of public<br />
borrowing<br />
• be aware of alternative approaches to making public choices<br />
• display familiarity with a range of relevant analytical techniques<br />
B Intellectual Skills:<br />
• the ability to think clearly about public policy.<br />
C Discipline Specific Skills:<br />
• the ability to select appropriate models of economic behaviour to analyse policy issues<br />
D Transferable Skills:<br />
• the ability to think clearly about alternative uses of resources<br />
METHODS OF TEACHING AND LEARNING:<br />
Teaching comprises about 40 hours of lectures and 10 classes over two semesters. Students are also<br />
expected to take substantial responsibility for their own learning experience.<br />
Indicative study hours: 160<br />
ASSESSMENT:<br />
Examination Component 70%<br />
One 3 hour written examination at the end of the Spring Semester<br />
Continuous Assessment 30%<br />
Two pieces of assessed work to be submitted in week 12 of the<br />
Autumn Semester and week 10 of the Spring semester.<br />
SYLLABUS CONTENT:<br />
The welfare theorems, partial and general equilibrium effects of taxation and government spending,<br />
equity and efficiency in public policy. Provision of public goods and publicly-provided private goods,<br />
externality problems, club goods, mechanisms of public choice, the size of government, short run and<br />
long run effects of public policy on the macroeconomy.<br />
INDICATIVE READING LIST:<br />
Hindinks, J and Myles, G.D. Intermediate Public Economics, MIT, 2006<br />
Stiglitz, J.E. The Economics of the Public Sector, Norton, 2000<br />
-174-
MODULE DESCRIPTIONS MODULE CATALOGUE<br />
PUBLIC SECTOR ACCOUNTING<br />
MODULE CODE: BS3612<br />
NUMBER OF CREDITS: 10<br />
SEMESTER: Spring<br />
PROGRAMMES: BSc Accounting, BSc Accounting & Finance, BSc Accounting with a<br />
European Language<br />
AIMS OF THE MODULE:<br />
The aim of this module is to provide students with an understanding of the financial reporting,<br />
management accounting and investment appraisal techniques and practices specifically relating to<br />
public sector organisations. The module also examines the problems of performance evaluation,<br />
audit and control of public sector organisations.<br />
LEARNING OUTCOMES OF THE MODULE<br />
On completion of the module a student should be able to<br />
A Knowledge and Understanding:<br />
• evaluate the nature of the public sector and the accountability, control and performance<br />
evaluation of public sector activities<br />
• describe the theory, practice and regulatory framework of national and international public<br />
sector financial accounting and reporting<br />
• describe the use and practice of management accounting in the planning and control of public<br />
sector activities<br />
• identify, evaluate and apply the investment appraisal techniques of public sector organisations<br />
• evaluate critically the role of the audit function and in particular ‘value for money’ auditing in<br />
the public sector<br />
• evaluate critically the accounting implications of the changing nature of the public sector<br />
B Intellectual Skills:<br />
• synthesise and evaluate data<br />
• exercise powers of inquiry and critical analysis, interpretation and evaluation of arguments and<br />
evidence<br />
• sustain a critical argument in writing<br />
C Discipline Specific Skills:<br />
• critically revaluate the process of accountability, control and performance evaluation of the<br />
public sector<br />
• compare and contrast different management accounting and budgetary control practices used<br />
in the public sector<br />
• develop a critical understanding of the theory, practice and regulatory framework of<br />
government accounting and reporting<br />
• critically evaluate the accounting implications of the changing nature of the public sector<br />
• critically evaluate the investment appraisal techniques used in the public sector<br />
• appreciate the importance of the role of the audit function and ‘value for money’ in the public<br />
sector<br />
D Transferable Skills:<br />
• exercise initiative, self reliance and time management skills and work independently<br />
• communicate ideas, principles and theories effective by written means and by class<br />
presentation<br />
• appreciate alternative viewports<br />
• access and utilise data by use of the library and by IT (internet etc)<br />
METHODS OF TEACHING AND LEARNING:<br />
The module comprises 17 lecture hours and 5 hours of classes. The lectures programme is supported<br />
by detailed handouts and subsequent structured reading of specific public sector accounting texts as<br />
-175-
MODULE CATALOGUE MODULE DESCRIPTIONS<br />
well as major academic articles. Each aspect of the syllabus comprehensively covered in one or more<br />
lectures and is supported by class exercises which requires a discussion by students of the issues<br />
involved and where appropriate, the solution of a numerical exercise based on the techniques<br />
covered in the lecture. Case studies are also used to illustrate major issues and to reinforce learning<br />
activity. Students are supported throughout the module through the weekly student-lecturer office<br />
hours, revision sessions and by e-mail contact.<br />
Indicative study hours: 80<br />
ASSESSMENT:<br />
Examination Component 100%<br />
One 2 hour exam at the end of the Spring Semester. The<br />
examination questions contain a range of questions that are designed<br />
to cover the learning outcomes for the module and to test the critical<br />
and analytical skills of students.<br />
SYLLABUS CONTENT:<br />
The distinction between the private sector and other sectors of the economy with emphasis on the<br />
objectives and techniques of financial accounting, financial reporting and accountability. The aims,<br />
objectives and mechanisms of public sector auditing. The measurement of performance. Investment<br />
appraisal, budgeting, planning and control for public sector organisations. The accounting<br />
implications of the changing nature of the public sector.<br />
INDICATIVE READING LIST:<br />
Jones and Pendlebury, Public Sector Accounting, 5 th Edition, 2000<br />
Coombes & Jenkins (2002), Public Sector Financial Management, Chapman and Hall<br />
Rutherford, Sherer and Wearing, Cases in Public Sector Accounting, PCP, 1992<br />
Henley, Likierman, Perrin, Evans, Lapsley and Whiteoak, Public Sector Accounting and Financial<br />
Control, 4 th Edition, Chapman and Hall<br />
Glynn, J, Public Sector Financial Control and Accounting, 2 nd Edition<br />
Rutherford, B A, Financial Reporting in the Public Sector<br />
-176
MODULE DESCRIPTIONS MODULE CATALOGUE<br />
SECURITY ANALYSIS & PORTFOLIO MANAGEMENT<br />
MODULE CODE: BS3615<br />
NUMBER OF CREDITS: 10<br />
SEMESTER: Spring<br />
PROGRAMMES: BSc Accounting & Finance, BSc Econ Economics & Finance, BSc<br />
<strong>Business</strong> Management & Finance<br />
AIMS OF THE MODULE:<br />
The Security Analysis & Portfolio Management module is designed to provide students with an<br />
understanding of the theory and practice of security analysis and portfolio management and<br />
performance measurement<br />
LEARNING OUTCOMES OF THE MODULE<br />
On completion of the module a student should be able to<br />
A Knowledge and Understanding:<br />
• show a systematic knowledge of the concepts underlying investment decisions.<br />
• show a systematic knowledge of, and critically evaluate, portfolio theory and the Efficient<br />
Markets Hypothesis and their implications for portfolio management and security analysis.<br />
• show a systematic knowledge of a range of different types of bonds and equities and of the<br />
operations of the markets on which they are traded.<br />
• show a systematic knowledge of, and critically evaluate, pricing models for bonds and<br />
equities.<br />
• show a systematic knowledge of, and critically evaluate, technical analysis and fundamental<br />
analysis.<br />
• show a systematic knowledge of, and critically evaluate, portfolio management strategies and<br />
performance measures for both bond and equity portfolios.<br />
B Intellectual Skills:<br />
• synthesise and evaluate primary and secondary data.<br />
• solve problems, including the ability to manipulate financial and other numerical data and to<br />
apply statistical concepts at an appropriate level.<br />
• exercise powers of inquiry, logic, and critical analysis, interpretation and evaluation of<br />
arguments and evidence.<br />
• sustain a critical argument in writing.<br />
C Discipline Specific Skills:<br />
• measure and evaluate the returns on, and risks of, different types of bond and equities.<br />
• price bonds and equities using a range of appropriate pricing models.<br />
• apply the techniques and methods of portfolio management for both bond and equity<br />
portfolios.<br />
• measure the performance of investment portfolios using a range of performance measures.<br />
D Transferable Skills:<br />
• communicate ideas, principles and theories effectively by oral and written means.<br />
• exercise initiative, self reliance and time management skills and work independently.<br />
• appreciate alternative viewpoints.<br />
• exercise numeracy, problem solving and IT skills.<br />
• access and utilise information in a variety of research resources both traditional (e.g. library)<br />
and IT (e.g. the Internet, databases).<br />
METHODS OF TEACHING AND LEARNING:<br />
The formal timetabled component of the module comprises approximately sixteen lectures and six<br />
classes. The lecture programme, which is supported by detailed handouts, is used to introduce<br />
material to students, to direct them (through the use of recommended reading and web sites<br />
included in the handouts) to sources which will enable them, during the private study time they<br />
devote to the module (fifty eight hours), to increase their knowledge and understanding of that<br />
-177-
MODULE CATALOGUE MODULE DESCRIPTIONS<br />
material, and to empower them to attempt the problems which are set for classes. Classes are<br />
closely integrated to the lecture programme and are designed to enable students to apply the<br />
material covered in that programme to solve problems and to discuss and evaluate those solutions.<br />
Students are supported throughout the module through private consultation with the module<br />
coordinator.<br />
Indicative study hours: 80<br />
ASSESSMENT:<br />
Examination Component: 100%<br />
One 2 hour examination at the end of the spring semester<br />
The examination paper is designed to enable students to demonstrate their intellectual skills of<br />
analysis, synthesis and evaluation and the extent to which they have met the module learning<br />
outcomes.<br />
Informal assessment is provided through the class problems (for which solutions are provided) which<br />
enable students to self assess the extent to which they are meeting the module learning outcomes.<br />
In addition the module coordinator is available throughout the module to answer queries and discuss<br />
progress with students.<br />
SYLLABUS CONTENT:<br />
Review of portfolio theory & capital market equilibrium. Equity analysis and equity portfolio<br />
management: types and characteristics of equities; measures of equity performance; pricing equities,<br />
equity portfolio management – active and passive management strategies. Bond analysis and<br />
portfolio management: market structure; bond prices yields and returns; bond risks; bond portfolio<br />
management - active and passive strategies. Portfolio performance measurement: objectives and<br />
components of performance measurement; equity portfolio performance measures; bond portfolio<br />
performance measures; evaluation of performance measures; evidence on portfolio performance.<br />
International diversification: returns and risks of international investment; evidence on the<br />
performance of internationally diversified portfolios.<br />
INDICATIVE READING LIST:<br />
Blake, Financial Markets Analysis, 2 nd Edition, Wiley, 2000<br />
Cuthbertson & Nitzsche, Investments: Spot & Derivatives Markets, 2 nd Edition, Wiley, 2008<br />
Haugen, Modern Investment Theory, 5 th Edition, Prentice Hall, 2001<br />
Elton, Gruber, Brown & Goetzmann, Modern Portfolio Theory & Investment Analysis, 8 th Edition,<br />
Wiley, 2011<br />
Bodie, Kane & Marcus, Investments, 8 th Edition, McGraw-Hill, 2009<br />
-178
MODULE DESCRIPTIONS MODULE CATALOGUE<br />
SERVICES & RELATIONSHIP MARKETING<br />
MODULE CODE: BS3742<br />
NUMBER OF CREDITS: 20<br />
SEMESTER Autumn & Spring<br />
PROGRAMMES BSc <strong>Business</strong> Management, BSc <strong>Business</strong> Management (Human<br />
Resources), BSc <strong>Business</strong> Management (International Management),<br />
BSc <strong>Business</strong> Management (Logistics and Operations Management),<br />
BSc <strong>Business</strong> Management (Marketing), BSc <strong>Business</strong> Management<br />
with a European Language, BSc <strong>Business</strong> Management & Finance.<br />
AIMS OF THE MODULE:<br />
This module aims to broaden students’ understanding of marketing beyond that of the traditional<br />
marketing mix approach. It is intended that this course will offer a specialised advanced level module in<br />
the areas of services and relationship marketing.<br />
The module aims to show how service and relational approaches are increasingly becoming the<br />
preferred marketing model. This is facilitated by demonstrating progression from the traditional<br />
marketing mix and services marketing towards an alternative marketing paradigm. Subsequently, a<br />
practical approach is used to show how services marketing and relationship marketing are used in the<br />
business environment. Further strategic developments in marketing are also reviewed, for example<br />
customer relationship management, loyalty and experience marketing.<br />
LEARNING OUTCOMES OF THE MODULE<br />
On completion of the module a student should be able to:<br />
A. Knowledge and Understanding<br />
• Understand the theoretical underpinnings of services marketing and relationship marketing.<br />
• Understand service markets, products and customers<br />
• Understand the application of these approaches to a variety of environmental contexts<br />
• Understand the tools and skills necessary for the successful implementation of both services<br />
marketing and relationship marketing strategies.<br />
B. Intellectual Skills:<br />
• Analyse and evaluate marketing and management issues arising from the services marketing<br />
and relationship marketing approaches<br />
• Critically analyse various contrasting theoretical and practical approaches to services marketing<br />
and relationship marketing.<br />
C. Discipline Specific Skills:<br />
• Be able to apply principles of services marketing and relationship marketing to appropriate<br />
services and environments.<br />
• Develop relational marketing programmes using a range of facilitating interactive media.<br />
D Transferable Skills:<br />
• Be able to construct a balanced and valid argument within a given context.<br />
• Develop a range of presentation and report writing skills appropriate to the business<br />
environment.<br />
• Be aware of wider social issues involved with new business practices.<br />
METHODS OF TEACHING AND LEARNING:<br />
44 hours of classes per student will be provided. These include a number of lectures and small group<br />
sessions.<br />
-179-
MODULE CATALOGUE MODULE DESCRIPTIONS<br />
ASSESSMENT:<br />
Assessment will be via an individual assignment and an examination.<br />
The assignment will be designed to explore students’ understanding of and ability to apply and evaluate<br />
concepts and approaches presented to them in the module.<br />
The examination assesses student understanding of, and ability to use and apply, a both services and<br />
relational approaches to marketing. They will also be examined on their understanding of marketing<br />
theory in these areas.<br />
Examination Component 60%<br />
One 3 hour examination at the end of the Spring Semester<br />
Continuous Assessment 40%<br />
To be submitted in week 11 of the Autumn Semester.<br />
SYLLABUS CONTENT<br />
The development of marketing from the traditional marketing mix with an emphasis on services<br />
marketing and relational marketing.<br />
Understanding service markets, products and customers.<br />
The service-dominant logic perspective.<br />
The Servicescape<br />
Managing people in a services and relationship marketing environment.<br />
Service failure and service recovery.<br />
Origins and theoretical underpinnings of Relationship Marketing.<br />
The facets of successful marketing relationships.<br />
The Relationship Marketing model.<br />
Relationship and Loyalty Marketing in practice.<br />
Relationship maintenance and dissolution.<br />
INDICATIVE READING LIST<br />
Lovelock, C, J Wirtz and P Chew (2009) Essentials of Services Marketing, Pearson: Singapore<br />
Zeithaml, V, Bitner, MJ and Gremler, G (2005) Services Marketing 4e, McGrawHill<br />
Egan, J (2008) Relationship Marketing: Exploring Relational Strategies in Marketing, Pearson: Harlow<br />
Evans, M, O’Malley L and Patterson M (2004) Exploring Direct and Customer Relationship Marketing,<br />
Thomson Learning<br />
Sheth, J and Parvatiyar, A (2000), Handbook of Relationship Marketing, SAGE: Thousand Oaks<br />
Journal of Services Marketing<br />
Journal of Services Research<br />
Journal of Database Marketing<br />
Journal of Interactive Marketing<br />
Journal of Relationship Marketing<br />
-180-
MODULE DESCRIPTIONS MODULE CATALOGUE<br />
STRATEGIC MANAGEMENT<br />
MODULE CODE: BS3543<br />
NUMBER OF CREDITS: 20<br />
SEMESTER: Autumn & Spring<br />
PROGRAMMES: BSc Econ Accounting and Management, BSc Econ Banking & Finance,<br />
BSc Econ <strong>Business</strong> Economics, BSc <strong>Business</strong> Management, BSc<br />
<strong>Business</strong> Management (Human Resources), BSc <strong>Business</strong><br />
Management (International Management), BSc <strong>Business</strong><br />
Management (Logistics & Operations), BSc <strong>Business</strong> Management<br />
(Marketing), BSc <strong>Business</strong> Studies and Japanese, BSc Econ<br />
Economics & Management Studies, BSc <strong>Business</strong> Management with<br />
a European Language, BSc <strong>Business</strong> Management & Finance.<br />
AIMS OF THE MODULE:<br />
The aim of the module is to develop an understanding among students of the new realities of<br />
contemporary business strategy by examining important issues that corporate strategists have to<br />
acknowledge and anticipate in order to compete successfully in the current business environment.<br />
LEARNING OUTCOMES OF THE MODULE<br />
On completion of the module a student should be able to<br />
A. Knowledge and Understanding<br />
• Display knowledge and understanding of the core strategic management concepts both at a<br />
macro and micro level, and of their application within contemporary business.<br />
B. Intellectual Skills:<br />
• Analyse key micro/macro level issues and their implications for strategic management. Such<br />
issues include effective decision making, the management of change, developing and<br />
managing learning, and knowledge, strategic alliances, and corporate governance.<br />
C. Discipline Specific Skills:<br />
• To debate the validity of theories based around competitive advantage and understand the<br />
implications of the internal and external views of the firm and to recognise the overlap<br />
possible across these two perspectives.<br />
• To investigate models of change management and understand the implications for the use of<br />
power and politics within organizations.<br />
• To examine the trend of collaborative strategies such as strategic alliances and joint ventures<br />
as a growth strategy for organisations, exploring current approaches and key success factors.<br />
• To assess the importance of mergers and acquisitions for companies in today’s dynamic<br />
environments and develop awareness of managing the acquisition and merger process.<br />
D Transferable Skills:<br />
• To apply an understanding of Strategic Management theory to solve practical problems in an<br />
industrial context.<br />
• To assess strategic management concepts and corporate strategies from the perspective of<br />
the key themes discussed in the module. Develop analytical skills from case study analysis.<br />
Develop group working skills.<br />
• To debate the validity of theories based around the pursuit of competitive advantage, and to<br />
discuss the significance of concerns about the sustainability and responsibility of businesses<br />
to their various stakeholders.<br />
METHODS OF TEACHING AND LEARNING:<br />
The formal timetabled component of the module comprises 44 hours (40 hours lectures and 4 hours<br />
seminars) in Semesters 1 and 2, supported by on-line learning resources. Lectures are supported by<br />
handouts and students are directed to consolidate and expand their learning through structured<br />
reading. This is detailed in the syllabus for each key theme of the module. Journal articles in each<br />
subject area are utilised in class to highlight recent developments. The opportunity is also taken in<br />
the lectures to use a variety of media such as videos and demonstrations of specific examples of new<br />
-181-
MODULE CATALOGUE MODULE DESCRIPTIONS<br />
information technology. Seminars are used to consolidate knowledge on several of the key themes<br />
covered in the module via case study analysis.<br />
Indicative study hours: 160<br />
ASSESSMENT:<br />
Examination Component 60%<br />
One 3 hour examination at the end of Spring Semester<br />
Continuous Assessment 20%<br />
One essay based assignment of 1500 words to be submitted at the<br />
beginning of December<br />
20%<br />
One report based assignment of 1500 words to be submitted in<br />
February<br />
Formal:<br />
Two in-course assignments of 1500 words each. The first essay based assignment will allow students<br />
to apply some of the theory they have covered in phase one of the module. The second assignment<br />
will be of a report style format and will allow the students to demonstrate application of the theory<br />
covered across phases one and two using an industrial context.<br />
One three-hour examination, where students are required to answer three questions. The<br />
examinations contain a range of questions designed to cover all the learning outcomes for the module<br />
and to test skill development. Emphasis is placed on testing students’ application of knowledge in<br />
particular contexts and their ability to critically assess and synthesise the knowledge obtained from<br />
the module as a whole.<br />
SYLLABUS CONTENT:<br />
The module addresses key areas of strategy. The external view reflects the position of an<br />
organisation in its industry. The internal view covers the internal resources and competencies of the<br />
organisation. Each of these two areas contributes to understanding the sources of advantage for an<br />
organisation. Mergers and acquisitions focuses on a key area of strategy implementation while<br />
decision making and organisational change looks at the process and management of strategy<br />
implementation. Corporate governance considers the responsibility of the organisation to its<br />
stakeholders and also considers issues of strategic control.<br />
INDICATIVE READING LIST:<br />
Strategic Management Competitiveness and Globalization. Volberda et al (2011). Cenga<br />
-182
MODULE DESCRIPTIONS MODULE CATALOGUE<br />
STRATEGIC SUPPLY MANAGEMENT<br />
MODULE CODE: BS3738<br />
NUMBER OF CREDITS: 20<br />
SEMESTER: Autumn & Spring<br />
PROGRAMMES: BSc <strong>Business</strong> Management, BSc Management (International<br />
Management), BSc <strong>Business</strong> Management (Logistics &<br />
Operations).<br />
AIMS OF THE MODULE:<br />
The strategic management literature suggests that effective supply chain management offers<br />
enormous potential to unlocking competitive advantage. This module explores specific supply<br />
management strategies for tapping that potential, providing students with a broad-based<br />
understanding of the factors, mechanisms and processes relevant to establishing and maintaining<br />
effective supply chain management and improvement. In doing so, this module builds on students’<br />
knowledge developed in BS2541 Purchasing and Supply Chain Management.<br />
The module content has also received recognition by the Chartered Institute of Purchasing and<br />
Supply (CIPS)’s. Students who successfully complete this module as part of the BSc <strong>Business</strong><br />
Management (Logistics & Operations) pathway, will gain accelerated entry to (CIPS) level 6, should<br />
graduates later wish to pursue CIPS professional qualifications.<br />
LEARNING OUTCOMES OF THE MODULE<br />
On completion of the module a student should be able to;<br />
A. Knowledge and Understanding<br />
• Identify and evaluate a range of world-class techniques for performance improvement.<br />
• Appraise key logistics concepts, both traditional and contemporary<br />
B. Intellectual Skills:<br />
• Critically appraise the role of supply management within the supply chain as a vehicle for<br />
achieving competitive advantage.<br />
• Demonstrate analytical and written communication skills by presenting their arguments<br />
clearly and concisely in written form in accordance with appropriate scholarly conventions in<br />
assessed work and in response to examination questions.<br />
C. Discipline Specific Skills:<br />
• Analyse the strategic factors that impact the planning, policy formation and effectiveness of<br />
supply chain management.<br />
• Critically appraise the application of world class performance improvement techniques.<br />
D Transferable Skills:<br />
• Develop analytical, communication and learning skills through workshops and seminars.<br />
• �Develop critical ability in the interpretation of empirical evidence.<br />
METHODS OF TEACHING AND LEARNING:<br />
The module comprises 44 hours of lectures and tutorials spread over two semesters.<br />
Teaching methods will involve a combination of formal lectures which includes some sessions<br />
delivered by industry experts and visiting academics. More informal tutorial sessions are designed to<br />
encourage discussion and participation. Students will be encouraged to explore the application of<br />
concepts learned through the use of contemporary case studies. Indicative study hours: 160<br />
-183-
MODULE CATALOGUE MODULE DESCRIPTIONS<br />
ASSESSMENT:<br />
Formal assessment consists of two key elements: examination and continuous assessment.<br />
Examination content 60%<br />
A three-hour examination at the end of the Spring<br />
semester.<br />
Continuous assessment 40%<br />
A written assignment of 4000 words to be submitted<br />
in the Spring semester.<br />
Formal assessment consists of two key elements: examination and continuous assessment.<br />
Examination content (60%): a three-hour examination at the end of the Spring semester. The<br />
examination is designed to cover the learning outcomes for the module and to test skill development.<br />
Questions are set not only to test students’ basic comprehension of the syllabus but also their ability<br />
to apply such knowledge in particular contexts.<br />
Continuous assessment (40%): the continuous assessment coursework consists of one written piece<br />
of 4000 words, presented as a formal report. This will assess the students’ ability to solve complex<br />
problems relating to supply management in a systematic manner.<br />
Informal assessment is provided through tutorials in which students are required to work in teams to<br />
tackle problems presented through case studies and to formally feedback their collective view.<br />
SYLLABUS CONTENT:<br />
The context of supply chain management; World-class performance improvement techniques;<br />
Strategic supply commercial relationships; Key inhibitors to supply chain integration; Change<br />
management within the supply chain; Risk Management; Environmental Considerations; Lean and<br />
Agile Philosophies.<br />
INDICATIVE READING LIST:<br />
Lysons, K.Farrington, B (2006) Purchasing & Supply Chain Management.7th Edn. FT. Pearson<br />
Cousins, P., Lamming, R & Lawson, B (2009) Strategic Supply Management: Principles, Theories and<br />
Practice. FT. Pearson<br />
Hines P., 2004, Creating World-Class Suppliers, FT. Pitman<br />
Womack J., Jones D. and Roos D., 1990, The Machine That Changed The World, Maxwell Macmillan<br />
Given the advanced nature of the module, students are expected to make use of relevant journals:<br />
Journal of Purchasing and Supply Management<br />
Journal of <strong>Business</strong> Logistics<br />
Supply Chain Management: An International Journal<br />
Supply Management: CIPS<br />
-184-
MODULE DESCRIPTIONS MODULE CATALOGUE<br />
THE ACCOUNTING PROFESSION<br />
MODULE CODE: BS3618<br />
NUMBER OF CREDITS: 10<br />
SEMESTER: Spring<br />
PROGRAMMES: BSc Accounting, BSc Accounting & Finance, BSc Accounting with a<br />
European Language<br />
AIMS OF THE MODULE:<br />
The aim of the module is to provide final year students in accountancy with critical insights to the<br />
profession they may enter or are likely to engage with during their careers. The course looks beyond<br />
the technical knowledge and skills acquired in earlier accounting modules to focus on the<br />
professionals who apply that knowledge and skill as members of professional organisations working in<br />
accountancy firms, industry and the public sector. The inclusion of subjects such as ethical decision<br />
making adds a vocationally relevant dimension to the module. The module is designed to offer<br />
historical and contemporary insights to issues such as: the problematic organisation of the<br />
accountancy profession; the power of accountancy firms; the changing scope of professional work;<br />
shifting boundaries with other professions; the accountancy profession in the global economy;<br />
exclusion from the profession on the basis of class, gender and race; diversity; the ‘problem’ of the<br />
accountant stereotype; threats to accounting professionalism; and challenges to professional ethics.<br />
LEARNING OUTCOMES OF THE MODULE<br />
On completion of the module a student should be able to<br />
Knowledge and Understanding:<br />
• Describe the principal theories which seek to explain and interpret professionalisation<br />
projects.<br />
• Relate the structure and development of the accountancy profession in the UK.<br />
• Understand the importance of recruitment and socialisation processes to the construction of<br />
the professional accountant.<br />
• Comprehend the significance of class, gender and ethnicity as barriers to recruitment and<br />
career building in the accountancy profession.<br />
• Analyse the changing patterns of professional work in accountancy and interfaces with other<br />
professions.<br />
• Assess the impact of commercialisation on accounting professionalism.<br />
• Evaluate the changing nature of professional ethics in accountancy.<br />
• Understand the significance of globalisation to the development of the international<br />
accountancy profession.<br />
Intellectual Skills:<br />
• Identification and utilisation of relevant information<br />
• Analysis of qualitative data<br />
• Critical evaluation and interpretation of information<br />
• Synthesising and communicating findings<br />
• Problem identification and solving<br />
Discipline Specific (including practical) Skills:<br />
Critical awareness of:<br />
• Behaviour of accountants, accounting firms and professional organisations<br />
• Composition and application of accountancy practice<br />
• Contexts in which professional work is conducted<br />
• Ethical decision making<br />
• Nature of accounting professionalism<br />
• Inter-professional boundaries<br />
Transferable Skills:<br />
-185-
MODULE CATALOGUE MODULE DESCRIPTIONS<br />
• Independent learning skills<br />
• Interpersonal communication skills<br />
• Organisation skills<br />
• Research skills<br />
• Analytical skills<br />
• Synthesising skills<br />
• Empathy skills<br />
• Written and oral communication skills<br />
METHODS OF TEACHING AND LEARNING:<br />
The teaching will be research led, drawing on the expertise of members of staff in the accounting and<br />
finance section in this field. The emphasis will be on teaching and learning through the use of<br />
qualitative material.<br />
Lectures: 17 hours<br />
Lectures will introduce each topic (supported by handouts) and form a base from which students will<br />
be encouraged to read widely, drawing heavily on academic journal articles. Students will also be<br />
encouraged to access professional journals on past and current issues.<br />
Classes: 5 hours<br />
Classes will focus on critical discussion of issues drawn from the academic and professional literature.<br />
The emphasis will be on student participation through presentations, case analysis and role playing.<br />
The classes will provide opportunities for both individual and group work.<br />
ASSESSMENT:<br />
In accord with other 10-credit third year accounting modules the assessment will comprise a two hour<br />
examination.<br />
The examination will comprise six qualitative questions from which three will be answered. The<br />
questions will be designed to test the knowledge and understanding of students in the areas related<br />
above, as well as students’ skills of interpretation, synthesis, problem solving and critical analysis.<br />
SYLLABUS CONTENT:<br />
The syllabus will comprise the following in historical and contemporary contexts:<br />
1. Introduction to professions and the accounting profession<br />
2. Professionalisation of accounting.<br />
3. Recruitment, socialisation and professional identity.<br />
4. Gender and the accounting profession.<br />
5. Race, ethnicity and the accounting profession.<br />
6. Accountancy work and inter-professional jurisdictions.<br />
7. Professional ethics.<br />
8. Commercialisation, globalisation and professionalism.<br />
9. Deprofessionalisation or new professionalism.<br />
-186-
MODULE DESCRIPTIONS MODULE CATALOGUE<br />
INDICATIVE READING LIST:<br />
Abbott, A. (1988) The System of Professions. Chicago: Chicago University Press.<br />
Annisette, M. (2003) ‘The colour of accountancy: examining the salience of race in a<br />
professionalisation project’. Accounting, Organisations & Society 28 (7-8): 639-674.<br />
Anderson-Gough, F., Grey, C. and Robson, K. (2005) ‘’Helping them to forget’ the organizational<br />
embedding of gender relations in public audit firms’. Accounting, Organisations & Society 30 (5): 469-<br />
490.<br />
Arnold, P. (2005) ‘Disciplining domestic regulation: the World Trade Organization and the market for<br />
professional services’. Accounting, Organisations & Society 30 (4): 299-330.<br />
Bougen, P D. (1994) ‘Joking apart: the serious side to the accountant stereotype’. Accounting,<br />
Organizations and Society, 19: 319-335.<br />
Hammond, T. (2003) A White Collar Profession: African American Certified Public Accountants since<br />
1921. University of North Carolina Press.<br />
Hanlon, G. (1994) The Commercialisation of Accountancy. Basingstoke: Macmillan.<br />
ICAS (2004) Taking Ethics to Heart. Edinburgh: ICAS.<br />
Kirkham, L.M. and Loft, A. (1993) ‘Gender and the construction of the professional accountant’.<br />
Accounting, Organisations & Society 18 (6): 507-558.<br />
Matthews, D., Anderson, M. and Edwards, J.R. (1998) The Priesthood of Industry. The Rise of the<br />
Professional Accountant in British Management. Oxford: OUP.<br />
Walker, S.P. (1996) ‘The criminal upperworld and the emergence of a disciplinary code in the early<br />
chartered accountancy profession’. Accounting History 1 (2): 7-36.<br />
Walker, S.P. (2004). ‘The genesis of professional organisation in English accountancy’. Accounting,<br />
Organisations & Society 29 (2): 127-156.<br />
Willmott, H. (1986). ‘Organising the profession: a theoretical and historical examination of the<br />
development of the major accountancy bodies in the UK’. Accounting, Organisations & Society 11 (6):<br />
555-580.<br />
-187-
MODULE CATALOGUE MODULE DESCRIPTIONS<br />
WORK AND EMPLOYMENT<br />
MODULE CODE: BS3538<br />
NUMBER OF CREDITS: 20<br />
SEMESTER: Autumn & Spring<br />
PROGRAMMES: BSc Econ Accounting and Management, BSc Econ Banking and<br />
Finance, BSc <strong>Business</strong> Management, BSc <strong>Business</strong> Management<br />
(Human Resources), BSc <strong>Business</strong> Management (International<br />
Management), BSc <strong>Business</strong> Management (Logistics and Operations),<br />
BSc <strong>Business</strong> Management (Marketing), BSc <strong>Business</strong> Management<br />
with a European Language, BSc Econ <strong>Business</strong> Economics, BSc<br />
<strong>Business</strong> Studies and Japanese, BSc Econ Economics and<br />
Management Studies.<br />
AIMS OF THE MODULE:<br />
To develop a critical knowledge and understanding of the changing content, management and<br />
experience of work in contemporary industrial society.<br />
LEARNING OUTCOMES OF THE MODULE<br />
On completion of the module a student should be able to<br />
A. Knowledge and Understanding<br />
• Demonstrate knowledge and understanding of the different ways of analysing work skills in<br />
the social sciences and evaluate the debate over the changing nature of skill with reference<br />
to the knowledge economy.<br />
• Demonstrate an understanding of the concept of emotional labour and its relevance to the<br />
contemporary workplace.<br />
• Display an understanding and ability to critically review debates in sociology about the nature<br />
of control and consent within the ‘new’ workplace.<br />
• Demonstrate knowledge and understanding of the debate over worker responses to<br />
contemporary management practice.<br />
• Understand the importance of time in the overall experience of work and assess the<br />
approaches of management and workforce to working time issues.<br />
• Assess the importance of workers’ collective representation within the workplace.<br />
• Assess the components and importance of ‘hidden’ work and its relevance to work in the<br />
formal sector.<br />
• Assess the changing nature of careers in contemporary society.<br />
• Demonstrate a knowledge and ability to evaluate critically current theories of the future of<br />
work<br />
B. Intellectual Skills: Analysis/Synthesis/Evaluation<br />
• Make use of lectures, tutorials, assignments and independent study to acquire knowledge and<br />
understanding of theories and research findings on the changing nature of work in<br />
contemporary societies.<br />
• Develop a critical understanding of theory and debate over the nature, experience and<br />
development of work.<br />
• Develop a capacity to apply social theory to the analysis of work in capitalist societies.<br />
C. Discipline Specific Skills:<br />
• Develop a knowledge of sociological and management theories of work and their relevance to<br />
the analysis of changes in work in contemporary society.<br />
• Develop a capacity to read, evaluate and synthesise original research of both quantitative and<br />
qualitative forms produced by researchers in the field of work sociology<br />
D. Transferable Skills:<br />
• Develop the ability to interpret research data produced in the social sciences.<br />
• Develop a capacity to communicate orally through participation in tutorial debate and other<br />
exercises<br />
• Develop a capacity to synthesise research data and write assignments to communicate ideas,<br />
knowledge and arguments.<br />
• Work individually through guided study and make use of lectures, tutorials, reading lists,<br />
-188-
MODULE DESCRIPTIONS MODULE CATALOGUE<br />
websites and assignments to develop knowledge of work sociology.<br />
• Work in groups in problem-solving and other activities within tutorials.<br />
• Make use of word-processing other software to generate assignments.<br />
METHODS OF TEACHING AND LEARNING:<br />
The module is delivered through 32 hours of lectures, delivered over two semesters. The lectures<br />
provide a range of theoretical perspectives and practical illustrations relating to themes and debate<br />
over the nature of the contemporary workplace. Examples used are drawn from the lecturers’ current<br />
research. Students are provided with a list of reading and journal titles relevant to the subject area<br />
and are required to undertake self-directed study.<br />
The lectures are supported by 12 hours of tutorials. The latter reflect the main themes in the module<br />
and are based around carefully selected, appropriate reading. It is a requirement that students<br />
prepare for tutorials through reading and debate and discuss themes. There is an emphasis on<br />
student participation with tutors acting as facilitators.<br />
Indicative study hours: 160<br />
ASSESSMENT:<br />
Examination Component 60%<br />
One 3 hour examination at the end of the Spring Semester.<br />
Continuous Assessment 40%<br />
One essay of 3000 words to be submitted in week 1 of the Spring<br />
Semester<br />
Assessment combines an end-of-module examination and an individual written assignment of 3000<br />
words.<br />
The examination requires students to answer three questions; one related to work covered in<br />
semester one and two related to work covered in semester two. It provides for summative<br />
assessment and requires students to display subject relevant knowledge and understanding and the<br />
intellectual skills of analysis, synthesis and argument.<br />
The individual assignment provides both summative and formative assessment, covering detailed<br />
knowledge and understanding of a specific aspect of the module subject matter and intellectual,<br />
discipline-specific and transferable skills, including the capacity to gather and interpret research<br />
material and present it in a communicable form. The assignment relates to the material delivered in<br />
semester one of the module. It requires students to search for and identify relevant research material<br />
and demonstrate a critical understanding of theoretical interpretations of the changing nature of<br />
work. Formative assessment is provided for through the use of assessment criteria, which are<br />
communicated to students and discussed prior to the work being completed. Feedback is provided on<br />
a group and individual basis using these same criteria.<br />
SYLLABUS CONTENT:<br />
Syllabus content focuses on contemporary debate and research on the nature of work and<br />
employment. Themes include: the meaning of work; content of work, including skills, knowledge work<br />
and emotional labour; the organisation of work, including the organisation of working time, the<br />
representation of collective interests and the relationship between the formal and informal economy;<br />
the management of work, including new forms of control and strategies to elicit consent; responses<br />
to work, including survival strategies and resistance; the future of work, including theories of work<br />
futures and the changing nature of careers.<br />
-189